0% found this document useful (0 votes)

351 views334 pages

Schneider - PowerLogic P1F - Manual

Uploaded by

sierra67_lee3476

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

351 views334 pages

Schneider - PowerLogic P1F - Manual

Uploaded by

sierra67_lee3476

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 334

PowerLogic P1F

Protection Relay
User Manual

Version: P1F/EN M/1.2.1

05/2024

www.se.com
Protection Relay

Legal Information
The Schneider Electric brand and any trademarks of Schneider Electric SE and its
subsidiaries referred to in this guide are the property of Schneider Electric SE or its
subsidiaries. All other brands may be trademarks of their respective owners.

This guide and its content are protected under applicable copyright laws and
furnished for informational use only. No part of this guide may be reproduced or
transmitted in any form or by any means (electronic, mechanical, photocopying,
recording, or otherwise), for any purpose, without the prior written permission of
Schneider Electric.

Schneider Electric does not grant any right or license for commercial use of the
guide or its content, except for a non-exclusive and personal license to consult it on
an "as is" basis. Schneider Electric products and equipment should be installed,
operated, serviced, and maintained only by qualified personnel.
As standards, specifications, and designs change from time to time, information
contained in this guide may be subject to change without notice.

To the extent permitted by applicable law, no responsibility or liability is assumed by

Schneider Electric and its subsidiaries for any errors or omissions in the
informational content of this material or consequences arising out of or resulting
from the use of the information contained herein.

2 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Protection Relay

Table of Contents
Legal Information ...............................................................................................2
General information ...........................................................................................6
Safety information and password protection .....................................................7
Presentation ......................................................................................................8
Introduction .............................................................................................. 8
Identification........................................................................................... 13
Installation ...................................................................................................... 16
Safety Precautions ................................................................................ 16
Precautions ............................................................................................ 17
Equipment Receipt and Identification .................................................... 19
Mounting and Assembly ........................................................................ 20
Connectors ............................................................................................ 24
Connection Diagrams ............................................................................ 30
Connecting Current Transformers (CTs) ............................................... 33
Connecting a Core Balance CT ............................................................. 35
Connecting Binary Inputs and Outputs Relays ...................................... 37
Connecting the Communication Port ..................................................... 39
Dimensioning the CTs ........................................................................... 40
CSH120, CSH200 and CSH300 Core Balance CTs ............................. 43
Commissioning ............................................................................................... 47
Safety Precautions ................................................................................ 47
Principles ............................................................................................... 48
Testing and Metering Equipment Required ........................................... 50
Energization ........................................................................................... 52
Validation of the Complete Protection Chain ......................................... 53
Checking Settings .................................................................................. 54
Checking the CT Ratio .......................................................................... 55
Checking the Phase Current Input Connections ................................... 56
Checking the Earth Fault Current Input Connections ............................ 58
Phase Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 50/51) Test ................................. 60
Earth Fault Protection (ANSI 50N/51N) Test ......................................... 63
Thermal Overload Protection (ANSI 49) Test ........................................ 68
Checking the Logic Input Connections .................................................. 70
Operational Commissioning .................................................................. 71
PowerLogic P1F Test Sheet .................................................................. 72
Use ................................................................................................................. 78
Human Machine Interface ..................................................................... 78
Operation ............................................................................................... 80
Settings .................................................................................................. 84
Password Protection .............................................................................. 90
USB Communication Port ...................................................................... 91

3 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
RS485 Communication Port .................................................................. 93
First Steps with eSetup Easergy Pro ..................................................... 94
Menu Map .............................................................................................. 99
Communication with Power Operation ................................................ 109
Functions and Parameters ........................................................................... 111
Phase CT Ratio ................................................................................... 111
Earth CT Ratio or Core Balance CT Rating ........................................ 112
Network Frequency ............................................................................. 113
Phase Overcurrent (ANSI 50-51) ........................................................ 114
Earth Fault Protection (ANSI 50N-51N) .............................................. 120
Overcurrent Protection Tripping Curves .............................................. 129
Cold Load Pick-up ............................................................................... 139
Inrush blocking..................................................................................... 141
Thermal Overload Protection (ANSI 49) .............................................. 144
Circuit Breaker Control ........................................................................ 147
External Trip (Auxiliary timers) ............................................................ 150
Logic Discrimination (ANSI 68) ............................................................ 152
Operating Language ............................................................................ 154
Trip Circuit Supervision (TCS) ............................................................. 155
Date and Time ..................................................................................... 161
Password ............................................................................................. 162
Watchdog Relay .................................................................................. 166
Auto-Reclose (ANSI 79) ...................................................................... 167
Negative Sequence Overcurrent (ANSI 46) ........................................ 176
Broken Conductor (ANSI 46BC) .......................................................... 179
Switch-On-To-Fault.............................................................................. 181
Circuit Breaker Failure (ANSI 50BF) ................................................... 183
Communication Orders ........................................................................ 185
Circuit Breaker Monitoring ................................................................... 186
Circuit Breaker Status Monitoring ........................................................ 192
Circuit Breaker Supervision ................................................................. 193
Local / Remote Mode .......................................................................... 195
Setting Group Selection ....................................................................... 197
Commissioning Mode .......................................................................... 200
Real Time Clock Synchronization via Opto-Inputs .............................. 203
Resetting of Latched LEDs and Outputs ............................................. 204
Fault and Alarm Records ..................................................................... 206
Instantaneous Records ........................................................................ 208
Alarm Status ........................................................................................ 209
Event Records ..................................................................................... 210
Measurements and Related Settings .................................................. 212
Counters .............................................................................................. 213

4 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Protection Relay

Disturbance Records ........................................................................... 215

Communication............................................................................................. 216
Introduction .......................................................................................... 216
MODBUS PROTOCOL ........................................................................ 217
IEC 60870-5-103 INTERFACE ............................................................ 278
Characteristics .............................................................................................. 290
Function Characteristics ...................................................................... 290
Default Settings ................................................................................... 299
Technical Characteristics .................................................................... 314
Environmental Characteristics ............................................................. 318
Maintenance ................................................................................................. 322
Preventive Maintenance ...................................................................... 322
Troubleshooting Assistance ................................................................ 323
Removing PowerLogic P1F ................................................................. 325
Application Cases ......................................................................................... 327
2CTs and CBCT application ................................................................ 327
3CTs and Residual Current application ............................................... 328
3CTs and CBCT Application with CB Control ..................................... 329
Single Phase Application ..................................................................... 330
Logic Discrimination ............................................................................ 331
Version History ............................................................................................. 332

5 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
General information
Legal notice
Copyright

2021 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

Disclaimer
No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out
of the use of this document. This document is not intended as an instruction manual
for untrained persons. This document gives instructions on device installation,
commissioning and operation. However, the manual cannot cover all conceivable
circumstances or include detailed information on all topics. In the event of questions
or specific issues, do not take any action without proper authorisation. Contact
Schneider Electric and request the necessary information.

Contact information
35 rue Joseph Monier
92500 Rueil-Malmaison
FRANCE
Phone: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00
Fax: +33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00
www.se.com

Purpose
This user manual is intended for people who are experts on electrical power
engineering, panel builder, commissioner, and experienced users, communication
specialists or general users of the PowerLogicTM P1 protection relays.
The complete manual is arranged as follows:

• Preliminary sections, with the details of the manual (how to use it, glossary) and
technical data.
• Functions of the protection relay.
Explanations, diagrams and settings of the protection, control, monitoring and
maintenance, measurement, recording and programmable logic functions are
detailed in these sections.

• Installation and commissioning.

• Local control panel use, troubleshooting and maintenance instructions.

The following documents complete this manual:

• Quick Start Guide, delivered in the relay package, summarises instructions for
installation.
• Communication Manual, for the understanding and the setup of the
communication protocols with PowerLogic P1 protection relays.
We welcome your comments about this document. You can reach us by contacting
Customer Care Centre Contact page:
http://www.se.com/CCC

6 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Safety information and password protection
Important information
Read these instructions carefully and look at the equipment to become familiar with
the device before trying to install, operate, service or maintain it. The following
special messages may appear throughout this manual or on the equipment to warn
of potential hazards or to call attention to information that clarifies or simplifies a
procedure.
The addition of this symbol to a "Danger" or "Warning" safety
label indicates that an electrical hazard exists which will result
in death or serious injury if the instructions are not followed.
This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you to
potential personal injury hazards. Obey all safety messages
that follow this symbol to avoid possible injury or death.

DANGER
DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will
result in death or serious injury.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, can
result in death or serious injury.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or
equipment damage.

CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, can
result in minor or moderate injury, or equipment damage.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment
damage.

NOTICE
NOTICE is used to address practices not related to physical injury.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

User qualification
Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced, and maintained only by
trained and qualified personnel. No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric
for any consequences arising out of the use of this material. A qualified person is
one who has skills and knowledge related to the construction, installation, and
operation of electrical equipment and has received safety training to recognise and
avoid the hazards involved.
Use the password protection feature in order to protect untrained person interacting
with the PowerLogic P1 protection relay.

7 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Protection Relay Presentation

Presentation
Introduction
The PowerLogic P1F Family
The PowerLogic P1F is a member of PowerLogic P1 product family. The
PowerLogic P1F family of protection relays is designed for the protection and
operation of MV/LV utility substations and electrical distribution networks in industrial
installations.
It comprises six models suitable for normal protection applications involving current
metering:
• PowerLogic P1F model L (3 + WD relay outputs, without communication port) for
phase overcurrent and earth fault protection
• PowerLogic P1F model L (3 + WD relay outputs, with communication port) for
phase overcurrent and earth fault protection
• PowerLogic P1F model N (5 + WD relay outputs, with communication port) for
phase overcurrent, earth fault protection and thermal overload protection
• PowerLogic P1F model B (4 binary inputs, 3 + WD relay outputs, with
communication port) for phase overcurrent, earth fault protection, thermal
overload protection, switch on to fault and external trip
• PowerLogic P1F model A (4 binary inputs, 7 + WD relay outputs, with
communication port) for phase overcurrent, earth fault protection, thermal
overload protection, switch on to fault, external trip and inrush block
• PowerLogic P1F model E (8 binary inputs, 5 + WD relay outputs, with
communication port) for phase overcurrent, earth fault protection, thermal
overload protection, switch on to fault, external trip, inrush block, negative
sequence overcurrent, broken conductor and autoreclose
• PowerLogic P1F model E+ (8 binary inputs, 5 + WD relay outputs, with
communication port) for phase overcurrent, directional and admittance earth fault
protection, thermal overload protection, switch on to fault, external trip, inrush
block, negative sequence overcurrent, broken conductor and autoreclose

Example: PowerLogic P1F

Main Advantages of PowerLogic P1F

PowerLogic P1F is easily installed in a switchboard:
• It is compact with uniquely small installation footprint
• It is held in place in the switchboard by spring clips or screw clamps (fastening
elements)
• The connection terminals are clearly identified.
PowerLogic P1F is quick to commission:
• It comes with default parameters.
• Its settings are entered on the front panel by means of its display and well-
designed keypad.

8 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Protection Relay Presentation

• It can be commissioned without using a PC.

• It can be commissioned with using a PC and dedicated software (eSetup
Easergy Pro)
PowerLogic P1F makes it easy to operate substations:
• It has numerous customization options so that it can be adapted to specific
operating constraints.
• Its display unit can display screens in several languages.
• It indicates tripping explicitly and spontaneously.
PowerLogic P1F is a robust product that is easy to maintain:
• The case is made of insulated plastic.
• The unit can withstand harsh environments:
• Front panel degree of protection: IP54
• Range of operating temperatures-25°C to +60°C (-13°F to +140°F)
• No battery inside – data and time are maintained by a backup capacitor.

PowerLogic P1F Applications

PowerLogic P1F relays provide accurate protection for various applications requiring
phase overcurrent and/or earth fault protection. With a focus on tailoring to user's
needs, PowerLogic P1F is offered in 6 hardware model variants. All of them are
housed in uniquely small case what:

• Model L

Basic phase and earth fault current protection with fault recording and two setting
groups. With only 4 relay output contacts and circuit breaker control keys, this
model is the most economical option in the range. A good choice for retrofit of
older technology devices or for a low cost medium or low voltage substations.
This model is offered as non-communicating however it may be extended with a
rear RS485 port for remote communication (switchable IEC 60870-5- 103 or
Modbus).

• Model N

Communicating device with basic phase overcurrent and earth fault protection. It
provides thermal overload function, fault and events recording and two setting
groups. It comprises 6 relay outputs, a front USB and rear RS485 communication
port with switchable IEC 60870-5-103 or Modbus protocol. Circuit breaker control
can be effected via front panel keys and from SCADA. This model is cost-
optimized for essential protection functions that require serial communication.
Suited to industrial or commercial sites with medium voltage electric supply as
back-up protection or to low voltage substations.

• Model B
Standard protection relay with phase overcurrent, earth fault protection and
communication. It provides switch on to fault and blocking logic functions, event
and fault recording and two setting groups. It comprises 4 relay outputs and 4
binary inputs, a front USB and rear RS485 communication port. Circuit breaker
control is effected by front panel keys, remote communication port or via binary
input. It’s suited to industrial or commercial sites with medium voltage supply as
cost optimized protection solution for feeder, incomer or transformer. Thus, it is
one of the best choices for panel builders and OEMs as a standard, compact and
effective protection relay.

• Model A

9 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Protection Relay Presentation

Advanced model with phase overcurrent and earth fault protection. Covering all
features of model B, it’s comprises additionally inrush blocking function and in-
built circuit breaker and trip circuit supervision. Moreover it can store 4 sec of
disturbance records. CB control can be realized via front panel keys, remotely
thru communication port or via binary input. This model offers a unique
functionality of powering HMI board via USB front port. It means that setting and
data downloading can be done without auxiliary voltage presence. Having 4
binary inputs and 8 relays outputs it can be applied to more advanced schemes
within utilities or industrial sites as feeder, incomer or transformer protection.

• Model E

More advanced model with phase overcurrent and earth fault protection.
Covering all features of model A it comprises 8 binary inputs and 6 output relays.
This relay can meet the requirements of more advanced applications in medium
and low voltage substation. Additionally, in-built negative sequence overcurrent
protection, broken conductor detection and 4 shot auto-reclose function makes
PowerLogic P1F suitable as a feeder protection of overhead lines. Thanks to
small size and high functionality, this relay is regarded as a good retrofit solution
for almost all overcurrent electromechanical devices including auto-reclose
relays. If back-up protection relay is needed, the PowerLogic P1F model E will
provide required functionality and will keep the budget healthy.

• Model E+

It’s a highest model in PowerLogic P1F range. Covering all features of model E it
comprises 8 binary inputs and 6 output relays. This relay can meet the
requirements of more advanced applications in medium and low voltage
substation. Additionally, in-built directional and/or admittance earth fault
protection makes PowerLogic P1F suitable as a feeder protection of overhead
lines. If back-up protection relay is needed, the PowerLogic P1F model E will
provide required functionality and will keep the budget healthy.

Selection Table
The selection table lists the functions performed by the various PowerLogic P1F
models in standard operation.
PowerLogic P1F model
ANSI code L L N B A E E+
(RS485)
Hardware
Phase current inputs 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Residual current inputs 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Neutral voltage inputs - - - - - - 1
Digital inputs - - - 4 4 8 8
Digital outputs 3+WD 3+WD 5+WD 3+WD 7+WD 5+WD 5+WD
USB front port with powering - - 1 1 1 1 1
RS485 rear port - 1 1 1 1 1 1
Protection functions
Phase overcurrent 50/51 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Earth fault overcurrent 50N/51N 2 2 2 2 2 3 3
Negative sequence overcurrent 46 - - - - - 1 1
Broken conductor 46BC - - - - - 1 1
Thermal overload 49 - - 1 1 1 1 1

10 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Protection Relay Presentation

Circuit Breaker failure 50BF 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Switch on to fault (SOTF) 50HS - - - 1 1 1 1
Directional earth-fault o/c 67N - - - - - - 2
Admittance 21YN - - - - - - 2
Inrush block 68F2 - - - - 1 1 1
Auto-recloser 79 - - - - - 4 4
Lockout 86 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Cold load pick-up 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Blocking logic - - - 1 1 1 1
IDMT curves 21 21 21 21 21 21 21
Setting groups 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Auxiliary timers - - - 4 4 4 4
Control functions
Local/remote function - ● ● ● ● ● ●
Local control with I/O keys ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Remote control with RS485 - ● ● ● ● ● ●
Remote control with digital inputs - - - ● ● ● ●
Time Synchronisation with digital
input - - - - - ● ●
Measurement
RMS current values ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Thermal overload - - ● ● ● ● ●
Inrush current ratio - - - - ● ● ●
Positive sequence of current Is1 - - - - - ● ●
Negative sequence of current Is2 - - - - - ● ●
Relative Is2/IS1 - - - - - ● ●
Phase Peak Demand Current
Values ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Logs and Records
Fault record 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
Event record - 200 200 200 200 200 200
Disturbance record - - - - 4 sec 4 sec 4 sec
Monitoring functions
Trip circuit supervision 74 - - - 1 1 1 1
Circuit breaker monitoring &
diagnostics - - - - 1 1 1
Counters - - - - 1 1 1
Self-supervision (WD) ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Earth Fault Protection

To help to protect networks against phase-to-earth faults, the earth fault protection
sensitivity level must be selected at the time of ordering from one of two values. The
sensors to be used and the set point setting range depend on the chosen sensitivity:

Sensitivity Sensors Setting range

Standard 3 phase CTs or 1 earth CT (0.05 – 12) Ion

Sensitive 3 phase CTs or 1 earth CT (0.01 – 2) Ion

(i.g. CSH120, CSH200, CSH300)

11 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Protection Relay Presentation

Power Supply Voltage

The PowerLogic P1F power supply voltage can be DC or AC. Three power supply
voltage ranges are available, as indicated in the following table:

PowerLogic P1F model

Power Supply L N B A E E+
Voltage

24 – 240 V ac
● ● - - - -
24 – 250 V dc

24 – 60 V ac
- - ● ● ● ●
24 – 60 V dc

90 – 240 V ac
- - ● ● ● ●
90 – 250 V dc

12 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Protection Relay Presentation

Identification
Reference Code
The reference code for a PowerLogic P1F is an alphanumeric code that defines the
PowerLogic P1F main functions and hardware options. List of available model look
as follows:
Model L: 4 relay outputs, without binary inputs and communication
Cortec no. Ion Vx Catalogue no.
Vx = 24-240Vac and
P1F1L1N0N92N0NN11N Ion = 1A/5A ; (0.01-2)Ion REL15000
Vx = 24-250Vdc

Vx = 24-240Vac and
P1F1L1N3N92N0NN11N Ion = 1A/5A ; (0.05-12)Ion REL15001
Vx = 24-250Vdc

Model L: 4 relay outputs, without binary inputs, rear RS485 port included
Cortec no. Ion Vx Catalogue no.
Vx = 24-240Vac and
P1F1L1N0N92N1NN11N Ion = 1A/5A ; (0.01-2)Ion REL15002
Vx = 24-250Vdc

Vx = 24-240Vac and
P1F1L1N3N92N1NN11N Ion = 1A/5A ; (0.05-12)Ion REL15003
Vx = 24-250Vdc

Model N: 6 relay outputs, without binary inputs, rear RS485 and front USB port
Cortec no. Ion Vx Catalogue no.
Vx = 24-240Vac and
P1F1N1N0N92N1NN11N Ion = 1A/5A ; (0.01-2)Ion REL15004
Vx = 24-250Vdc

Vx = 24-240Vac and
P1F1N1N3N92N1NN11N Ion = 1A/5A ; (0.05-12)Ion REL15005
Vx = 24-250Vdc

Model B: 4 binary inputs; 4 relay outputs, rear RS485 and front USB port including
powering
Cortec no. Ion Vx Catalogue no.
P1F1B1N0N91N1NN11N Ion = 1A/5A ; (0.01-2)Ion Vx = 24-60Vac/Vdc REL15006

Vx = 90-240Vac and
P1F1B1N0N92N1NN11N Ion = 1A/5A ; (0.01-2)Ion REL15007
Vx = 90-250Vdc

P1F1B1N3N91N1NN11N Ion = 1A/5A ; (0.05-12)Ion Vx = 24-60Vac/Vdc REL15008

Vx = 90-240Vac and
P1F1B1N3N92N1NN11N Ion = 1A/5A ; (0.05-12)Ion REL15009
Vx = 90-250Vdc

Model A: 4 binary inputs, 8 relay outputs, rear RS485, front USB with powering,
disturbance recorder
Cortec no. Ion Vx Catalogue no.
P1F1A1N0N91N1NN11N Ion = 1A/5A ; (0.01-2)Ion Vx = 24-60Vac/Vdc REL15010

Vx = 90-240Vac and
P1F1A1N0N92N1NN11N Ion = 1A/5A ; (0.01-2)Ion REL15011
Vx = 90-250Vdc

P1F1A1N3N91N1NN11N Ion = 1A/5A ; (0.05-12)Ion Vx = 24-60Vac/Vdc REL15012

Vx = 90-240Vac and
P1F1A1N3N92N1NN11N Ion = 1A/5A ; (0.05-12)Ion REL15013
Vx = 90-250Vdc

13 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Protection Relay Presentation

Model E: 8 binary inputs; 6 relay outputs, rear RS485, front USB with powering,
disturbance rec., auto reclose
Cortec no. Ion Vx Catalogue no.
P1F1E1N0N91N1NN11N Ion = 1A/5A ; (0.01-2)Ion Vx = 24-60Vac/Vdc REL15014

Vx = 90-240Vac and
P1F1E1N0N92N1NN11N Ion = 1A/5A ; (0.01-2)Ion REL15015
Vx = 90-250Vdc

P1F1E1N3N91N1NN11N Ion = 1A/5A ; (0.05-12)Ion Vx = 24-60Vac/Vdc REL15016

Vx = 90-240Vac and
P1F1E1N3N92N1NN11N Ion = 1A/5A ; (0.05-12)Ion REL15017
Vx = 90-250Vdc

Model E+: 8 binary inputs; 6 relay, rear RS485, front USB with powering,
disturbance rec., auto reclose, directional earth fault protection
Cortec no. Ion Vx Catalogue no.
P1F1E110N91N1NN11N Ion = 1A/5A ; (0.01-2)Ion Vx = 24-60Vac/Vdc REL15020

Vx = 90-240Vac and
P1F1E110N92N1NN11N Ion = 1A/5A ; (0.01-2)Ion REL15021
Vx = 90-250Vdc

P1F1E113N91N1NN11N Ion = 1A/5A ; (0.05-12)Ion Vx = 24-60Vac/Vdc REL15022

Vx = 90-240Vac and
P1F1E113N92N1NN11N Ion = 1A/5A ; (0.05-12)Ion REL15023
Vx = 90-250Vdc

For Euroasian Customs Union EAC

Model B: 4 binary inputs; 4 relay outputs, rear RS485 and front USB port including
powering
Cortec no. Ion Vx Catalogue no.
Vx = 90-240Vac and
P1F1B1N0N92N1NN11E Ion = 1A/5A ; (0.01-2)Ion REL15007R
Vx = 90-250Vdc

Vx = 90-240Vac and
P1F1B1N3N92N1NN11E Ion = 1A/5A ; (0.05-12)Ion REL15009R
Vx = 90-250Vdc

Model A: 4 binary inputs, 8 relay outputs, rear RS485, front USB with powering,
disturbance recorder
Cortec no. Ion Vx Catalogue no.
Vx = 90-240Vac and
P1F1A1N0N92N1NN11E Ion = 1A/5A ; (0.01-2)Ion REL15011R
Vx = 90-250Vdc

Vx = 90-240Vac and
P1F1A1N3N92N1NN11E Ion = 1A/5A ; (0.05-12)Ion REL15013R
Vx = 90-250Vdc

Model E+: 8 binary inputs; 6 relay outputs, rear RS485, front USB with powering,
disturbance rec., auto reclose, directional earth fault protection
Cortec no. Ion Vx Catalogue no.
Vx = 90-240Vac and
P1F1E110N92N1NN11E Ion = 1A/5A ; (0.01-2)Ion REL15021R
Vx = 90-250Vdc

Vx = 90-240Vac and
P1F1E113N92N1NN11E Ion = 1A/5A ; (0.05-12)Ion REL15023R
Vx = 90-250Vdc

14 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Protection Relay Presentation

Asian HMI language package

Model B: 4 binary inputs; 4 relay outputs, rear RS485 and front USB port including
powering
Cortec no. Ion Vx Catalogue no.
P1F1B1N0N91N1NN31N Ion = 1A/5A ; (0.01-2)Ion Vx = 24-60Vac/Vdc REL15006C

Vx = 90-240Vac and
P1F1B1N0N92N1NN31N Ion = 1A/5A ; (0.01-2)Ion REL15007C
Vx = 90-250Vdc

P1F1B1N3N91N1NN31N Ion = 1A/5A ; (0.05-12)Ion Vx = 24-60Vac/Vdc REL15008C

Vx = 90-240Vac and
P1F1B1N3N92N1NN31N Ion = 1A/5A ; (0.05-12)Ion REL15009C
Vx = 90-250Vdc

Model E: 8 binary inputs; 6 relay outputs, rear RS485, front USB with powering,
disturbance rec., auto reclose
Cortec no. Ion Vx Catalogue no.
P1F1E1N0N91N1NN31N Ion = 1A/5A ; (0.01-2)Ion Vx = 24-60Vac/Vdc REL15014C

Vx = 90-240Vac and
P1F1E1N0N92N1NN31N Ion = 1A/5A ; (0.01-2)Ion REL15015C
Vx = 90-250Vdc

P1F1E1N3N91N1NN31N Ion = 1A/5A ; (0.05-12)Ion Vx = 24-60Vac/Vdc REL15016C

Vx = 90-240Vac and
P1F1E1N3N92N1NN31N Ion = 1A/5A ; (0.05-12)Ion REL15017C
Vx = 90-250Vdc

Accessories for PowerLogic P1 series

Type Catalogue no.

Adapter for PowerLogic P1 standard flush mounting case to allow mounting on the REL15039
wall

Front cover with sealing for PowerLogic P1 standard case helping to prevent from REL15040
unauthorised access

Spare mounting spring clips for PowerLogic P1 (standard mounting) REL15041

Spare mounting screw clamps for PowerLogic P1 (alternative mounting) REL15042

15 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Installation Protection Relay

Installation
Safety Precautions
Before Starting
You are responsible for compliance with all the existing international and national
electrical codes concerning protective grounding of any device.

You should also read the safety precautions described below. These instructions
must be followed strictly when installing, servicing or repairing electrical equipment.

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC ARC, BURNS OR EXPLOSION
• Only qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be
performed only after reading this entire set of instructions.
• NEVER work alone.
• Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it.
• Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power
is off.
• Before performing visual inspections, tests, or maintenance on this
equipment:
o Disconnect all sources of electric power.
o Assume that all circuits are live until they have been completely de-
energized, tested and tagged.
o Pay particular attention to the design of the power system. Consider all
sources of power, including the possibility of back-feeding.
• Beware of potential hazards, wear personal protective equipment, and
carefully inspect the work area for tools and objects that may have been left
inside the equipment.
• The successful operation of PowerLogic P1 depends upon proper installation,
setting, and operation.
• Setting the PowerLogic P1 relay requires relevant expertise in the field of
electrical network protection. Only competent people who have this expertise
are allowed to set this product.

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION
HAZARD OF DAMAGE
• Before performing Dielectric (Hi-Pot) or Megger testing on any equipment in
which the relay is installed, disconnect all input and output wires to the relay.
High voltage testing may damage electronic components contained in the
relay.
• Do not open the device case. The PowerLogic P1 relay contains components
that are susceptible to electrostatic discharge. It is assembled in specially
equipped premises.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment

damage.

16 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Protection Relay Installation

Precautions
Introduction

PowerLogic P1F relays are supplied in one of the following ways:

● Individually packaged

● Installed in a cubicle

The transport, handling and storage precautions for PowerLogic P1F relays vary
depending on which of these two methods is used.

PowerLogic P1F in its Original Packaging

● Transport

PowerLogic P1F relays can be shipped to any destination by all suitable means of
transport, without taking any additional precautions.

● Handling

PowerLogic P1F relays can be handled without any particular care and can
withstand being dropped from a height of 1 m (3.28 ft).

● Storage

An PowerLogic P1F relay can be stored in its original packaging in a location with
the following environmental characteristics:
● Temperature: -30...+70 °C (or -22...+158 °F).
● Humidity ≤ 90%.
● Storage is limited to a maximum of one month if the relative humidity is
higher than 93% and the temperature higher than +40 °C (or +104 °F).

For more information, refer to Climatic Requirements in Functions Characteristics

chapter Technical Characteristic section.

If the relays are to be stored for an extended period, we recommend the following:
● Do not unpack the PowerLogic P1F prior to its intended period of use.
● Check the environment and the condition of the packaging annually.
Once the PowerLogic P1F relay has been unpacked, it should be energized as soon
as possible.

PowerLogic P1F Installed in a Cubicle

● Transport
PowerLogic P1F relays can be transported by all suitable means of transport in the
usual conditions for cubicles.

Storage conditions should be taken into consideration for a long period of transport.
● Handling
If the cubicle is dropped, check the PowerLogic P1F’s condition by visual inspection
and energizing.
● Storage
We recommend keeping the cubicle protective packaging for as long as possible.

PowerLogic P1F relays, like all electronic units, should not be stored in a damp
environment for more than a month. They should be energized as quickly as
possible. If this is not possible, the cubicle reheating system should be activated.

17 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Installation Protection Relay

PowerLogic P1F Used in a Damp Environment

The temperature/relative humidity factors must be compatible with the PowerLogic

P1F relay's environmental withstand characteristics: Refer to Climatic Requirements
in Functions Characteristics chapter Technical Characteristic section.

If the conditions of use are outside the normal zone, special arrangements should be
made before commissioning, such as air conditioning of the premises.

PowerLogic P1F Used in a Polluted Environment

The effect of corrosion on PowerLogic P1F relays has been tested according to the
IEC 60068-2-60 standard under the following "4-gas" test conditions:

● 21 days' duration

● 25 °C (or 77°F), 75% relative humidity

● H2S (10ppb), SO2 (200ppb), Cl2 (10ppb), NO2 (200ppb)

You are responsible for compliance with all the existing international and national
electrical codes concerning protective grounding of any device.

You should also carefully read the safety precautions described below. These
instructions must be followed strictly when installing, servicing or repairing electrical
equipment.

18 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Protection Relay Installation

Equipment Receipt and Identification

Equipment Receipt

The PowerLogic P1F unit is shipped in a cardboard box which helps to protect it
against any knocks received in transport.

On receipt, check that the packaging has not been damaged. If it has, note any
anomaly on the delivery slip and inform your supplier.

NOTICE
Our products leave our factory in closed, sealed original packaging. At delivery,
if the packaging is opened or the seal is broken, Schneider Electric must be
informed.
Failure to follow this instruction can result in compromised confidentiality
and authenticity of the information contained in the products.

Package Contents

The box contains the following items:

● An PowerLogic P1F relay
● An instruction sheet providing the main information about installation and use-
Quick Start
● A certificate of conformity and tests
● Safety guide
● The bag with mounting accessory (spring clips REL15041 and pouch on LEDs
description)

Identification Label

The identification label on the top of the relays is used to identify the PowerLogic
P1F:
Figure 1. Identification label

1 Reference number
2 Device type
3 Power supply voltage
4 Nominal phase current CT input and measuring range
5 Nominal earth fault current CT input measuring range
6 Nominal neutral voltage input measuring range
7 Serial number
8 EAC Logo For REL150xxR Commercial References only

For the meaning of the identification codes, refer to Presentation chapter

Identification section.

Check After Unpacking

Make sure the delivered PowerLogic P1F relay corresponds to the product ordered.
In particular, check the power supply voltage if it is correct for your installation.

19 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Installation Protection Relay

Mounting and Assembly

Introduction

PowerLogic P1F relays weigh 0.8 kg (1.76 lb.) maximum and are flush-mounted in a
mounting plate 1.5 to 4 mm (0.06 to 0.16 in) thick or 4 to 6 mm (0.16 to 0.24 in)
depending on method of spring clips mounting direction.
They are designed to be mounted indoors (flush mounting). It is possible to use
extra case adapter to wall mounting to which the relay is mounted using fastening
element.
To help to ensure a waterproof seal, the surface of the panel must be smooth and
solid. The front panel is sealed from behind

Dimensions
Figure 2. Dimensions

mm
in

. .

Cut-out
Figure 3. Dimensions of cut out

20 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Protection Relay Installation

CAUTION
HAZARD OF CUTS
Trim the edges of the cut-out plates to remove any jagged edges.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment
damage.

Installing PowerLogic P1F

PowerLogic P1F relay is held in place by 2 catches on the sides, behind the front
panel.

Step Action Illustration

1 Prepare the relay and the
spring clips

2 Insert the PowerLogic P1F unit

through the cut-out

3 Verify the thickness of the

panel sheet for correct spring
clips direction adjustment

21 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Installation Protection Relay

Step Action Illustration

4 Mount the clip and release the
springs by pressing the clip
trigger, repeat the operation on
the other side

5 Make sure the PowerLogic

P1F is mounted firmly

Removing P1F
1 To remove the relay unlock
spring clips by press until click,
so that the spring clips could
be taken out (repeat the
operation on the other side),
and then the relay could be
withdrawn from the cut-out in
the mounting plate.

Wall mounted relay

PowerLogic P1F relay is held in place by 2 catches on the sides, behind the front
panel. Flush mounting case of P1F can be mounted on the wall by using optional
Wall Mounting Case Adaptor (Figure 4).
Figure 4. P1F Wall Mounting Case Adaptor Dimensions

22 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Protection Relay Installation

1 Tighten the Adaptor Case in

the required place with three
M4 screws or equivalent.

2-4 Do the steps 2-4 from Instaling

PowerLogic P1F section (page
21)
5 Make sure the PowerLogic
P1F is mounted firmly

6 To remove PowerLogic P1F

from case adaptor do step 1
from section Removing
PowerLogic P1F (page 22)

23 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Installation Protection Relay

Connectors
Introduction

All the PowerLogic P1F connectors can be accessed on the rear panel.

The wires are fixed using a flat blade screwdriver.

Identification of the Connectors on the Rear Panel

Figure 5. Rear connectors
PowerLogic P1F model L PowerLogic P1F model N

PowerLogic P1F model B PowerLogic P1F model A

PowerLogic P1F model E PowerLogic P1F model E+

24 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Protection Relay Installation

Ref. PowerLogic P1F

Connector for the auxiliary power supply and WD, relay outputs RL1 to
A RL3, binary inputs L1 to L2 (B, A, E, E+), communication port RS485 (N,
B, A, E, E+, model L - option)
Connector for the relay outputs RL4 to RL5 (A, E, E+) and binary inputs L3
B
to L4 (A) or L5 to L8 (E, E+)
Connector for phase and earth fault current inputs, 3Vo voltage input (E+)
C and binary inputs L3 to L4 (B, E, E+) or relay outputs RL4 to RL5 (N) or
RL6 to RL7 (A).

Connector Wiring

Ref. Wiring Type of Screwdri Tightening

Terminal block Terminal ver Torque
A • 0.2 - 4 mm2 M3 3.0 mm 0.6 Nm
single-core flat blade (5.31 lb.-in)
• 0.2 - 2.5 mm2 (0.12 in)
finely stranded
B • 0.2 - 4 mm2 M3 3.0 mm 0.6 Nm
single-core flat blade (5.31 lb.-in)
• 0.2 - 2.5 mm2 (0.12 in)
finely stranded
C • 0.2 - 4 mm2 M3 3.0 mm 0.6 Nm
3Vo, binary single-core flat blade (5.31 lb.-in)
inputs, relay • 0.2 - 2.5 mm2 (0.12 in)
outputs finely stranded
terminals
C • 0.2 - 6 mm2 M3 3.0 mm 0.8 Nm
AC current single-core flat blade (7.1 lb.-in)
inputs terminals • 0.2 - 4 mm2 (0.12 in)
finely stranded

25 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Installation Protection Relay

Terminal Block A Connections

Figure 6. Terminal block A connections

Diagram
For model B, A, E, E+

+ +

For model L, N

+ +

Terminal Data Item Connected

C1-C2 Binary inputs: L3 (B, E, E+) or Output relay RL6 for model A or
Output relay RL4 for model N (Normally open contact, NO)
C3-C4 Binary inputs: L4 (B, E, E+) or Output relay RL7 for model A or
Output relay RL5 for model N (Normally open contact, NO)
C5-C6 Phase A current input
C7-C8 Phase B current input
C9-C10 Phase C current input
C11-C12 Earth fault current input
C14-C15 Neutral voltage input (E+)

29 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Installation Protection Relay

Connection Diagrams
General Safety Precautions

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS
• Only qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should
be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and
checking the technical characteristics of the device.
• NEVER work alone.
• Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it.
Consider all sources of power, including the possibility of backfeeding.
• Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all
power is off.
• Wear insulating gloves to avoid any contact with a conductor that has
accidentally been energized.
• Screw tight all terminals, even those not in use.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Earthing

The earth terminal is not required for the PowerLogic P1F devices due to the plastic
casing.

30 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Protection Relay Installation

PowerLogic P1F models

Each model (L, N, B, A, E, E+) PowerLogic P1F relays measure the following
currents:

● Phase currents measured by 2 or 3 phase CTs

● 1 earth fault current measured either:

• By 1 earth CT
• On the common point of the 3 phase CTs (residual current)
● Each model can be use in earth fault application when earth fault current input is
used only.

Variant No. 1 Variant No. 2

Typical connection 3 phase CTs Typical connection 2 phase CTs

Variant No. 3 Variant No. 4

Typical connection 3 phase CTs, earth Typical connection 3 phase CTs, earth
fault current measured on the common fault current measured by core balance
point of the 3 phase CTs CT

31 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Installation Protection Relay

Variant No. 5 Variant No. 6

Typical connection 2 phase CTs, earth Earth fault current measured by 1 earth
fault current measured by core balance CT
CT

PowerLogic P1F model E+

PowerLogic P1F model E+ measure extra:

● Neutral voltage 3Vo from open delta connection

Variant
Typical connection 3 phase CTs, earth
fault CBCT and neutral voltage

32 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Protection Relay Installation

Connecting Current Transformers (CTs)

Connecting

Standard 1 A or 5 A current transformers (CTs) can be connected to PowerLogic

P1F, to measure phase currents and the earth fault current.

To determine the CT size, refer to Dimensioning the CTs of this chapter, page 40.

Connection Example

The diagram below shows the connection of:

● 3 phase CTs to measure phase currents

● 1 earth fault CT to measure the earth fault current

Figure 9. Connecting current transformer diagram

Core Balance CT

See Connecting a Core Balance Current Transformer section.

Connection Precautions

● In the cubicle CT compartment, check that the common points of the CT

secondaries are connected, using wires of equal length and as short as
possible, to a copper bar with a rectangular cross-section connected to the
cubicle protective earth.

● Flatten the cable against the metal frames of the cubicle.

33 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Installation Protection Relay

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS
• Never leave the current transformer secondary in open circuit. The high
voltage that would result from opening the circuit is dangerous for the
operator and for the equipment.
• Never undo the ring lugs on the cables of the CT secondaries when there is
current on the primary.

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

If you need to disconnect the PowerLogic P1F current inputs:

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS
• Wear insulating gloves to avoid any contact with a conductor that has
accidentally been energized.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Recommended Cable

The cross-section of the cable for connecting the CTs must be selected according to
the characteristics of the CT secondary and the length of the link so as to limit the
wiring energy consumption.

For more information, refer to Dimensioning the CTs, page 40.

34 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Protection Relay Installation

Connecting a Core Balance CT

Connecting

Standard 1 A or 5 A core balance current transformer (CBCT) can be connected to

PowerLogic P1F, to measure earth fault current.

The specifically designed CSH120, CSH200, CSH300 core balance CTs are for
direct earth fault current measurement. They should be used with PowerLogic P1F
relays with sensitive earth fault protection.

They can be connected to earth fault current inputs (terminal numbers C11 - C12)

For detailed characteristics of core balance CTs, refer to CSH120, CSH200,

CSH300 Core Balance CTs, page 43.

Connection Example

The diagram below shows the connection of a core balance CT to measure the
earth fault current:
Figure 10. Connecting core balance CT diagram

Core Balance CT

The core balance CT must only measure the sum of the 3 phase currents. The
current circulating in the medium voltage cable shielding must therefore be
excluded. To avoid the current circulating in the cable shielding being detected by
the core balance CT, its component must be canceled by making this current
circulate a second time through the core balance CT in the opposite direction.

This is achieved by connecting the shields coming out of the cable ends to earth via
a wire that passes through the core balance CT. This wire must not come into
contact with any part c connected to earth before it passes through the core balance
CT, otherwise use an insulated wire.

35 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Installation Protection Relay

Figure 11. Correct and not correct connecting the shields of the cable

Connection Precautions

● Connect the core balance CT secondary to the cubicle protective earth, by

connecting terminal C12 on the PowerLogic P1F relay to the protective earth.

● Flatten the cable against the metal frames of the cubicle.

● Do not ground the cable by any other means.

36 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Protection Relay Installation

Connecting Binary Inputs and Outputs Relays

Safety Precautions

DANGER
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE
Do not allow hazardous live voltages to coexist with voltages that could be
connected to accessible parts (SELV, PELV or PEB) on power supply and I/O
block terminals A, B and C. The logic inputs and output relays are isolated from
one another with simple isolation.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION
RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE I/O
Do not supply the logic inputs and relay outputs from sources of power that could
come from different phases of a 3-phase supply.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment

damage.

Connecting the Output Relays

The PowerLogic P1F output relays have volt-free contacts.

CAUTION
LOSS OF PROTECTION OR RISK OF NUISANCE TRIPPING
If the PowerLogic P1F is no longer supplied with power or is in fail-safe position,
the protection functions are no longer active and all the PowerLogic P1F output
relays are de-energized. Check that this operating mode and the watchdog relay
wiring are compatible with your installation.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment
damage.

Connecting the Logic Inputs

The PowerLogic P1F logic inputs are volt-free.
The PowerLogic P1 power supply voltage determines:
● The logic input supply voltage range
● The logic input switching threshold
PowerLogic P1F relay binary inputs can be triggered both with AC or DC voltage
signals.

Advice on Connecting Logic Inputs

To reduce the consequences of electromagnetic disturbance, there should not be a

loop between live conductors contained in a single connection. A connection made
with a twisted pair helps to ensure that the outward and return conductors remain in
close proximity along the whole length of the connection.

37 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Installation Protection Relay

Figure 12. Correct and not correct connecting the logic inputs

dc dc
+ dc + dc

38 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Protection Relay Installation

Connecting the Communication Port

Introduction
PowerLogic P1F can communicate using a 2-wire RS 485 EIA communication port.
Connection to the bus is direct, and needs no accessories.

Connection Diagram

Connection is in a daisy-chain and requires a line termination resistor.

Figure 13. RS485 connection diagram

+
+

Terminal Data Item Description

Connected
Connected to terminal (+) of the SCADA
A18 T+
communication port
Connected to terminal (–) of the SCADA
A19 T-
communication port

Connection Precautions

The number of connected PowerLogic P1F relays must not exceed 32 and the total
cable length must not exceed 1300 m (4265 ft).

The cable shielding connection must also be as short as possible.

If the PowerLogic P1F is at the end of the line, install a Ω impedance matching
resistor between terminals A18 and A19.

39 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Installation Protection Relay

Dimensioning the CTs

Introduction

The PowerLogic P1F phase and earth fault current inputs can be connected to
standard 1 A or 5 A CTs.

CT Selection Principle

The CTs must be dimensioned so that they do not become saturated at currents
where accuracy is required (with a minimum of 5 In).

The condition to be fulfilled by the CT saturation current (Isat) depends on the type
of overcurrent protection time delay:
Time Delay Condition to be Illustration
Fulfilled

Definite Time Isat > 1.5 x threshold

(Is)

Is . Is Isat

IDMT Isat > 1.5 x the curve

value, which is the
smallest of the following
2 values:
• Isc max, maximum
installation short Is Isat
. in (Isc ma , Is)
circuit current in (Isc ma , Is)

• 20x Is (IDMT curve

dynamic range)
The method for calculating the saturation current depends on the CT accuracy class
as indicated below.

Practical Information

In the absence of any information about the settings, the characteristics below are
suitable for most situations:

Rated Rated Accuracy CT secondary Wiring

secondary burden class and Resistance resistance
current accuracy
limit factor
Ins VAct Rct Rw

1A 2.5 VA 5P20 <3 < 0.075 

5A 7.5 VA 5P20 < 0.2  < 0.075 

Principle for Calculating the Saturation Current in Class P

A class P CT is characterized by:

• Inp: Rated primary current (in A)
• Ins: Rated secondary current (in A)
• Accuracy class, expressed by a percentage, 5P or 10P, followed by the accuracy
limit factor (FLP), whose usual values are 5, 10, 15, 20, 30

40 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Protection Relay Installation

• VAct: Rated burden, whose usual values are 2.5/5/7.5/10/15/30 VA

• Rct: Maximum resistance of the secondary winding (in )

The installation is characterized by the load resistance Rw at the CT secondary

(wiring + protection relay).

If the CT load complies with the rated burden, i.e. Rw x Ins 2 ≤ ct, the saturation
current is higher than FLP x Inp.

If the resistance Rct is known, it is possible to calculate the actual CT FLP, which
takes account of the actual CT load. The saturation current equals actualFLP x Inp,
where:

Rct  Ins 2 + VAct

actualFLP = FLP 
(Rct + Rw ) Ins 2

Examples of Calculating the Saturation Current in Class P

Say for a CT with the following characteristics:

• Transformation ratio: 100 A/5 A
• Rated burden: 2.5 VA
• Accuracy class and accuracy-limit factor: 5P20
• Resistance of the secondary winding: 0.1 

To have an FLP of at least 20, i.e. a saturation current of 20 x Inp = 2 kA, the load
resistance Rw of the CT must be less than:
VAct 2.5
Rw, max = = 2 = 0.1 
Ins 2 5
This represents 12 m (39 ft) of wire with cross-section 2.5 mm2 (AWG 12) for a
resistance per unit length of 8 /km (2.4 m/ft) approximately.

For an installation with 50 m (164 ft) of wiring with section 2.5 mm2 (AWG 12),
Rw = 0.4 .

As a result:

Rct  Ins 2 + VAct 0.1 25 + 2.5

actualFLP = FLP  = 20  =8
(Rct + Rw ) Ins 2 (0.1 + 0.4 ) 25
Therefore, the saturation current Isat = 8 x Inp = 800 A.

NOTE: The impedance of a PowerLogic P1F relay’s current inputs ( . ) is often

negligible compared to the wiring resistance.

Principle for Calculating the Saturation Current in Class PX

A class PX CT is characterized by:

• Inp: Rated primary current (in A)
• Ins: Rated secondary current (in A)
• Vk: Rated knee-point voltage (in V)
• Rct: Maximum resistance of the secondary winding (in )
The saturation current is calculated by the load resistance Rw at the CT secondary
(wiring + protection relay):
Vk Inp
Isat =  
Rct + Rw Ins

41 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Installation Protection Relay

Examples of Calculating the Saturation Current in Class PX

CT ratio Vk Rct Rw Saturation current

100 A/5 A 17.4V 0.13  0.4  17.4 Inp
Isat =   = 6.56  Inp = 656 A
0.13 + 0.4 5
100 A/1 A 87.7V 3.5  0.4  87.7 Inp
Isat =   = 22.48  Inp = 2248 A
3.5 + 0.4 1

42 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Protection Relay Installation

CSH120, CSH200 and CSH300 Core Balance CTs

Function

The specifically designed CSH120, CSH200 and CSH300 core balance CTs are for
direct earth fault current measurement. Due to their low voltage insulation, they can
only be used on cables.

• CSH120, CSH200 and CSH300 are closed CTs, with different inner diameters:
• The CSH120 inner diameter is 120 mm (4.75 in).
• The CSH200 inner diameter is 196 mm (7.72 in).
• The CSH300 inner diameter is 291 mm (11.46 in).
Figure 14. CSH120, CSH200, CSH300 core balance CTs photo

1 CSH300
2 CSH200
3 CSH120

43 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Installation Protection Relay

Characteristics

CSH120 CSH200 CSH300

Inner diameter 120 mm 196 mm 291mm

(4.7 in) (7.7 in) (11.46 in)

Weight 0.6 kg 1.4 kg 2.5 kg

(1.32 lb.) (3.09 Ib.) (5.51 Ib.)

Accuracy at 20C (68F) 5% 5% 5%

at – …+ C <6% <6% <6%

(- …+ F)

Transformation ratio 470/1

Maximum permissible current 20 kA - 1 s

Operating temperature – …+ C
(- …+ F)

Storage temperature – …+ C
(- …+ F)

CHS120, CSH200 and CSH300 Dimensions

Figure 15. CSH current transformers dimensions

Dimension A B D E F H J K L

CSH120 mm 120 164 44 190 80 40 166 65 35

in 4.75 6.46 1.73 7.48 3.15 1.57 6.54 2.56 1.38

CSH200 mm 196 256 46 274 120 60 254 104 37

in 7.72 10.1 1.81 10.8 4.72 2.36 10.0 4.09 1.46

CSH300 mm 291 360 46 390 120 60 369 104 37

in 11.46 14.17 1.81 15.35 4.72 2.36 14.53 4.09 1.46

44 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Protection Relay Installation

Mounting Precaution

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS
Only qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be
performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the
technical characteristics of the device.
• NEVER work alone.
• Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it.
Consider all sources of power, including the possibility of backfeeding.
• Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is
off.
• Screw tight all terminals, even those not in use.
• Install the core balance CTs on insulated cables (the CTs do not have MV
insulation).
• Cables with a rated voltage of more than 1000 V must also have shielding
connected to the protective earth.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

45 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Installation Protection Relay

Mounting Instruction illustration

Select a CT with a
diameter at least twice
the size of the cable
harness going through it.

Group the cable(s) in the

middle of the CT and use
non-conducting binding
to hold the CT in place
around the cable
harness.

Do not bend the cable(s)

close to the CT: Install
the CT on a straight
section of the cable(s)
that is at least twice as
long as the CT diameter.

Remember to pass the

shield earthing braid on
the 3 cables back
through the CT. Check
that the braid goes the
right way through the CT.

Connection Characteristics

CT Wiring Type of Tools Tightening

terminals Torque
CSH120 • 1..2.5 mm2 wire M3.5 screw Flat blade . ... •m
CSH200 (AWG 18...12) Screwdriver (7.1...8.8 lb-in)
CSH300 • Stripped length: 3.5 mm (0.14
8 mm (0.31 in) in)

46 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Protection Relay Commissioning

Commissioning
Safety Precautions
Before Starting
You are responsible for compliance with all the existing international and national
electrical codes concerning protective grounding of any device.

You should also read the safety precautions described below. These instructions
must be followed strictly when installing, servicing or repairing electrical equipment.

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment

damage.
Commissioning Protection Relay

Principles
PowerLogic P1F Tests

Protection relays are tested prior to commissioning, with the dual aim of maximizing
availability and minimizing the risk of malfunction of the assembly being
commissioned. The question is to define the list of tests required at the time of
commissioning.

Protection relays based on electromechanical and solid state technologies, whose

performance cannot be fully reproduced, must be systematically submitted to
detailed testing, not only to test their operational performance, but also to check that
they are in good working order and have the required level of performance.

These tests are not necessary for relays based on digital technology:

● The use of this technology helps to ensure reproducibility of the stated

performances.
● An internal self-testing system provides continuous information on the state of
the electronic components and the integrity of the functions, thereby helping to
ensure a high level of availability.
Each of the PowerLogic P1F functions has undergone full factory performance
testing. The PowerLogic P1F relay is therefore ready to operate without requiring
any additional performance testing that concerns it directly.

Commissioning PowerLogic P1F Relays

The preliminary PowerLogic P1F commissioning tests can therefore be limited to a

commissioning check, i.e.:
● Only carrying out the checks specific to the hardware configuration and the
functions activated
● Checking compliance with BOMs and hardware installation diagrams and rules
during a preliminary general check
● Checking compliance of the general settings and protection settings entered with
the preliminary studies
● Checking connections of the current inputs by secondary injection tests
● Checking the CT ratio
● Checking connection of the logic inputs and output relays by simulating input
data and forcing the output relay status
● Validating the complete protection chain
● Using the test sheet provided to record the results of the commissioning tests
The Commissioning chapter describes the simple but exhaustive procedure to apply
when performing these checks.

It is no longer essential to test each individual protection or control and monitoring

function. However, if it is does prove necessary to test a function, the test
procedures are described in this chapter.

48 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Protection Relay Commissioning

Which Tests Do You Need to Perform?

Not all the checks and tests described in this chapter apply to all PowerLogic P1F
models (L, N, B, A, E, E+). Each check or test begins with indicating which
PowerLogic P1F models it applies to: it does not apply to models whose identifier (L,
N, B, A, E, E+) has a bar over it.

Example

L N B A E E+ means that the check or test only applies to

PowerLogic P1F model A, E, and E+

49 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Commissioning Protection Relay

Testing and Metering Equipment Required

Current Generator

To check the current input connections, use a sinusoidal AC current generator of the
following type:
● 50 or 60 Hz frequency (according to the country of use)
● Single-phase (as minimum), adjustable from 0 to 32 A RMS
● Three-phases (recommended), adjustable from 0 to 32 A RMS per phase
● With injection-controlled digital chronometer, accurate to 10 ms
● With connector suited to the built-in test terminal block in the current input
connection diagram
If the current generator is equipped with electronic on/off controls, check that the
current is definitely zero in the automatic stop position (depending on the cursor
position, the solid state contactor can allow more than 5% of the current to flow
through).

Voltage Generator

To check that the PowerLogic P1F (B, A, E, E+) logic inputs are connected correctly
and directional earth fault protection use one of the following:
● A DC voltage generator, adjustable from 0 to 200 V DC for adaptation to the
voltage level of the tested input
● A DC voltage auxiliary power supply the same as the PowerLogic P1F auxiliary
supply voltage
● A AC voltage generator, adjustable from 0 to 130 V AC to check directional earth
fault protection function

Accessories

Accessories are required for the following connections:

● A plug with cord corresponding to the test terminal block for installed currents
● An electric cord with clamps, wire grip or touch probes

Metering Devices

Class 1 metering devices are required:

● An ammeter (0 to 50 A RMS)
● A voltmeter (0 to 250 V RMS)

Documents

The set of installation documents includes:

● The complete PowerLogic P1F connection diagram, showing:
● Connection of the phase current inputs to the corresponding CTs via the test
terminal block
● Connection of the earth fault current input
● Connection of the logic inputs and output relays
● The hardware bill of material and installation rules
● The settings sheet with all the PowerLogic P1F parameters and settings
● The test sheets

50 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Protection Relay Commissioning

Tolerances and Injection Limits

The current generator must satisfy the following conditions:

● Minimum injection current: 1.5% of the CT secondary rated current (15 mA or 75
mA)
● Maximum injection current:
● Continuous: 4 times the CT secondary rated current (20 A)
● For 3 seconds: 40 times the CT secondary rated current (200 A)
● Frequency: 50 Hz +/- 10% or 60 Hz +/- 10%

51 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Commissioning Protection Relay

Energization
Checks to be Performed Prior to Energization

Apart from the mechanical state of the equipment, use the diagrams and BOMs
provided by the contractor to check:
● The PowerLogic P1F label
● Conformity of the PowerLogic P1F power supply voltage (indicated on the
identification label on the front panel) with the power supply voltage of the
switchboard (or cubicle)
● Correct connection of the auxiliary power supply:
● Whether an earth CT is present
● The presence of test terminal blocks upstream from the current inputs
● Conformity of connections between the PowerLogic P1F terminals and the test
terminal blocks

Checking the Connections

With the equipment de-energized, check that the connections are tightened.

Energization Procedure

1. Switch on the auxiliary power supply.

2. Check that the Healthy LED lights up. Check that watchdog changes status.
The default screen is displayed (phase and earth fault currents measurement of
In/Ien).

PowerLogic P1F Identification

Record the PowerLogic P1F serial number (found on the identification label on the
top of the relay or menu cell OP PARAMETERS/Serial number) on the test sheet.
Record the PowerLogic P1F software version number (menu cell OP
PARAMETERS/ Firmware Version and Firmware Release) on the test sheet.

52 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Protection Relay Commissioning

Validation of the Complete Protection Chain

Principle

The complete protection chain is validated during the simulation of a fault that
causes tripping of the circuit breaker by PowerLogic P1F.
Simply testing one function can help to ensure that the whole system is working
correctly, provided it has been installed correctly.

Procedure

To validate the complete protection chain, proceed as follows:

Step Description
1 Select one of the protection functions that trips the circuit breaker.
2 Depending on the function(s) selected, inject a current corresponding to a
fault and note whether the circuit breaker trips.
3 If the switchgear is equipped in terminal blocks put the covers back on the
test terminal blocks.

53 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Commissioning Protection Relay

Checking Settings
Determining Parameter and Protection Settings

All the PowerLogic P1F parameter and protection settings are determined
beforehand by the design department in charge of the application and should be
approved by the customer.
It is presumed that the study has been carried out with all the attention necessary, or
even consolidated by a discrimination study.
All the PowerLogic P1F parameter and protection settings should be available for
commissioning in the form of a dossier.

Checking Parameter and Protection Settings

Checks should be made when the PowerLogic P1F parameter and protection
settings have not been entered during commissioning tests, to confirm the
conformity of the parameter and protection settings entered with the values
determined during the study.
These checks consist of:
● Going through all the PowerLogic P1F parameter and protection setting cells
● For each menu cell, comparing the values entered in the PowerLogic P1F relay
with the values recorded in the parameter and protection settings file
● Correcting any parameter and protection settings that have not been entered
correctly.
NOTE: Once the checks are complete, as of that phase, the parameter and
protection settings should not be changed any further and are considered to be final.

The tests which follow must be performed with these parameter and protection
settings. It will not be possible to modify any values, even temporarily. The only
exception to this is the disabling of protection functions in order to isolate the
protection function being tested.

54 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Protection Relay Commissioning

Checking the CT Ratio

Purpose of the Check

In the context of checking the complete protection chain, checking each CT verify
that its transformation ratio conforms to expectations and is identical for the 2 or 3
phase CTs.

Purpose

The CT conformity certificates can be used as a basis for the check. If these
documents are missing, proceed as follows:
Step Action
1 Check that the CT primary circuit is accessible, de-energized and
completely isolated.
2 Using documents (diagrams, etc.), determine the expected ratio and
check the corresponding PowerLogic P1F setting.
3 Make sure that the CT secondary is connected to the PowerLogic P1F
relay or short-circuited and install a clamp ammeter on the secondary
circuit of the first CT.
4 Connect the generator to the CT primary circuit.
5 Inject a current of at least 0.2 In (In: CT primary rated current) if possible
and measure the injected current.
6 Read the current measured in the secondary circuit by the clamp ammeter
and check that the transformation ratio conforms to expectations.
If the CT is connected to PowerLogic P1F, check that the current
displayed by PowerLogic P1F is the same as the current injected in the
CT primary.
7 Repeat steps 3 to 6 for the other phase CT(s) and check that the results
obtained are identical for both or all 3 CTs.
8 If the earth fault current is measured by a 1 A or 5 A CT, repeat steps 3 to
6 to check its transformation ratio.
9 Record your measurements on the test sheet.

55 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Commissioning Protection Relay

Checking the Phase Current Input Connections

Applicable to PowerLogic P1F Series

L N B A E E+

Wiring Diagram

To inject a current into the phase A current input, connect the single-phase current
generator to the test terminal block, as shown in the diagram below.
Figure 16. Phase currents input connections diagram

test bloc

I
current
generator

Procedure

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS
• Wear insulating gloves to avoid any contact with a conductor that has
accidentally been energized.
• Short-circuit secondary current transformer winding by use test block without
disconnecting the wires from it. This connector ensures continuity of the
current transformer secondary circuits.

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

56 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Protection Relay Commissioning

Step Action
1 Connect the current generator to inject a current into a phase current input.
2 Turn on the generator.
3 Inject the CT secondary rated current (1 A/5 A).
4 On the P1F display, check that the value of the phase A current is
approximately equal to the CT primary rated current or related to In
(depends on setting).
5 Turn off the generator.
6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 for the other two phase current inputs.
7 Replace the cover on the test terminal block.

57 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Commissioning Protection Relay

Checking the Earth Fault Current Input Connections

Applicable to PowerLogic P1F Series

L N B A E E+

Wiring Diagram

Connect the single-phase current generator to the test terminal block, as shown in
the diagram below (two applications – a) measurement residual earth fault current
and b) measurement earth fault current from core balance current transformer):
Figure 17. Earth fault current input connections diagrams
a)

test bloc

I
current
generator

test bloc

I
current
generator

58 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Protection Relay Commissioning

Residual Earth Fault Current Input Check Procedure

Step Action
1 Connect the current generator to inject a current into a phase current input.
2 Turn on the generator.
3 Inject the CT secondary rated current (1 A/5 A).
4 Check on the P1F display that the earth fault current value is approximately
equal to 1 A/5 A.
5 Turn off the generator.
6 Replace the cover on the test terminal block.

CBCT Input Check Procedure

Step Action
1 Turn on the generator.
2 Inject the CT secondary rated current (1 A/5 A).
3 Check on the P1F display that the earth fault current value is approximately
equal to 1 A/5 A.
4 Turn off the generator.
5 Replace the cover on the test terminal block.

59 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Commissioning Protection Relay

Phase Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 50/51) Test

Applicable to PowerLogic P1F Series

L N B A E E+

Purpose of the Test

The phase overcurrent protection test is used to check the setting values for the
following protection functions:
● Tripping threshold
● Tripping time delay

Wiring Diagram

To inject current into the phase A current input, connect the single-phase current
generator as shown in the diagram below.

Use one of the P1F output relays to stop the chronometer. If you are using a circuit
breaker contact to stop the chronometer, the measured time includes the circuit
breaker operating time.
Figure 18. Connection diagram to phase overcurrent protection function tests

test bloc

I
current
generator
au iliary
voltage
stop

60 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Protection Relay Commissioning

Definite Time Protection Test

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

A definite time protection function uses two settings that are independent of one
another:
● The current set point (I>, I>> or I>>>)
● The time delay

Two checks are therefore required

Threshold check:
Step Action
1 If necessary disable:
• the earth fault protections (if they are based on the sum of the 3 phase
CTs).
• negative sequence overcurrent protection function.
• Switch on to fault protection function (B, A, E, E+).
• Broken conductor protection function (E, E+).
• thermal overload protection (N, B, A, E, E+).
• cold load pick up.
• auto reclose (if is triggered by current protection functions, E, E+).
2 Inject a current approximately equal to 80% of the threshold value.
3 Increase the current slowly until the P1F relay trips or until the overcurrent
protection (signals: tI>, tI>>, tI>>>) LED flashes quickly (if are assigned).
4 Record the current value at the time of tripping on the test sheet and
compare it with the value on the settings sheet.
5 Reset P1F (R key).
6 If you are not performing any other checks:
• Re-enable the protections and functions required by the settings sheet.
• Reset the thermal capacity used to 0%.
• When a blocking input is used, re-enable the back-up time delay
associated with each threshold.

61 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Commissioning Protection Relay

Time delay check:

Step Action
1 If necessary disable:
• the earth fault protections (if they are based on the sum of the 3 phase
CTs).
• negative sequence overcurrent protection function.
• Switch on to fault protection function (B, A, E, E+).
• Broken conductor protection function (E, E+).
• thermal overload protection (N, B, A, E, E+).
• cold load pick up.
• auto reclose (if is triggered by current protection functions, E, E+).
2 Short-circuit the generator to avoid injecting current into the P1F relay.
3 Prepare to inject a current at least twice as high as the tripping current
measured in the threshold check.
4 Re-establish the injection circuit in the P1F relay and set the chronometer
to zero.
5 Start current injection and the chronometer simultaneously and use the
ammeter to make sure the injected current is stable. When P1F trips, the
chronometer stops.
6 Record the time elapsed on the test sheet and compare it with the value on
the settings sheet.
7 Reset device (R key).
8 If you are not performing any other checks:
• Re-enable the protections and functions required by the settings sheet.
• Reset the thermal capacity used to 0%.
• When a blocking input is used, re-enable the back-up time delay
associated with each threshold.

IDMT Protection Test

IDMT protection uses a standardized curve (I, t).

The test consists of testing a few points on the curve, in the tripping zone for the
threshold I>.

Checking a point on the curve:

Step Action
1 If necessary disable:
• the earth fault protections (if they are based on the sum of the 3 phase
CTs).
• negative sequence overcurrent protection function.
• Switch on to fault protection function (B, A, E, E+).
• Broken conductor protection function (E, E+).
• thermal overload protection (N, B, A, E, E+).
• cold load pick up.
• auto reclose (if is triggered by current protection functions, E, E+).
2 Choose a point (I/I>, t) to be tested in the threshold tripping zone, using the
Overcurrent Protection Tripping Curves, page 129 and subsequent ones.
3 Set the generator for the current determined in step 2.
4 Reset the chronometer to zero and reset P1F if necessary (R key).
5 Start current injection and the chronometer simultaneously and use the
ammeter to make sure the injected current is stable. When P1F trips, the
chronometer stops.
6 Record the time elapsed on the test sheet and compare it with the expected
value.
7 Reset device (R key).
8 If you are not performing any other checks:
• Re-enable the protections and functions required by the settings sheet.
• Reset the thermal capacity used to 0%.
• When a blocking input is used, re-enable the back-up time delay
associated with each threshold.

62 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Protection Relay Commissioning

Earth Fault Protection (ANSI 50N/51N) Test

Applicable to PowerLogic P1F Series

L N B A E E+

Purpose of the Test

The earth fault protection test is used to check the setting values for the following
protection functions:
● Tripping threshold
● Tripping time delay
There are two possible wiring diagrams, depending on whether the earth fault
current is being measured:
● Using the electrical sum of the currents measured by the 3 phase CTs – residual
current
● Using an earth fault core balance CT

Wiring Diagram with 3 Phase CTs – Residual Current

To inject current into the phase A current input, connect the single-phase current
generator as shown in the diagram below.

Use one of the P1F output relays to stop the chronometer. If you are using a circuit
breaker contact to stop the chronometer, the measured time includes the circuit
breaker operating time.

63 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Commissioning Protection Relay

Figure 19. Connection diagram to earth (residual current) fault protection

function tests

test bloc

I
current
generator
au iliary
voltage
stop

Wiring Diagram with Core Balance Current Transformer

To inject current into the phase Io current input, connect the single-phase current
generator as shown in the diagram below.
Use one of the P1F output relays to stop the chronometer. If you are using a circuit
breaker contact to stop the chronometer, the measured time includes the circuit
breaker operating time.

64 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Protection Relay Commissioning

Figure 20. Connection diagram to earth (CBCT) fault protection function tests

test bloc

au iliary
I voltage
current
generator

stop

Definite Time Protection Test

A definite time protection function uses two settings that are independent of one
another:
● The current set point (IN_1, IN_2 or IN_3 (E, E+))
● The time delay

Two checks are therefore required

Threshold check:
Step Action
1 If necessary disable:
• Phase overcurrent protections.
• negative sequence overcurrent protection function.
• Switch on to fault protection function (B, A, E, E+).
• Broken conductor protection function (E, E+).
• thermal overload protection (N, B, A, E, E+).
• cold load pick up.
• auto reclose (if is triggered by current protection functions, E, E+).
2 Inject a current approximately equal to 80% of the threshold value.
3 Increase the current slowly until the P1F relay trips or until the overcurrent
protection (signals: tIN_1, tN_2, tIN_3) LED flashes quickly (if are
assigned).
4 Record the current value at the time of tripping on the test sheet and
compare it with the value on the settings sheet.
5 Reset P1F (R key).
6 If you are not performing any other checks:

65 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Commissioning Protection Relay

• Re-enable the protections and functions required by the settings sheet.

• Reset the thermal capacity used to 0%.
• When a blocking input is used, re-enable the back-up time delay
associated with each threshold.

Time delay check:

Step Action
1 If necessary disable:
• Phase overcurrent protections.
• negative sequence overcurrent protection function.
• Switch on to fault protection function (B, A, E, E+).
• Broken conductor protection function (E, E+).
• thermal overload protection (N, B, A, E, E+).
• cold load pick up.
• auto reclose (if is triggered by current protection functions, E, E+).
2 Short-circuit the generator to avoid injecting current into the P1F relay.
3 Prepare to inject a current at least twice as high as the tripping current
measured in the threshold check.
4 Re-establish the injection circuit in the P1F relay and set the chronometer
to zero.
5 Start current injection and the chronometer simultaneously and use the
ammeter to make sure the injected current is stable. When P1F trips, the
chronometer stops.
6 Record the time elapsed on the test sheet and compare it with the value on
the settings sheet.
7 Reset P1F (R key).
8 If you are not performing any other checks:
• Re-enable the protections and functions required by the settings sheet.
• Reset the thermal capacity used to 0%.
• When a blocking input is used, re-enable the back-up time delay
associated with each threshold.

IDMT Protection Test

IDMT protection uses a standardized curve (Io, t).

The test consists of testing a few points on the curve, in the tripping zone for the
threshold I>.

Checking a point on the curve:

Step Action
1 If necessary disable:
• Phase overcurrent protections.
• negative sequence overcurrent protection function.
• Switch on to fault protection function (B, A, E, E+).
• Broken conductor protection function (E, E+).
• thermal overload protection (N, B, A, E, E+).
• cold load pick up.
• auto reclose (if is triggered by current protection functions, E, E+).
2 Choose a point (Io/IN_1, t) to be tested in the threshold tripping zone, using
the Overcurrent Protection Tripping Curves, page 129 and subsequent.
3 Set the generator for the current determined in step 2.
4 Reset the chronometer to zero and reset P1F if necessary (R key).
5 Start current injection and the chronometer simultaneously and use the
ammeter to make sure the injected current is stable. When P1F trips, the
chronometer stops.
6 Record the time elapsed on the test sheet and compare it with the expected
value.
7 Reset P1F (R key).
8 If you are not performing any other checks:

66 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Protection Relay Commissioning

• Re-enable the protections and functions required by the settings sheet.

• Reset the thermal capacity used to 0%.
• When a blocking input is used, re-enable the back-up time delay
associated with each threshold.

67 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Commissioning Protection Relay

Thermal Overload Protection (ANSI 49) Test

Applicable to PowerLogic P1F Series

L N B A E E+

Purpose of the Test

The thermal overload protection test is used to check the operation setting values for
this protection functions:
● Calculation of the thermal capacity used
● Alarm set point
● Tripping time delay

Wiring Diagram

To inject current into the phase A current input, connect the single-phase current
generator as shown in the diagram below.

Use one of the P1F output relays to stop the chronometer. If you are using a circuit
breaker contact to stop the chronometer, the measured time includes the circuit
breaker operating time.
Figure 21. Connection diagram to overload protection function tests

test bloc

I
current
generator
au iliary
voltage
stop

68 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Protection Relay Commissioning

Thermal Overload Protection Test

Thermal overload protection uses a curve (I, t).

The test consists of testing a few points on the curve, in the tripping zone for the
threshold.

Checking a point on the curve:

Step Action
1 If necessary disable:
• Phase overcurrent protections.
• Earth fault protection
• negative sequence overcurrent protection function.
• Switch on to fault protection function (B, A, E, E+).
• Broken conductor protection function (E, E+).
• cold load pick up.
• auto reclose (if is triggered by current protection functions, E, E+).
2 From thermal equation/curves (Function and Parameters chapter, Thermal
Overload Protection section) determine the coordinates for a point (I/Itherm,t)
to be tested.
3 Set the generator for the current determined in step 2.
4 Reset the chronometer to zero and reset P1F if necessary (R key).
5 Reset the thermal capacity used to 0%.
6 Start current injection and the chronometer simultaneously and use the
ammeter to make sure the injected current is stable. When P1F trips, the
chronometer stops.
7 Record the time elapsed on the test sheet and compare it with the expected
value.
8 Reset P1F (R key)
9 If you are not performing any other checks:
• Re-enable the protections and functions required by the settings sheet.
• Reset the thermal capacity used to 0%.
• When a logic discrimination blocking order is used, re-enable the
back-up time delay associated with each threshold.

69 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Commissioning Protection Relay

Checking the Logic Input Connections

Applicable to PowerLogic P1F Series

L N B A E E+

Checking the Logic Inputs

To check the logic inputs, proceed as follows for each input.

Step Action
1 Display the I/P Status menu cell in the relay menu.
2 • If the input power supply voltage is available, use an electric cord to
short-circuit the contact that delivers logic data to the input.
• If the input power supply voltage is not available, apply a voltage
supplied by the DC voltage generator to the terminal of the contact linked
to the chosen input. To adjust the voltage level: refer to Connecting the
Logic Inputs, page 37.
3 Note any change in the display.
4 If necessary, reset the P1F (R key).

70 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Protection Relay Commissioning

Operational Commissioning
Final Check

When the tests are complete, proceed as follows for the final check:
Step Action
1 Put the cover back on the test block
2 Look through all the screens relating to the PowerLogic P1F protection
functions and check that only the desired protections are active.
3 Check the conformity of the validated parameters in PowerLogic P1F
against the settings sheet.
4 Record the last event recorded by PowerLogic P1F on the test sheet so that
you can distinguish between the values attributable to the tests and those
due to subsequent activation of the protections by a fault on the installation.
The PowerLogic P1F relay is now operational.

71 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Commissioning Protection Relay

PowerLogic P1F Test Sheet

Use

This test sheet can be used to record the results of the commissioning tests.
Each test is described in detail in the Commissioning chapter.
Only carry out the tests required, depending on the relay type and the functions in
use.
Check the box when the check has been made and is conclusive.

Identification

Workstation Test Conducted on: By:

Cubicle Comments
Type of PowerLogic
P1
Serial Number
Software version
(to be read in the parameters menu on
screen)

Overall Checks

Type of Check
Preliminary inspection, prior to energization
Energization
Checking parameters and settings
Connecting the logic inputs (PowerLogic P1F, model B, A, E, E+)
Validation of the Complete Protection Chain

Checking the CT Ratio

CT Theoretical Primary Current Measured
Checked Transformation Injection Measured Transformation
Ratio Current at the Ratio
Secondary
Phase CT A
Phase CT B
Phase CT C
Earth CT

Checking the Current Inputs

Type of Test Performed Result Display

Check
Connecting Secondary CT primary IA = .......................
the phase injection of the CT rated IB = .......................
current inputs rated current IC = ......................
current, either 1 A
or 5 A.
Connecting Standard method: Injected current Io = .......................
the earth Injection of 5 A value
fault current into
input primary circuit of
core balance CT
or CT

72 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Protection Relay Commissioning

Phase Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 50/51) Tests

I> set point with definite time curve

Current Set Point Test Time Delay Test

Set point set Set point measured Time delay set Time delay measured

I> set point with IDMT curve

Injected Current Tripping Time

Measured Theoretical Measured
Point 1
Point 2

I>> set point with definite time curve

Current Set Point Test Time Delay Test

Set point set Set point measured Time delay set Time delay measured

Time Delay Test

Time delay set Time delay measured

74 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Protection Relay Commissioning

AUX4 with definite time curve

Time Delay Test

Time delay set Time delay measured

Switch On To Fault Protection Tests

SOTF set point with definite time curve

Current Set Point Test Time Delay Test

Set point set Set point measured Time delay set Time delay measured

Broken Conductor Protection (46BC) Tests

Ratio I2/I1 set point with definite time curve

Current Set Point Test Time Delay Test

Set point set Set point measured Time delay set Time delay measured

Thermal Overload Protection (ANSI 49) Tests

Injected Current Tripping Time

Measured Theoretical Measured
Point 1
Point 2

Logic Selectivity Tests

Time Delay Test

Time delay set Time delay measured
SEL1 tI>>
SEL1 tI>>>
SEL1 tIN>>
SEL1 tIN>>>

Time Delay Test

Time delay set Time delay measured
SEL2 tI>>
SEL2 tI>>>
SEL2 tIN>>
SEL2 tIN>>>

Cold Load Pick-up Tests

Cold load PU Level set point with definite time curve

Current Set Point Test Time Delay Test

Set Set point Time Time delay

point measured delay measured
set set
CLPU I>

75 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Commissioning Protection Relay

CLPU I>>
CLPU I>>>
CLPU IN_1
CLPU IN_2
CLPU IN_3
CLPU Brkn
Cond
CLPU Itherm
CLPU I2>

Binary Inputs Tests

Binary Inputs Working

L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
L6
L7
L8

Relay Outputs Tests

Relay Outputs Working

RL1
RL2
RL3
RL4
RL5
RL6
RL7
WD

LEDs Tests

Relay Outputs Working

LED 1 Trip
LED 2 Alarm
LED 3
LED 4
LED 5
LED 6
LED 7
LED 8 Healthy

76 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Protection Relay Commissioning

Comments

…………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………………

Commissioning Engineer Customer

Date: Date:

77 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Use Protection Relay

Use
Human Machine Interface
Front Panel

The Human Machine Interface (HMI) on the front panel of P1F relays consists of a
display, LEDs, keys and front local communication port (mini USB).

A sealable pivoting flap can help to prevent access to the setting keys by
unauthorized persons (optional equipment).

Figure 22. Front panel of the relay:

1 – ed “ rip” E
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, – Freely programmable LED (second LED is yellow, rest of them red)
8 – Green “Healthy” E ( atchdog)
9 – Display (graphic liquid crystal display - LCD)
10 – Home key, return to top menu “ ecord” when pressed
11 – Reset/Clear key, return to upper level menu when pressed
12 – 4 arrow keys, and confirm entry OK key
Return to upper level menu
Enter lower level menu
Go to previous menu at same level
Go to next menu at same level
+ Enter edit mode
+ + Exit edit mode
13 – CB Open key
14 – CB Close Key
15 – Mini-USB type B port for local connections

Healthy LED Status

Healthy LED status Function

Green LED On P1F on
Green LED Flashing P1F in the fail position

78 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Protection Relay Use

Display

The display is a backlit LCD unit.

Each P1F protection function is presented in a screen consisting of the following
items:

• First line: Protection function name

• Second line: Displays protection function status or set values of parameters
associated with the function
• Third line:
<0.10 40.00> setting range:
0.01 step values of parameters associated with the function
• Fourth line: The following special symbols may appear:
possible to move up by pressing the .
possible to move left by pressing the key.
possible to move down by pressing the key.
possible to move right by pressing the key.
the last menu cell in the column. If the key is pressed here
the cursor will reach the first cell in the column.
possible to edit the displayed values. A menu pointer, on the
left: it points to the pictogram for the selected menu
Edition of values on the display password-protected
Edition of setting value is possible (the level correct password
has been entered)
On the last line: Setting group 1 is displayed.
In the bottom right corner: Setting group 1 is active.
On the last line: Setting group 2 is displayed.
In the bottom right corner: Setting group 2 is active.
USB USB communication port is active. When communication port is
disabled then USB pictogram is not displayed.

I hreshold
. In
. . .
B

Menu organization

The menu content depends on the PowerLogic P1F model. The list of screens by
menu, for each model, is given at the end of this chapter – Menu Map. Menu in
PowerLogic P1F has got pulldown structure.

Default Display

A default screen is displayed automatically 10 minutes after the last keystroke. This
default screen is (depends on settings GLOBAL SETTINGS/LOC/Default Display):
• The screen displaying the three phase and earth fault currents per unit (in
reference to In or Ion)
• The screen displaying the three phase and earth fault currents in amperes
• The screen displaying CB status and possibility to CB control
• The screen displaying auto reclose status and possibility to blocking of auto
reclose
• The screen displaying control mode status and possibility to change the control
mode

79 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Use Protection Relay

Operation
Access to Data

During operation, the user can access the following data:

• Readout of measurements, parameters and protection settings
• Local annunciation of the last fault:
• by a light up LED associated with a fault
• by a fault screen on the display unit
• Acknowledgement of the last fault
• Readout of the 20 last recorded faults
• Readout of the 5 last recorded alarms
• Readout of the 5 last recorded triggers
• Readout counters:
• control counters
• fault counter
• auto reclose counter
• CB monitoring counter
• Reset of latched LEDs and relay outputs (if the causes disappeared)
• LED test

Readout of Measurements, Parameters and Protection Settings

When the P1F operate, the user can read all the data contained in the relay.

Announcement of the Last Fault

When a fault is detected by P1F, it may be indicated locally by:

• A fault LED (Trip and any other freely configurable LEDs, depending on
configuration), which lights up for as long as the fault is present and has not been
acknowledged
• A fault screen, which is displayed on the display unit and remains displayed until
the operator presses a key

The operator can acknowledge faults locally by pressing the Reset key.

P1F relays connected to a communication network:

• Indicate faults remotely-indication bit
• Can receive an order to acknowledge faults from the communication

Fault and LEDs Signals

The fault and signals LEDs light up to indicate a fault or any other signals assigned
to LEDs (depending on configuration).
Trip and Healthy LEDs are fixed, the rest of LEDs are freely configurable. LEDs can
be latched or not. If latching of LED is disabled, the LED goes out once the cause
disappeared.

Fault Screens (Fault Record)

Fault screens (column) inform the operator about the characteristics of the last fault
detected by the P1F relay.

The operator can consult the other cells using the , or keys. If the relay is
reset the operator can still consult the 20 last recorded faults in the FAULT
RECORDS menu (column).

80 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Protection Relay Use

Menu Cell Description

rip Fault origin

tI Protection function that caused
the trip

ault ime Time of the fault

ault ate Date of the fault

ctive et Group Which setting group was active

Group at the time of the fault

ault rigin Phase fault origin

hase

I . Value of the currents in phase A

IB . and B measured at the time of
the fault

I . Value of the currents in phase C

I . and neutral measured at the time
of the fault

. Value of the neutral voltage and

angle I eg. angle of neutral current
measured at the time of the fault
(E+)

Fault Acknowledgement

Pressing the Reset key acknowledges faults locally and causes:

• The latched output relays to be reset
• The fault LED to go out

After acknowledgement, the P1F relay displays the default display (set in GLOBAL
SETTINGS/LOC/Default Display).

Readout of the 20 Last Recorded Faults

Each P1F relays record the characteristics of the 20 last faults.

These records can be accessed in the RECORDS/FAULT RECORDS menu.

Selection of fault number is possible in below cell (first cell in FAULT RECORDS
column):

81 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Use Protection Relay

ecord umber
ault

Readout of the 5 Last Recorded Alarms

Each P1F relays record the characteristics of the 5 last alarms.

These records can be accessed in the RECORDS/ALARM RECORDS menu.

Selection of alarm number is possible in below cell (first cell in ALARM RECORDS
column):

ecord umber
larm

Readout of the 5 Last Recorded Triggers

Each P1F relays record the characteristics of the 5 last triggers.

These records can be accessed in the RECORDS/INSTANTANEOUS RECORD

menu. Selection of triggers number is possible in below cell (first cell in
INSTANTANEOUS RECORD column):

ecord umber
tart

Readout Counters

P1F relays models A, E, E+ count the following values:

• CONTROL COUNTERS
• Trip numbers
• Close numbers
• FAULT COUNTER
• Fault Trips number
• Fault Starts number
• Alarms number
• Hardware Warnings number
• AUTO RECLOSE COUNTER
• [79] Action Total number
• Trips&Lockout Total number
• Successful total number
• Cycle 1 Reclose number
• Cycle 2 Reclose number
• Cycle 3 Reclose number
• Cycle 4 Reclose number

Each above counter can be reset in below cell (in the end of each counter column)

ounter eset
eset

• CB MONITORING COUNTER

82 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Protection Relay Use

• CB close monitoring number

• CB open monitoring number
• CB AMPS Value

Reset of Latched LEDs and Relay Outputs

Reset of latched LEDs and relay outputs is possible if the causes disappeared.
Reset can be done by:
• Use reset key
• Assigned binary inputs
• From Scada system (depends on select control mode)

LED Test

The LED test is used to check that each LED on the front panel are working
correctly.

To perform the test (when any protections are not triggered and PowerLogic P1F is
energized from the voltage), press R button from default display cell level. After this,
all LEDs on the front panel light up for approx. 1s.

83 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Use Protection Relay

Settings
Access to Parameters and Settings

These parameters and settings are divided into the following menus:
• The protection menu (SETTING GROUP x), which contains the essential settings
for setting up the protection functions
• The parameters menu (GLOBAL SETTINGS), which contains the parameters that
can be used to adapt PowerLogic P1F operation to particular applications

Access the Settings with a Password

By default, modification of the PowerLogic P1F protection and parameter settings is

accessed by a password. Refer to Password, page 162
In this mode (passworded device), P1F will ask automatically about the password
if the OK key is pressed in any editable menu cell during a setting operation (edit
mode). The password is a 4-digit number. Depends on the level (Configurator,
Operator, User) passwords are different.
Once the correct code has been entered, modification of the settings is allowed for
10 minutes after the last keystroke. When the user wants to exit from edit mode
faster then one can select Edit settings? cell from menu (SETTING CHANGE
MODE column) and press OK key.

Setting a Parameter

The procedure for setting a protection function or a parameter is as follows:

Step Action
1 Select the menu cell for the function to be set using the , , or
keys.
Example:
I hreshold
. In
. . .

2 Press the OK key:

• If password protection is not active, the function parameter flashes - the
parameter is selected and can be set (edition is possible – edit mode,
padlock is open):
I hreshold
. In
. . .

• Otherwise, the password entry menu cell is displayed:

Edit settings
Enter

and refer to the Entering the Password section.

3 Use the , , and keys to scroll through the parameter
values until the desired value is displayed.
4 • To confirm the new parameter value, press the OK key: the set
parameter value is displayed (not flashing) to indicate that it has been
considered by P1F only after exit from setting mode.

84 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Protection Relay Use

Step Action
• To abort the current parameter entry, back to step 2 and set again
previous value or set.
5 • If the set parameter is completely set, then you can select a new settings
(menu cells) using the , , and keys and set as
described in step 3.
6 If all required P1F protection and parameter settings are completely set then
to confirm all new settings it is necessary exit from setting mode. To exit
from setting mode select Edit settings? cell from menu (SETTING
CHANGE MODE column):
Edit settings
E it ress

and press OK key.

Setting a Relay Outputs

The procedure for assigning a relay outputs is as follows:

Step Action
1 Using the , , or keys to select in SETTING GROUP x/
OUTPUT RELAYS CONFIGURATION Gx signal or signals which to be
assigned to the outputs.
Example (E, E+)
rotect
rip

Digits in first row (54321) means number of relay outputs:

5 – RL 5
4 – RL 4
3 – RL 3
2 – RL 2
1 – RL 1
Digits in second row (00000) means that the signal is assigned to definite
relay output or outputs. The high state of the function mapped to the output
determines the high state of the output relay. The low state of this function
does not change the state of the output relay.
2 Press the OK key:
• If password protection is not active, the first digits on the right side in
second row flashes (edition is possible – edit mode):
rotect
rip

• Otherwise, the password entry menu cell is displayed:

Edit settings
Enter

and refer to the Entering the Password section.

85 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Use Protection Relay

Step Action
3 Using the , , or keys select output or outputs to assigned
definite signal. Digit 0 (in second row) under the relay output number means
that signal is not assigned to output. Digit 1 (in second row) under the relay
output number means that selected signal is assigned to selected output
(for example to RL 1 and RL 4):
rotect
rip

4 Press the OK key to confirm the new settings for relay outputs: the set
parameter value is displayed (not flashing) to indicate that it has been
considered by P1F only after exit from setting mode.
5 If the relay outputs is completely set, then you can select a new signals
using the and keys and set as described in step 2 and 3.
6 If all required P1F relay outputs are completely set then to confirm all new
settings it is necessary exit from setting mode (refer section Setting a
Parameter).

Setting a Binary Input

The procedure for assigning a binary input is as follows:

Step Action
1 Using the , , or keys to select in SETTING GROUP x/
INPUTS CONFIGURATION Gx signal or signals which to be assigned to
the binary inputs.
Example (E, E+)
tatus
B

Digits in first row (87654321) means number of binary inputs:

8 – BI 8
7 – BI 7
6 – BI 6
5 – BI 5
4 – BI 4
3 – BI 3
2 – BI 2
1 – BI 1
Digits in second row (00000000) means that the signal is assigned to
definite relay input or inputs – 1, or not assigned – 0 .
2 Press the OK key:
• If password protection is not active, the first digits on the right side in
second row flashes (edition is possible – edit mode):
tatus
B

• Otherwise, the password entry menu cell is displayed:

Edit settings
Enter

and refer to the Entering the Password section.

86 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Protection Relay Use

Step Action
3 Using the , , or keys select input or inputs to assigned
definite signal. Digit 0 (in second row) under the binary input number means
that signal is not assigned to input. Digit 1 (in second row) under the binary
input number means that selected signal is assigned to selected input (for
example to BI 2 and BI 8):
tatus
B

4 Press the OK key to confirm the new settings for binary inputs: the set
parameter value is displayed (not flashing) to indicate that it has been
considered by P1F only after exiting from setting mode.
5 If the binary inputs is completely set, then you can select a new signals
using the and keys and set as described in step 2 and 3.
6 If all required P1F binary inputs are completely set then to confirm all new
settings it is necessary exit from setting mode (refer section Setting a
Parameter).

Setting a LED Indicators

The procedure for assigning a LED indicator is as follows:

Step Action
1 Using the , , or keys to select in SETTING GROUP x/
LEDS CONFIGURATION Gx signal or signals which to be assigned to the
LED indicators.
Example:
rotect.
rip

Digits in first row (765432) means number of LED indicators:

7 – LED 7
6 – LED 6
5 – LED 5
4 – LED 4
3 – LED 3
2 – LED 2
Digits in second row (000000) means that the signal is assigned to definite
LED indicator or indicators – 1, or not assigned – 0.
2 Press the OK key:
• If password protection is not active, the first digits on the right side in
second row flashes (edition is possible – edit mode):
rotect.
rip

• Otherwise, the password entry menu cell is displayed:

Edit settings
Enter

87 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Use Protection Relay

Step Action
and refer to the Entering the Password section.
3 Using the , , or keys select LED or LEDs to assigned
definite signal. Digit 0 (in second row) under the LED indicator number
means that signal is not assigned to this LED. Digit 1 (in second row) under
the LED indicator number means that selected signal is assigned to
selected LED (for example to LED 5 and LED 7):
rotect.
rip

4 Press the OK key to confirm the new settings for LED indicators: the set
parameter value is displayed (not flashing) to indicate that it has been
considered by P1F only after exit from setting mode.
5 If the LED indicator is completely set, then you can select a new signal using
the and keys and set as described in step 2 and 3.
6 If all required P1F LED indicators are completely set then to confirm all new
settings it is necessary exit from setting mode (refer section Setting a
Parameter).

NOTE: Trip LED is fixed.

Entering a Password to Authorize a Setting

The 4 password digits must be entered common. The procedure for entering the
password is as follows:
Step Action
1 The password entry screen is displayed and the first from the right digit (0)
flashes:
Edit settings
Enter

2 Use the , , and keys to scroll through the digits from 0 to 9

and select correct password.
3 Once the password has been entered:
• If the password is correct: the current setting menu cell is displayed
again. It is then possible to modify the protection and parameter settings.
• If the password is incorrect: the message Protected is displayed and
this means that no protection and parameter settings can be change.
etting change
rotected

Lost Password

If you lost the password, read the serial number on the PowerLogic P1F label and
contact your local Schneider Electric after-sales service.

NOTICE
Please take care of your modified new password, reseting password may cause
some inconvenience or extra cost.

88 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Protection Relay Use

Method for Resetting the Thermal Image

The procedure for resetting the thermal capacity used is as follows:

Step Action
1 Select in MEASUREMENT column in main menu following menu cell:
hermal
o operation

2 Press the OK key:

• If password protection is not active, the possibility of reset function
flashes
hermal
o operation

• Otherwise, the password entry menu cell is displayed. Refer to the

Entering the Password section.
3 Use the key to select reset function of thermal image:
hermal
eset

4 Press the OK key to confirm thermal image reset.

5 Exit from the setting mode.

More information about possibility to reset thermal image can be found in Thermal
Overload Protection (ANSI 49) section, page 144.

89 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Use Protection Relay

Password Protection
More details are described in Password subchapter in Function and Parameters
chapter (see on page 162).

90 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Protection Relay Use

USB Communication Port

Introduction

Mini-USB type B front port is dedicated to local connection with eSetup Easergy Pro
setting and operating software tool for configuring PowerLogic P1 devices. By
default, port is disabled.

NOTICE
USB communication port is dedicated to set the relay; extract settings, event,
disturbance recorder files. USB port is not dedicated to energizing the device.

Operation

After downloading the FW, the USB port is enabled and keep enabled. When USB
communication is active then on LCD following pictogram is displayed:

Enable B port
Enable
B

The USB port will not be disabled automatically.

It is possible to disable a USB communication port from the local panel of

PowerLogic P1 protection relay only. To disable USB communication port qualified
personnel must be logged in to the relay from the Configurator level. The
modification of USB communication port parameters does not require saving of all
settings – exit from edit mode (warm restart).

It is not possible to enable USB communication port by rear RS485 communication

port.

Setting

Settings for the COMMUNICATION USB port can be found in GLOBAL SETTINGS/
COMMUNICATION USB menu:

Available Setting Authorized Values Default Setting

Enable USB Port 0: Disable
Enable
1: Enable
Protocol 0: Modbus S1
1: IEC-103
GetSet
2: Modbus Std
3: GetSet
Baud Rate 0: 4800
1: 9600
2: 19200
3: 38400 115200
4: 57600
5: 115200
6: 187500
Parity 0: No parity
1: Odd parity No parity
2: Even parity
Stop Bits 0: 1 stop bit
1 stop bit
1: 2 stop bits

91 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Use Protection Relay

GetSet protocol is dedicated to communication PowerLogic P1 with eSetup Easergy

Pro. Recommended USB parameters to communication with eSetup Easergy Pro
are presented below:

Setting Recommended Setting

Enable USB Port Enable
Protocol GetSet
Baud Rate 115200
Parity No parity
Stop Bits 1 stop bit

92 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Protection Relay Use

RS485 Communication Port

Introduction

RS485 rear port is dedicated to connection with SCADA system. By default port is
disabled.

It is possible to enable a communication port from the local panel of PowerLogic P1

protection relay or from eSetup Easergy Pro with the CONFIGURATOR access right
(COMMUNICATION/Communication RS485 – see below).

Figure 23. eSetup Easergy Pro Communication RS485 window

Setting

Settings for the COMMUNICATION USB port can be found in GLOBAL SETTINGS/
COMMUNICATION RS485 menu:

Available Setting Authorized Values Default Setting

Enable USB Port 0: Disable
Disable
1: Enable
Protocol 0: Modbus S1
1: IEC-103
2: Modbus Std Modbus S1
3: GetSet
4: Modbus PO
Relay Address RS485 1-247 (Step 1) 247
Baud Rate 0: 4800
1: 9600
2: 19200
115200
3: 38400
4: 57600
5: 115200
Parity 0: No parity
1: Odd parity No parity
2: Even parity
Stop Bits 0: 1 stop bit
1 stop bit
1: 2 stop bits

93 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Use Protection Relay

First Steps with eSetup Easergy Pro

Overview

eSetup Easergy Pro is a setting and operating software tool for configuring
PowerLogic P1 devices, local operation and customization functions. The eSetup
Easergy Pro software is supplied directly through the Schneider – Electric website
www.schneider-electric.com, along with the eSetup Easergy Pro program for
recovering disturbance recording files, and all the PowerLogic P1 documentation in
PDF format.
Figure 24. eSetup Easergy Pro menu bar and tool bar

The eSetup Easergy Pro software has a graphical interface where the protection
relay settings and parameters are grouped under nine menu tabs:
• General

• Measurements

• Control

• Protection

• Matrix

• Logs
• Communication

The contents of the tabs depend on the device type and the selected application
mode. Refer to the User Manual of eSetup Easergy Pro for detailed information on
the setting views of each menu.

The eSetup Easergy Pro stores the device configuration in a setting file. The
configuration of one physical device is saved in one setting file. The configurations
can be printed out and saved for later use.

When starting to work with eSetup Easergy Pro, you have three options:

• Create a new setting file without connecting to a protection relay

• Open an existing (previously saved) setting file without connecting to a

protection relay

• Connect to a relay and read the settings from the protection relay.
eSetup Easergy Pro can be connected to a single relay via the USB port in the
protection relays front panel or via RS485 in the protection relays rear port.

Operation Modes

The eSetup Easergy Pro software can be used in three operation modes:

• Disconnected mode

• Single unit connecting mode

• Network connecting mode

94 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Protection Relay Use

Using eSetup Easergy Pro in disconnected mode

The disconnected mode allows you to prepare parameters and settings files for
PowerLogic P1 prior to commissioning.

The parameter and protection setting files prepared in disconnected mode will be
downloaded later to the PowerLogic P1 protection relays in connected mode.
In Disconnected mode, the user can create a setting file from scratch, or open a
previously saved setting file as a basis for creating configuration for a protection
relay of the same type. Refer to the User Manual of eSetup Easergy Pro for more
information.

Using eSetup Easergy Pro connected to a single PowerLogic P1

The single connection mode is used during commissioning of an PowerLogic P1

protection relay:

• To upload, download or modify PowerLogic P1 parameters and settings.

Refer to the User Manual of eSetup Easergy Pro for more information on
uploading (writing)/downloading (reading) setting files to/from the connected
protection relays.

NOTICE
After writing new settings, configurations or firmware to a protection relay, perform
a test to verify that the protection relay operates correctly with the new settings.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in unwanted shutdown of the

electrical installation.

• To have all the measurements and supporting data available for commissioning.

The PC fitted with the eSetup Easergy Pro software is connected to the USB port on
the front panel of the PowerLogic P1 using a USB cord.

Cable Type: USB 2.0:

• Connectors:
PC: type A male

P1F: type mini B 5-pin male

• USB Cable: minimum 1P28AWG/2C24AWG, max: 2m

Figure 25. Connecting a PC to the PowerLogic P1 using a USB cable

Using eSetup Easergy Pro connected to an PowerLogic P1 network

The network connection mode is used during operation:

• To manage the protection system.

• To check the status of the power supply.

• To diagnose any incident occurring on the power supply.

95 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Use Protection Relay

The PC fitted with the eSetup Easergy Pro software is connected to a group of
PowerLogic P1 units via a communication network (connection via serial link).

The connection window allows configuration of the PowerLogic P1 network, and

provides access to the parameter and protection setting files of the PowerLogic P1
units on the network.

Connecting to a single protection relay using USB cable

1. Install the USB driver from the eSetup Easergy Pro file package (location:
Drivers/P3 – for the PowerLogic P1 is the same driver as PowerLogic P3) for the
first time connecting the PowerLogic P1 protection relay to a PC running eSetup
Easergy Pro

2. Connect the USB cable between the PC running eSetup Easergy Pro and the
local port of the PowerLogic P1 protection relay, with the mini-USB type B connector
of the cable plugged into the protection relay and the type A connector to the PC.
3. On the eSetup Easergy Pro toolbar, click the ON connection button. The Login
pop-up window opens.

Figure 26. The connection buttons on the tool bar

4. Select the right USB serial port and connection speed.

Figure 27. Connect window in the eSetup Easergy Pro

5. Click Connect.
A new window showing the relay information opens.

96 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Protection Relay Use

Figure 28. Window of access level selection in the eSetup Easergy Pro

6. Enter the user name and password to login.

Figure 29. Main menu window in the eSetup Easergy Pro

Name of the login for each levels are given in below table.

Level Login
Configurator conf
Operator oper
User user

97 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Use Protection Relay

7. eSetup Easergy Pro’s main view opens.

Figure 30. Main menu window in the eSetup Easergy Pro

NOTE: If you connect for the first time to a device on which the default users and
passwords are used, see Password subchapter in Function and Parameters
chapter, page 162.

98 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Protection Relay Use

Menu Map
The menu content depends on the PowerLogic P1F model. Binary inputs and relay
outputs menu cells content maximum number of binary inputs and relay outputs
which are different depends on the model. For example, for model A in relay outputs
menu cells is displayed 7 relay outputs (maximum), and for model E (or E+) 5 relay
outputs only.

Binary inputs Relay Outputs

Model L 0 3+WD

Model N 0 5+WD

Model B 4 3+WD

Model A 4 7+WD

Model E 8 5+WD

Model E+ 8 5+WD

Figure 31. Menu map main menu

LR Status: L+R Function available in all Models (L, N, A, B, E, E+)

CTRL: Local+Rem.
.
Function available in Models: N, A, E, E+ only
Function available in Models: B, A, E, E+ only

[79]:Ready Function available in Model A, E, E+ only

CTRL: No operat. Function available in Model E, E+ only

CB status:Opened
CTRL: No operat.

0.00A 0.00A
0.00A 0.0mA

MEASUREMENTS 0.00In 0.00In ALARM STATUS RECORDS SETTING GROUP 1

0.00In 0.00Ien

OP PARAMETERS SETTING CHANGE COMMISSIONING GLOBAL SETTINGS SETTING GROUP 2

MODE

PJ104ENd

99 P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Use Protection Relay

Figure 32. Menu map submenu part 1

SETTING CHANGE OP PARAMETERS MEASUREMENTS ALARM STATUS
0.00In 0.00In
MODE
0.00In 0.00Ien

Edit settings? Description IA= 0.00A LR Status:L+R

Enter PSWD PowerLogic P1F1E 0.00In CTRL: Remote Leave Lthd AL.
Press Down Key

Setting change: Main Location: IB= 0.00A [79]:Ready

Protected 0.00In CTRL: no operat.

Sublocation: IC= 0.00A CB status:Opened

0.00In CTRL: no operat.

Device name: IN= 0.0mA

0.00A 0.00A
0.00Ien
0.00A 0.00A

Serial Nb: Is1= 0.00A

0.00In
00000001

Order code: Is2= 0.00A

0.00In
Function available in all Models (L, N, A, B, E, E+)
Function available in Models: N, B, A, E, E+ only
Firmw. Version Is2/Is1= Function available in Models: B, A, E, E+ only
2.E 0% Function available in Model A, E, E+ only
Function available in Model E, E+ only

Firm. release: Thermal: 0% Function available in Model E+ only

2.E 0:No operation

Active Set Group 2nd harm:IA= 0% BN 0.00mS

Group 1 IB= 0% IC= 0%

Date INcos 0.00A YN 0.00mS

06/08/17 0.00Ien

Time INsin 0.00A VN 0.0V

13:15:33 0.00Ien

Nominal GN 0.00mS IN angle

Frequency:50Hz 0 deg.
PJ001ENa

100 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

101
Protection Relay

RECORDS
RECORDS

FAULT RECORDS ALARM RECORDS INSTANTENOUS COUNTERS

RECORDS

Record Number Record Number Record Number CONTROL FAULT AUTORECLOSE CB MONITORING SPRING CHARGING
1:Fault 1 1:Alarm 1 1:Start 1 COUNTER COUNTER COUNTER COUNTER TIME COUNTER

Trip Alarm: Start: No.Trips No.Fault Trips No.[79]Action CB Close counter Record Number
tI> tI>> I> 0 0 Total 0 0 1: Char. Time 1

Fault Time Alarm Time Start Time No.Close No.Fault Starts No.Trips &Lockout CB Oper. counter Operating time
12:05:23.197 12:05:23.197 12:05:23.192 0 0 Total 0 0 4.0s
Figure 33. Menu map submenu part 2

Fault Date Alarm Date Start Date Counter Reset No.Alarms No.Successful CB Trips counter Time
01/01/20 01/01/20 01/01/20 CTRL:No operat. 0 Total 0 0 03:40:30.713

Active Set Group Active Set Group Active Set Group No.HW Warnings Cycle 1 Reclose CB AMPS Value Date
Group 1 Group 1 Group 1 0 No. 0 0.0MA 01/12/19

Fault Origin Alarm Origin Start Origin Counter Reset Cycle 2 Reclose
Phase A Phase B Phase A CTRL:No operat. No. 0

Function available in all Models (L, N, A, B, E, E+)

IA= 5.00A IA= 0.00A IA= 3.50A Cycle 3 Reclose
IB= 0.00A IB= 10.00A IB= 0.00A No. 0 Function available in Models: N, B, A, E, E+ only
Function available in Models: B, A, E, E+ only
Function available in Model A, E, E+ only
IC= 0.00A IC= 0.00A IC= 0.00A Cycle 4 Reclose
IN= 0.0mA IN= 0.0mA IN= 0.00A No. 0 Function available in Model E, E+ only
Function available in Model E+ only

UN= 0.0V UN= 0.0V UN= 0.0V Counter Reset

angle IN= Deg. angle IN= Deg. angle IN= Deg. CTRL:No operat. PJ002ENa

P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Use
Use Protection Relay

Figure 34. Menu map submenu part 3

102 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Use

Figure 35. Menu map submenu part 4

SETTING GROUP 1

PROTECTION G1

PHASE O/C G1 SOTF G1 E/GND FAULT G1 NEGATIVE SEQ.O/C BROKEN CONDUCTOR THERM OVERLOAD
[50/51] [50/51] [50/51N/67N] [46] G1 G1 [49] G1

I>? SOTF? IN_1 stage? I2>? Broken Cond.? Therm OL?

1: Trip 1: Trip 1:IN> Trip 2: Alarm 2: Alarm 1:Enabled
*

I> Threshold SOTF Threshold IN_1 Threshold I2> Threshold Ratio I2/I1 Itherm
1.00In 4.00In 0.10Ien 1.00In 20% 1.00In

Delay Type tSOTF Delay Type Delay Type tBCond Te (heating)

I> 1:IDMT SI 0.10s IN_1 1: IEC SI I2> 1: IEC SI 100.00s 40 mn

I> TMS IN_1 TMS I2> TMS Tr (cooling)

1.00 1.00 1.00 40 mn

Reset Delay Type Reset Delay Type Reset Delay Type Theta Trip
I> 0:IDMT IN_1 0: DMT I2> 0: DMT 100%

RTD/RTMS Reset DMT tReset DMT tReset Theta Trip/Reset

I> 0.00 IN_1 0.10s I2> 0.10s Ratio 90%

I>>? IN_2 stage? Alarm OL?

1: Trip 1:IN>>Trip 1: Enabled
*

I>> Threshold IN_2 Threshold Theta Alarm

1.50In 2.00Ien 80%

Delay Type tIN_2

I>> 0: DMT 0.40s

tI>> IN_3 stage?

1.00s 1:IN>>> Trip

Function available in all Models (L, N, A, B, E, E+)

Reset Delay Type IN_3 Threshold Function available in Models: N, B, A, E, E+ only
I>> 0: DMT 2.00Ien
Function available in Models: B, A, E, E+ only
Function available in Model A, E, E+ only
DMT tReset tIN_3 Function available in Model E, E+ only
PJ003ENa
I>> 1.00s 0.10s Function available in Model E+ only
* In model E+ this stage can be set as directional or
admittance protection
I>>>?
2: Alarm

I>>> Threshold
4.00In

tI>>>
1.00s

103 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Use Protection Relay

Figure 36. Menu map submenu part 5

CB Fail G1 AUX TIMERS G1 LOGIC SELECT. G1 COLD LOAD PU G1 AUTORECLOSE G1

[50BF] [79]

CB Fail? AUX1? Sel1? Cold Load PU? Autoreclose? Inhib.Trip 4321

1: Retrip 1: Trip 1: Enabled 0: Enabled 1: Enabled tI>>:Shot 0000

CB Fail Time tBF tAUX1 tSel1 Cold Load PU Dead Time tD1 Close Shot? 4321
0.10s 10.00s 0.40s Lebel 100% 0.20s tI>>> 0000

I< Threshold tAUX2? Sel2? Cold Load PU Dead Time tD2 Inhib.Trip 4321
CBF 0.10In 2: Alarm 1: Enabled tCL 1.0s 20.00s tI>>>:Shot 0000

IN< Threshold tAUX2 tSel2 Cold Load PU Dead Time tD3 Close Shot? 4321
CBF 0.10Ien 10.00s 1.00s I> 0: No 1.00s tIN_1 0000

Block I>? tAUX3? Cold Load PU Dead Time tD4 Inhib.Trip 4321
0: No 1: Trip I>> 0: No 20.00s tIN_1:Shot 0000

Block IN>? tAUX3 Cold Load PU Reclaim Time tR Close Shot> 4321
0: No 10.00s I>>> 0: No 2.00s tIN_2 0000

tAUX4? Cold Load PU Fast 0/C 54321 Inhib.Trip 4321

2: Alarm IN_1 0: No Trip 00000 tIN_2:Shot 0000

tAUX4 Cold Load PU Fast O/C Close Shot? 4321

10.00s IN_2 0: No Trip Delay 0.00s tIN_3 0000

Cold Load PU Fast E/Gnd 54321 Inhib.Trip 4321

IN_3 0: No Trip 00000 tIN_3:Shot 0000

Cold Load PU Fast E/Gnd Close Shot? 4321

Brkn.Cond 0: No Trip Delay 0.00s tAUX1 0000

Cold Load PU Close Shot? 4321

Itherm 0: No tI> 0000 tAUX1:Shot 0000

Function available in all Models (L, N, A, B, E, E+)

Function available in Models: N, B, A, E, E+ only Cold Load PU Inhib.Trip 4321 Close Shot? 4321
I2> 0: No tI>:Shot 0000 tAUX2 0000
Function available in Models: B, A, E, E+ only
Function available in Model A, E, E+ only
Function available in Model E, E+ only Close Shot? 4321 Inhib.Trip 4321
tI>> 0000 tAUX2:Shot 0000
Function available in Model E+ only PJ004ENa

104 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Use

Figure 37. Menu map submenu part 6

105 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Use Protection Relay

Figure 38. Menu map submenu part 7

LEDS
CONFIGURATION G1

Latched 765432 Start 765432 765432 [79] in 765432

LEDs 000000 IN_2 000000 tIN_1 000000 Progress 000000

Protect. 765432 Start 765432 765432 [79] 765432

Trip 000000 IN_3 000000 tIN_2 000000 F.Trip 000000

765432 765432 765432 [79] 765432

Alarm 000000 AUX1 000000 tIN_3 000000 Lockout 000000

General 765432 765432 765432 [79] 765432

Start 000000 AUX2 000000 tI2> 000000 Blocked 000000

Start 765432 765432 tBrkn 765432 [79] 765432

Phase A 000000 AUX3 000000 Cond. 000000 Success. 000000

Start 765432 765432 Thermal 765432 Local 765432

Phase B 000000 AUX4 000000 Trip 000000 CTRL Mode 000000

Start 765432 765432 Thermal 765432 CB 765432

Phase C 000000 AUX5 000000 Alarm 000000 Alarm 000000

Start 765432 765432 765432 Mainten. 765432

I> 000000 AUX6 000000 CB Fail 000000 Mode 000000

Start 765432 765432 765432 tCB FLT 765432

I>> 000000 tI> 000000 tAUX1 000000 Ext.Sign. 000000

Start 765432 765432 765432 Setting 765432

I>>> 000000 tI>> 000000 tAUX2 000000 Group 1 000000

Function available in all Models (L, N, A, B, E, E+)

Start 765432 76542 765432
SOTF 000000 tI>>> 000000 tAUX3 000000 Function available in Models: N, B, A, E, E+ only
Function available in Models: B, A, E, E+ only
Function available in Model A, E, E+ only
Start 765432 765432 765432
IN_1 000000 tSOTF 000000 tAUX4 000000 Function available in Model E, E+ only
Function available in Model E+ only

PJ006ENa

106 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Use

Figure 39. Menu map submenu part 8

Control Keys Mode

0: Disabled
0: Disabled

HCDFT

107 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

108
Use

COMMISSIONING

COMMUNICATION COMMUNICATION DISTURBANCE Opto I/P 87654321

RS485 USB RECORDER Status 00000000

Enable RS485 por Enable USB por Pre-Time Relay O/P W54321
1: Enable 1: Enable 0.10s Status 000000

Protocol Protocol Post Trip Time Maintance Mode

0:Modbus S1 3:GetSet 0.10s 1: Yes

Relay Address Baud Rate Disturb.Rec. Test W54321

RS485 254 5:115200 Trig. 0:on Inst. Pattern 000000

Baud Rate Parity Max Record Time Contact Test

Figure 40. Menu map submenu part 9

2:19200 0:No parity 3.00s Time 0.10s

Parity Stop Bits Test outputs

0:No parity 0:1 stop bit 0: no operation

Stop Bits Functional Test

0:1 stop bit 0: I>

Function available in all Models (L-ordering option, N, A, B, E, E+) Functional Test

Function available in Models: N, B, A, E, E+ only End 0: CB Trip

Function available in Models: B, A, E, E+ only

Function available in Model A, E, E+ only Functional Test
Function available in Model E, E+ only CTRL:No operat.
PJ012ENa
Function available in Model E+ only

P1F/EN M/1.2.1
Protection Relay
Protection Relay Use

Communication with Power Operation

Introduction

EcoStruxure Power Operation is an advanced, cybersecure power management

software platform engineered for electro-intensive and mission-critical facilities that
require secure, dedicated, power automation, power monitoring, and power events
analysis. Refer to Power Operation System Guide for detailed introduction.

Connect with EcoStruxure Panel Server

1) Connect P1F device with EcoStructure Panel Server.

Refer to EcoStruxure Panel Server for the Gateway introduction. Connection

diagram as below.

109 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Use Protection Relay

2) Configure connection to EcoStructure Panel Server via IP address on local

computer:

3) Open Power Operation connection from P1F via Easergy Pro or HMI:

GLOBAL SETTINGS -> COMMUNICATION RS485

Enable RS485 port: Enable

Protocol: Modbus PO

110 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Functions and Parameters

Functions and Parameters

Phase CT Ratio
Applicable to PowerLogic P1F Series

L N B A E E+

Description

The phase CT ratio can be accessed in the protection menu and must always be set
at the time of commissioning. It is used by all PowerLogic P1 functions which deal
with the current.

NOTE: Good practice is to set this ratio before implementing the protection settings.
The parameter to be set is:
● Phase CT ratio setting (GLOBALSETTINGS/CT RATIO menu cell).

Settings

Settings for the primary and secondary current can be found in

GLOBALSETTINGS/ CT RATIO menu:

Available Setting Authorized Values Default Setting

Line CT Primary … kA (step: 1.0) 1A
Line CT Sec 1 or 5 A (step: N/A) 1A

111 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Functions and Parameters Protection Relay

Earth CT Ratio or Core Balance CT Rating

Applicable to PowerLogic P1F Series

L N B A E E+

Description

The earth CT ratio (or core balance CT rating) can be accessed in the protection
menu and must always be set at the time of commissioning. It is used by all
PowerLogic P1 functions which deal with the earth fault current.

NOTE: Good practice is to set this ratio before implementing the protection settings.
Example of PowerLogic P1 Relays for Standard or Sensitive Earth Fault
Protection
The PowerLogic P1 relays concerned are:
● PowerLogic P1F (0,05-12)Ion -•1• (standard earth fault protection)
● PowerLogic P1F (0,01-2)Ion - • • (sensitive earth fault protection)

These PowerLogic P1 relays can be connected to a dedicated earth CT (core

balance current transformer) or to the common point of the 3 phase CTs (residual
current).

The parameter to be set is:

● Earth CT ratio (GLOBAL SETTINGS/CT RATIO E/Gnd CT Primary and E/Gnd
CT Sec screens)

If connected to the common point of the 3 phase CTs, this parameter must be set to
the same value as the phase CT ratio.
Example of PowerLogic P1 Relays for Sensitive Earth Fault Protection
The PowerLogic P1 relays concerned are PowerLogic P1F – 2 (sensitive earth fault
protection). This type of PowerLogic P1 is designed to be connected to a core
balance current transformer (e.g. CSH120).

• For CSH core balance current transformer (CT ratio 470A / 1A) measuring
range for primary side is from 4,7A to 940A.

• For CSH core balance current transformer is recommended to use sensitive

earth fault (0.01-2)Ion measuring range. Very sensitive range compatible
with CSH please contact us to availability.

• For another core balance current transformer (CT ratio 100A / 1A)
measuring range for primary side is from 1A to 200A.

Settings

Settings for the primary and secondary current can be found in

GLOBALSETTINGS/ CT RATIO menu:

Available Setting Authorized Values Default Setting

E/Gnd CT Primary … kA (step: 1.0) 1A
E/Gnd CT Sec … (step ) 1A

112 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Functions and Parameters

Network Frequency
Applicable to PowerLogic P1F Series

L N B A E E+

Description

The network frequency can be accessed in the protection menu and must always be
indicated (50 or 60 Hz) at the time of commissioning. It is used by all PowerLogic
P1F functions which deal with the phase current and the earth fault current.

PowerLogic P1F uses this parameter to adapt operation of the measurement and
protection algorithms to the network frequency. If the setting is implemented
incorrectly, the accuracy of the metering and protection functions will be seriously
affected.

Settings

Settings for the network frequency selection can be found in GLOBALSETTINGS/

LOC/Nominal Frequency menu:

Available Setting Authorized Values Default Setting

Nominal Frequency 50 or 60 Hz (step: N/A) 50 Hz

113 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Functions and Parameters Protection Relay

Phase Overcurrent (ANSI 50-51)

Applicable to PowerLogic P1F Series

L N B A E E+

Description

The overcurrent protection included in the PowerLogic P1F relays provides three-
stage, non-directional overcurrent protection with independent time-delay
characteristics. All overcurrent settings apply to all three phases but are independent
for each of the three stages.

Each protection stage can be selected to Trip the CB or to issue a signal (Alarm)
only.

If an overcurrent protection stage (I>?, I>>? Or I>>>? Menu) is set to Trip, Trip-
Inrush Bl (applicable for model A, E, E+), Trip-Latch (A, E, E+), Trip-Phase A
(A, E, E+), Trip-Phase B (A, E, E+) or Trip-Phase C (A, E, E+) it means that stage
is linked to the Protect.Trip and Prot.Trip pulse functions (see Setting a LED
indicators and Setting a Relay Output in chapter Use).

If an overcurrent protection stage (I>?, I>>? Or I>>>? Menu) is set to Alarm, it

means that that stage is linked to the Alarm function (see Setting a LED indicators
and Setting a Relay Output in chapter Use).
If Trip-Inrush Bl is selected, the overcurrent stage is blocked via the Inrush
Blocking function (refer to Inrush Blocking section).

If Trip-Latch is selected, the overcurrent stage will remain high after a trip, until it is
reset via a binary input, the HMI or a remote RESET command.

If Trip-Phase A is selected, the overcurrent stage is compared with the current in

phase A only (tripping is based on phase A measurement only; the rest phases: B
and C are ignored).

If Trip-Phase B is selected, the overcurrent stage is compared with the current in

phase B only (tripping is based on phase B measurement only, the rest phases: A
and C are ignored).

If Trip-Phase C is selected, the overcurrent stage is compared with the current in

phase C only (tripping is based on phase C measurement only, the rest phases: A
and B are ignored).

Phase overcurrent protection in PowerLogic P1 series is used to detect overcurrents

due to phase-to-phase faults. It uses the measurements of the fundamental
component of the currents produced by 2 or 3 phase CTs, with 1 A or 5 A secondary
rating.

3 independent stages (I>, I>> and I>>>) can be set to offer optimal discrimination:
● The first two stages (I> and I>>) have either a definite time (DMT) or inverse
definite minimum time (IDMT) setting with different types of standardized curve
(IEC, IEEE, RI).
● The third stage (I>>>) only has a definite time (DMT) setting. The minimum
setting can be used to obtain instantaneous operation (ANSI 50 function).

These stages can be used:

● In all cases, to detect phase-to-phase ground faults with 1 or 2 stages
depending on the protection plan adopted (see example 1).

114 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Functions and Parameters

● In the case of a protection located at the connection point to the distributor

network, to provide current limiting and thus comply with the maximum
subscribed demand defined in the contract for connection to the distributor
network. If the distributor imposes this limiting, this can be performed by the first
I> stage with an IDMT curve (see example 2).

Example 1: Example of typical application: Protection curve with a first IDMT I>
stage and a second DMT I>> stage

Figure 1. Tripping curve for example 1

I I

non tripping one

tripping one

Example 2: Example of application with current limiting:

● Limiting curve with a first IDMT I> stage to limit the current to the subscribed
demand defined in the contract for connection to the distributor network
● Protection curve against phase-to-phase faults with the second IDMT I>> stage
and the third DMT I>>> stage

Figure 2. Tripping curve for example 2

I I I

non tripping one

tripping one

Additional Functions

Reset IDMT Characteristic (IEEE/US/IEC)

The first two stages of the overcurrent protection in the PowerLogic P1F relays are
provided with a timer hold facility, which may either be set to zero or to a definite
time value. Setting of the timer to zero means that the overcurrent timer for that
stage will reset instantaneously once the current falls below 95% of the current
setting. Setting of the hold timer to a value other than zero, delays the resetting of

115 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Functions and Parameters Protection Relay

the protection element timers for this period. When the reset time of the overcurrent
relay is instantaneous, the relay will be repeatedly reset and not be able to trip until
the fault becomes permanent. By using the Timer Hold facility the relay will integrate
the fault current pulses, thereby reducing fault clearance time.

The timer hold facility can be found for the first and second overcurrent stages as
settings DMT tReset I> (and RTD/RTMS Reset I>) and DMT tReset I>> (and
RTD/RTMS Reset I>>), respectively.

The IEEE/US/IEC curves may have an inverse time reset characteristic (I> (I>>)
Reset Delay Type 1: IDMT setting) or instantaneous reset (I> (I>>) Reset Delay
Type 0: DMT setting). If IDMT reset is selected (I> (I>>) Reset Delay Type 1: IDMT
setting) then the following menu will be available: Ι> (I>>) RTD/RTMS RESET.

For more details and equations that can be used to calculate the inverse reset time
for IEEE/US/IEC curves refer to: Overcurrent Protection Tripping Curves, page 129.

Cold Load Pick-up

This feature allows selected settings of PowerLogic P1F relays to be changed to

react to temporary overload conditions that may occur during cold starts. This
condition may happen by switching on large heating loads after a sufficient cooling
period, or loads that draw high initial starting currents.

When a feeder is energized, the current levels that flow for a period of time following
energizing may differ greatly from the normal load levels. Consequently, overcurrent
settings that have been applied to give short circuit protection may not be suitable
during this period.

This function acts upon the following protection functions:

● Phase overcurrent (I>, I>> and I>>> stages (L, N, B, A, E, E+))
● Earth fault (IN_1>, and IN_2> stages (L, N, B, A, E, E+))
● Earth fault (IN_3 stage (E, E+))
● Broken Conductor I2/I1 element (E, E+)
● Thermal Overload Itherm setting (N, B, A, E, E+)
● Negative sequence overcurrent (E, E+)

For more information on Cold Load Pick-up refer to: Cold Load Pick-up, page 139.

SOTF: Switch On To Fault (B, A, E, E+)

In some feeder applications, fast tripping may be required if a fault is still present on
the feeder after the reclosure of the circuit breaker (Close on to fault).

In the case of a CB being manually closed, a switch on to an existing fault may

occur. This situation is particularly critical because the overcurrent protection
element would not clear the fault until the set time-delay has elapsed. It is then
desirable to clear the fault as fast as possible.
Enabling and setting the SOTF (Switch On To Fault) function can be done under the
SETTING GROUP x/PROTECTION Gx/SOTF? Submenu.

Crossing the SOTF Threshold will initiate the SOTF function. The tSOTF time-delay
will then be started. If the SOTF element is set to Trip, Trip-Inrush Bl (A, E, E+) or
Trip-Latch (A, E, E+), it means that it is linked to the Protect. Trip and Prot. Trip
pulse functions (see Setting a LED indicators and Setting a Relay Output in chapter
Use).

If the SOTF element is set to Alarm, it means that it is linked to the Alarm function
(see Setting a LED indicators and Setting a Relay Output in chapter Use).

116 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Functions and Parameters

If Trip-Inrush Bl (A, E, E+) is selected, the SOTF element is blocked via the Inrush
Blocking function (refer to Inrush Blocking section, page 141).

If Trip-Latch (A, E, E+) is selected, the SOTF element will remain high after a trip,
until it is reset

For more information on SOTF refer to Switch-On-To-Fault, page 181.

Inrush Blocking (A, E, E+)

The Inrush Blocking function measures the ratio of second to fundamental harmonic
currents. It can be used as a “bloc ing logic” of I>, I>>, I>>>, IN_1, IN_2, (A, E, E+)
IN_3 (E, E+), I2> (E, E+), SOTF (A, E, E+), Broken Cond (E, E+), CB Fail (A, E,
E+), and AUXn (A, E, E+) in cases where the 2nd harmonic ratio is higher than the
settable threshold. Indeed, inrush blocking functions will reset the selected
protection function starts.

Blocked by the second harmonic ratio of a protection element is set in the main
setting cell for that element (for example: I>? 3: Trip-Inrush Bl). Each protection
element set to 3: Trip-Inrush Bl will be blocked by the Inrush current function.

The minimum duration of an overcurrent threshold inhibition (tReset) can be also set
(GLOBAL SETTINGS/INRUSH BLOCKING/Inrush Reset Time). This value
depends on the transformer power transient inrush duration: between 0.1 second
(for a 100 kVA transformer) to 1.0 second (for a large unit). It is used to avoid any
maloperation during a fixed time period in case of too sensitive a setting.

Logic Selectivity (E, E+)

In the case of Logic Selectivity (Sel), the start contacts are used to raise the time-
delays of upstream relays, instead of blocking them. This provides an alternative
approach to achieving non-cascade types of overcurrent scheme. This may be more
familiar to some utilities than the blocked overcurrent arrangement. The Logic
Selectivity function provides the ability to temporarily increase the time-delay
settings of the second and third stages of phase overcurrent and measured earth
fault protection elements.

Two independent Logic Selectivity functions are available: Sel1 and/or Sel2.

This logic is initiated by energization of the appropriate binary input assigned to Sel1
(Sel2).

To allow time for a start contact to initiate a change of setting, the time settings of
the second and third stages should include a nominal delay.

For more information see Logic Selectivity, page 302.

Logic Discrimination (B, A, E, E+)

Each stage of the phase protection element can be blocked via an appropriately
configured binary input. Binary inputs can be assigned to various functions (for the
list of available functions refer to Connecting Binary Inputs and Outputs Relays,
page 37). Such a configured input can be used by the blocking logic function or by a
protection element disabling function (Auto-reclose (E, E+), CB Fail or AUX (B, A, E,
E+)).

For more information see Logic Discrimination, page 152.

117 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Functions and Parameters Protection Relay

Block Diagram

Phase Overcurrent protection logic diagram is shown below:

Figure 3. Operating principles diagram for phase overcurrent protection
Inrush detection (I2h/I1h) I>? 2: Alarm
& Alarm

I>? 3: Trip-Inrush Bl &

Alarm Recorder

Block.tI> Input T TIMER 0

& tI> Time Delay

[79] Inhib.Trip tI>
DMT/IDMT
with DMT or IDMT
I>? 0: disabled RESET tI>
SETTING GROUP 1(2)
Start I>A Threshold A /PROTECTION/
& [50/51N] E/GND FAULT G1

Start I>B Threshold &

& B OR
Start I>C Threshold
&
I>? 5: Trip-Phase A

I>? 6: Trip-Phase B
& Start I>
I>? 7: Trip-Phase C C
CBF: Block I> INSTANTENOUS
& Recorder

RESET LEDs OR Protect. Trip

&
Protect. Trip pulse
I>? 4: Trip-Latch &
Fault Recorder
I>? 1: Trip OR
I>? 3: Trip-Inrush Bl

PJ154ENd

Additional Functions

By default, this function is off.

Settings

Phase O/C [50/51]

The overcurrent protection included in the PowerLogic P1F relay provides non-
directional three-phase overcurrent protection with independent time-delay
characteristics. All overcurrent settings apply to all of the three phases but are
independent for each of the three stages.

The first two overcurrent stages have time-delayed characteristics which are
selectable between inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) and definite time (DMT).
The third stage has definite time characteristics (DMT) only.

Setting the I> and I>> stages Authorized Values Default Setting
I>? Disabled
I>>? Trip,
Alarm
Trip-Inrush Bl (A, E, E+)
Disabled
Trip-Latch (A, E, E+)
Trip-Phase A (A, E, E+)
Trip-Phase B (A, E, E+)
Trip-Phase C (A, E, E+)
2> Threshold . … . In (step: 0.01 In)
1.2 In
I>> Threshold 1.4 In
Delay Type DMT
For more information on tripping curves and IEC SI
the reset time, refer to Overcurrent IEC VI
Protection Tripping Curves, page 129. IEC EI
LTI IEC SI
STI
RC
RI
IEEE MI

118 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Functions and Parameters

IEEE VI
IEEE EI
US CO2-P20
US CO8
RXIDG
BNP EDF
US CO2-P40
US CO5
US CO6
US CO7
US CO9
US CO11
HV_Fuse
tI>
. … s (step . s) 1s
tI>>
2> TMS
. … .5 s (step: 0.01 s) 1s
I>> TMS
2> Time Dial . … s (step . s) 1s
I>> Time Dial
Reset Delay Type I> DMT
DMT
Reset Delay Type I>> IDMT
DMT tReset I>
0.0… s (step . s) 0s
DMT tReset I>>
RTD/RTMS Reset I>
0.0… 00 (step: 0.01) 0
RTD/RTMS Reset I>>

Setting the I>>> stage Authorized Values Default Setting

I>>>? Disabled
Trip,
Alarm
Trip-Inrush Bl (A, E, E+)
Disabled
Trip-Latch (A, E, E+)
Trip-Phase A (A, E, E+)
Trip-Phase B (A, E, E+)
Trip-Phase C (A, E, E+)
I>>> Threshold … . In (step . In) 4.0 In
tI>>> . … s (step . s) 0s

IDMT tripping can be blocked if any DMT stage is started (L, N, A, B, E, E+),
settings: IDMT interlock by DMT (GLOBAL SETTINGS/O/C ADVANCED column).
This setting is common for E/Gnd Fault [50N/51N] and Phase O/C [50/51]:

Setting the overcurrent stages Authorized Values Default Setting

IDMT interlock by DMT No
No
Yes

119 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Functions and Parameters Protection Relay

Earth Fault Protection (ANSI 50N-51N)

Applicable to PowerLogic P1F Series

L N B A E E+*
*available directional (67N) and/or admittance (21YN) earth fault protection

Description

Earth fault protection is used to detect overcurrents due to phase-to-earth faults.

It uses the measurement of the earth fault current fundamental component
according to several connection diagrams (see below).

This protection can be used in various application scenarios:

● Incomer/feeder protection
● Neutral point protection

Two (L, N, B, A) or three (E, E+) independent stages (IN_1, IN_2, IN_3) can be set
to offer optimum discrimination:
● The IN_1 stage has either a definite time (DMT) or inverse definite minimum
time (IDMT) setting with different types of standardized curve (IEC, IEEE,
RI).
● The IN_2 stage only has a definite time (DMT) setting. The minimum setting
can be used to obtain instantaneous operation (ANSI 50N function).
● The IN_3 stage only has a definite time (DMT) setting. The minimum setting
can be used to obtain instantaneous operation (ANSI 50N function). Third
IN_3 stage is applicable for models E and E+ only.

If an earth fault stage (IN_1 stage?, IN_2 stage? Or IN_3 stage? (E, E+) menu) is
set to Trip, Trip-Inrush Bl (A, E, E+) or Trip-Latch (A, E, E+), Incos Trip (E+),
Insin Trip (E+), GN Trip (E+), BN Trip (E+), YN Trip (E+), it means that stage is
linked to the Protect. Trip and Prot. Trip pulse functions (see LED configuration,
page 308).

If an earth fault stage (IN_1 stage?, IN_2 stage? Or IN_3 stage? (E, E+) menu) is
set to Alarm, Incos Alarm (E+), Insin Alarm (E+), GN Alarm (E+), BN Alarm (E+),
YN Alarm (E+), it means that stage is linked to the Alarm function (see LED
configuration, page 308).

If an earth fault stage (IN_1 stage? Or IN_2 stage? Menu) in E+ model is set to
Incos Trip (E+), Incos Alarm (E+), Insin Trip (E+), Insin Alarm (E+), GN Trip
(E+), GN Alarm (E+), BN Trip (E+), BN Alarm (E+), YN Trip (E+), YN Alarm (E+),
it means that stage operate depends on fault direction.

If Trip-Inrush Bl (A, E, E+) is selected, the earth fault stage is blocked via the
Inrush Blocking function (refer to Inrush Blocking, page 141).

If Trip-Latch (A, E, E+) is selected, the earth fault stage will remain after a trip, until
it is reset via a binary input, the HMI or a remote RESET command.

Operation of the IN_1, IN_2 and IN_3 stages can be associated with the Earth Fault
Cold Load Pick-Up (N, B, A, E, E+) and Inrush Blocking (A, E, E+) function (see
page 141), which is used to avoid nuisance tripping of the protection when the
installation is energized. In particular, the CLPU Io function incorporates the option
of activating restraint based on the detection of a second harmonic component in the
phase currents.

120 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Functions and Parameters

Activation of this restraint is recommended on transformer applications, if the earth

fault current measurement is based on the sum of the 3 phase CTs. In this case, the
aperiodic component of the transformer inrush currents can cause transient
saturation of the phase CTs and result in incorrect earth fault current measurement
likely to result in nuisance tripping of the earth fault protection. The CLPU and inrush
restraint can be used to detect this incorrect residual current and inhibit the earth
fault stages during the transient currents linked to energizing.

Example: Curve for IDMT type IN_1 stage and DMT type IN_2 stage

Figure 4. Tripping curve for IN_1 and IN_2 stages for earth fault protection

I I

non tripping one

tripping one

Sensitivity and Principle of Connection Diagrams

Depending on the sensitivity level required, two types of PowerLogic P1F relay are
available. Each type authorizes one or more connection diagrams to measure the
earth fault current.

Standard earth fault protection – PowerLogic P1F (0,05-12)Ion.

There are two possible connection diagrams:

Diagram 1 Diagram 2
Earth fault current measurement using the Current measurement from an earth CT with 1 A
common point of the 3 phase CTs, with 1 A or 5 or 5 A secondary rating.
A secondary rating.
The connection is as follows: The connection is as follows:

B B

I I

IB IB

I I

Io Io

This version allows a minimum protection setting of 5% of the phase CT rating

(diagram1) or the earth CT rating (diagram2).

121 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Functions and Parameters Protection Relay

Sensitive earth fault protection – PowerLogic P1F (0,01-2)Ion

The connection diagrams are the same as the standard version. However, the
minimum protection setting is divided by 2 compared with the standard version. It is
1% of CT rating.

However, if the protection stage needs to be set with low-level current values, use of
an core balance CT is strongly recommended (diagram 2). In the case of diagram 1,
precision errors in the 3 phase CTs can result in incorrect earth fault current
measurement. For stage below 5% CT In, this inaccuracy could lead to nuisance
tripping of the protection.

Additional Functions

PowerLogic P1F integrates functions that complement earth fault protection:

Reset time

With an IDMT setting, the stage parameters are set in order to activate an IDMT
reset time. This enables coordination with electromechanical relays. By default, the
reset time is not active. Refer to Reset IDMT Characteristic, page137.

Cold load pick-up for earth fault (CLPU) (N, B, A, E, E+)

Operation of the IN_1, IN_2 and IN_3 stages can be associated with the CLPU
function, which is used to avoid nuisance tripping of the protection when the
installation is energized. By default, the CLPU function is not active. Refer to Cold
Load Pick-up and Inrush Blocking, page 139 and 141 respectively.

Logic Selectivity (E, E+)

In the case of Logic Selectivity, the start contacts are used to raise the time-delays
of upstream relays, instead of blocking them. This provides an alternative approach
to achieving non-cascade types of overcurrent scheme. This may be more familiar to
some utilities than the blocked overcurrent arrangement. The Logic Selectivity
function provides the ability to temporarily increase the time-delay settings of the
second and third stages of phase overcurrent and measured earth fault protection
elements.

Two independent Logic Selectivity functions are available: Sel1 and/or Sel2.
This logic is initiated by energization of the appropriate binary input assigned to Sel1
(Sel2).

To allow time for a start contact to initiate a change of setting, the time settings of
the second and third stages should include a nominal delay.

For more information see Logic Selectivity, page 302.

Logic discrimination
PowerLogic P1F can be integrated in the logic discrimination system. This system
can be used when the installation requires the fault to be cleared within a short time.
It is used to bypass the time interval between the protection stages, imposed by time
discrimination. By default, on the PowerLogic P1F logic discrimination is not
assigned, therefore to use is has to be configured. Refer to Logic Discrimination
(ANSI 68), page 152.

122 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Functions and Parameters

Block Diagram

Earth Fault protection logic diagram is shown below:

Figure 5. Operating principles diagram for earth fault protection
Inrush detection (I2h/I1h)
&
IN_1 stage ?
3: Trip-Inrush Bl IN_1 stage? 2: Alarm Alarm

Block.tIN_1 Input &

& T TIMER 0 Alarm Recorder

tIN_1 Time Delay

[79] Inhib.Trip tIN_1 DMT/IDMT
with DMT or IDMT tIN_1
RESET
SETTING GROUP 1(2)
/PROTECTION/
IN_1 stage? 0: disabled [50/51N] E/GND FAULT G1
&
Start IN_1 Threshold
&
Start IN_1
CBF: Block IN>

INSTANTENOUS
& Recorder

RESET LEDs OR Protect. Trip

&
Protect. Trip pulse
IN_1 stage? 4: Trip-Latch &
Fault Recorder
IN_1 stage? 1: Trip OR
IN_1 stage? 3: Trip-Inrush Bl

P0922ENb

Earth Fault protection logic diagrams for IN_1, IN_2 and IN_3 are the same but
without the IDMT characteristics for IN_2 and IN_3.

Additional Functions

By default, this function is off.

Settings

The earth fault element operates from earth fault current that is measured directly
from the network; either by means of a separate CT located in a power system earth
connection or via a residual connection of the three line CTs.

All overcurrent settings are independent for each of the two stages (Model E, E+:
three stages).

The first stage of e/f non-directional overcurrent protection has time-delayed

characteristics which are selectable between inverse definite minimum time (IDMT)
and definite time (DMT). The second stage and the third (E, E+) have definite time
characteristics only.

123 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Functions and Parameters Protection Relay

Setting IN_1, IN_2, IN_3 stages Authorized Values Default Setting

(E, E+)
IN_1 Stage? Disabled
Trip
Alarm
Trip-Inrush Bl (A, E, E+)
Trip-Latch (A, E, E+)
Incos Trip (E+)
Incos Alarm (E+)
Insin Trip (E+) Disabled
Insin Alarm (E+)
GN Trip (E+)
GN Alarm (E+)
BN Trip (E+)
BN Alarm (E+)
YN Trip (E+)
YN Alarm (E+)
IN_1 Threshold . … Ien (step . 01 Ien)
0.2 Ien
Standard version
. … Ien (step . Ien)
0.2 Ien
Sensitive version
Delay Type IN_1 DMT
For more information on tripping curves and IEC SI
the reset time, refer to Earth Fault Protection IEC VI
Tripping Curves, page 129. IEC EI
UK LTI
UK STI
UK RC
RI
IEEE MI
IEEE VI
IEEE EI
IEC SI
US CO2-P20
US CO8
RXIDG
BNP EDF
US CO2-P40
US CO5
US CO6
US CO7
US CO9
US CO11
HV_Fuse
tIN_1 . … s (step . s) 1s
IN_1 TMS . … .5 s (step: 0.01 s) 1s
IN_1 Time Dial . … 100 s (step: 0.01 s) 1s
Reset Delay Type IN_1 DMT
DMT
IDMT
RTD/RTMS Reset IN_1 0.0… 00 (step: 0.01) 0.02
DMT tReset IN_1 0.0… 600 s (step: 0.01 s) 0s
IN_2 stage? Disabled
Trip
Alarm
Trip-Inrush Bl (A, E, E+)
Trip-Latch (A, E, E+)
Incos Trip (E+)
Incos Alarm (E+)
Insin Trip (E+) Disabled
Insin Alarm (E+)
GN Trip (E+)
GN Alarm (E+)
BN Trip (E+)
BN Alarm (E+)
YN Trip (E+)
YN Alarm (E+)
IN_2 Threshold 0.3… Ien (step . 01 Ien)
0.4 Ien
Standard version
0.05… Ien (step . Ien)
0.4 Ien
Sensitive version
tIN_2 . … s (step . s) 0.0 s
IN_3 stage? (E, E+) Disabled
Trip
Disabled
Alarm
Trip-Inrush Bl (E, E+)
Trip-Latch (E, E+)
IN_3 Threshold (E, E+) 0.3… Ien (step . 01 Ien)
0.4 Ien
Standard version

124 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Functions and Parameters

Setting IN_1, IN_2, IN_3 stages Authorized Values Default Setting

(E, E+)
0.05… Ien (step: 0.001 Ien)
0.4 Ien
Sensitive version
tIN_3 (E, E+) … s (step . s) 0s

Advanced earth fault settings (E+) concerning directional and admittance protections
can be found in following menu column: GLOBAL SETTINGS/E/F ADVANCED:

Setting the earth fault stages Authorized Values Default Setting

VN Threshold . … 90.0 V (step: 0.1 V) 5.0 V
G1 IN_1 direct. Line
Bus Line
no direction
G1 IN_2 direct. Line
Bus Line
no direction
G2 IN_1 direct. Line
Bus Line
no direction
G2 IN_2 direct. Line
Bus Line
no direction
Incos, Insin Sector Angle …  (step 1 ) 90 

IDMT tripping can be blocked if any DMT stage is started (L, N, B, A, E, E+),
settings: IDMT interlock by DMT (GLOBAL SETTINGS/O/C ADVANCED column).
This setting is common for E/Gnd Fault [50N/51N] and Phase O/C [50/51]:

Setting the earth fault stages Authorized Values Default Setting

IDMT interlock by DMT No
No
Yes

Settings for Using the Function

Compulsory settings in the GLOBAL SETTINGS menu:
● CT ratio setting (E/Gnd CT Primary and E/Gnd CT Sec screens). If the
measurement is taken on the common point of the 3 phase CTs, this setting is
the same as the phase CT ratio.
● IN_1 stage setting (IN_1 Threshold menu cell)
● IN_2 stage setting (IN_2 Threshold menu cell)
● IN_3 stage setting (IN_3 Threshold menu cell)
● Network frequency selection (Nominal Frequency menu cell)

Additional settings in the PARAMETERS menu:

● Activation of the reset time (Reset delay time, DMT tReset and IDMT tReset
screens). Those parameters are dedicated to first stage IN_1 only.
● Cold Load Pick-Up setting (COLD LOAD PU Gx menu cell)

Additional Information (E+)

Directional and admittance earth fault protection
Active/reactive neutral current component criterion to earth fault detection
For the selective detection of earth faults, the measurement of zero sequence of
power flow direction is used. This criterion based on the set value of zero
component of current Io, zero component of voltage Vo and angle o between them.

Active/reactive neutral current component criteria allow selective detection of earth

faults in networks where neutral point is not directly grounded. In compensated
networks or grounded by resistor the active part of zero component of current is
used, while in isolated networks reactive part of zero components of current.
Therefore, the criterion signals are as follows:

125 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Functions and Parameters Protection Relay

• In compensated network:
Incos(o)>Is
• In isolated network:
Insin(o)>Is
where:
Is – threshold of earth fault protection (in P1F – IN_1 and IN_2)
On the figures 1 and 2 bellow are presented tripping and inhibit area for criteria:
1. Incos
a) operation in line direction, b) operation in bus direction.
2. Insin
2) operation in line direction, b) operation in bus direction.
The above cases were considered for the maximum characteristic angle 90
(GLOBAL SETTINGS/E/F ADVANCED/Incos, Insin Sector Angle). Characteristic
angle can be set from 10 to 90 with step 1.

Figure 6. Operation principle for Iocos earth fault protection

a) IN_1 threshold b) IN_1 threshold

Inhibit Inhibit
Tripping Tripping zone
area
area area

-VN -VN
Io Io

Bus Line Bus Line

direction direction direction direction

Figure 7. Operation principle of Iosin earth fault protection

a) b)
Tripping Inhibit
Line Line
area area
direction direction

Io Io
IN_1 threshold IN_1 threshold
-VN -VN

Inhibit Bus Bus

area direction Tripping direction
area

Conductance criterion GN
In order to help to ensure selective operation of earth fault protection in
compensated networks, is recommended to use conductance criterion GN.
Conductance criterion based on zero sequence (GN) of conductance, which is
determined following equation:
3𝐼𝑜
𝐺𝑁 = cos(𝜑𝑜) ∗ 1000
3𝑉𝑜

126 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Functions and Parameters

Conditions to operate conductance protections are following:

𝐺𝑁 ≥ 𝐺𝑠
and:
𝑉𝑜 ≥ 𝑉𝑜 𝑠𝑒𝑡 𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑒
where:
Gs – threshold of conductance protection (in P1F – IN_1 and IN_2, if GN Trip or GN
Alarm are selected),
Vo set value – (GLOBAL SETTINGS/E/F ADVANCED/VN Threshold) should be
selected so that the threshold could be left out the neutral voltage of the network
capacitive asymmetry.

Operation mode of the conductance protection can be directional or non-directional.

On the figure (Figure 8. Operation principle of GN earth fault protection) below are
presented tripping and inhibit area for conductance criterion: a) for non-directional
set, b) for directional set.

Figure 8. Operation principle of GN earth fault protection

a) b)
IN_1 threshold IN_1 threshold IN_1 threshold
jBN jBN

Tripping Tripping Inhibit Tripping

area area area area

Inhibit GN GN
area

Tripping Tripping Inhibit Tripping

Overcurrent Protection Tripping Curves

Applicable to PowerLogic P1F Series

L N B A E E+

Introduction

Phase, earth fault and negative sequence overcurrent protection can be delayed
using the following types of tripping curve:

• Definite time (DT): I>, I>>, I>>>, Io> and Io>>, Is2> stages

• IDMT: I>, I>>, Io> and Is2> stages only

In the case of standardized IDMT curves (IEC and IEEE type), a reset time can be
activated. This reset time enables PowerLogic P1F coordination with
electromechanical relays, placed upstream.

Definite Time (DT) Curve

In definite time (DT) protection functions, the tripping time is constant. The time
delay is initialized as soon as the operating threshold Is is passed.

Definite time protection principle

Figure 11. DT tripping curve

IDMT Curve

In IDMT protection functions, the tripping time depends on the measured value
(phase, earth fault or negative sequence current).

Operation is represented by characteristic curves t = f(I/Is), t = f(Io/Is) or t = f(Is2/Is)

(where Is is the setting threshold), which look like this:

129 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Functions and Parameters Protection Relay

Figure 12. IDMT tripping curve

The curve is defined by:

• Its type (IEC, IEEE, inverse, very inverse, extremely inverse, etc.)
• Its current setting Is, which corresponds to the vertical asymptote of the
curve
• Its time delay setting, which corresponds to a multiplying factor:
• TMS (Time Multiplying Setting) for IEC and RI curves
• TD (Time Dial) for IEEE curves

When a high current is being measured, the following rules apply:

• When the value being monitored is more than 20 times the set point, the
maximum tripping time corresponds to a value of 20 times the set point.

Equation

Curves are defined by the following equation:

 
 
 k
• t = T +c
  I α 
   −P 
  Is  
where:
t - Operating time in [s]
k, P, c,  - Constants
Is - Current threshold setting [A]
I - Measured current in [A]
T - TMS – Time multiplier setting for IEC curves (setting range 0.02 – 1.5)
- TD – Time dial setting for IEEE and BNP (EDF) curves (setting range
0.02 – 100)
- Time coefficient for RI curve (setting range 0.1 – 10)
- Time coefficient for HV_Fuse curve (setting range 0.5 – 2)

130 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Functions and Parameters

Type of Curve
according to IEC 60255-151 Standard k c  P
std definition
IEC Standard Inverse Time
IEC/A 0.14 0 0.02 1
(SI)
IEC Very Inverse Time (VI) IEC/B 13.5 0 1 1
IEC Extremely Inverse Time
IEC/C 80 0 2 1
(EI)
IEC Long Time Inverse (LTI) IEC 120 0 1 1
FR Short Time Inverse (STI) FR 0.05 0 0.04 1
UK Rectifier (Rect) UK 45900 0 5.6 1
IEEE Moderately Inverse IEEE
0.0515 0.114 0.02 1
Time (MI) (IEC/D)
IEEE
IEEE Very Inverse Time (VI) 19.61 0.491 2 1
(IEC/E)
IEEE Extremely Inverse Time IEEE
28.2 0.1217 2 1
(EI) (IEC/F)
US Short Time Inverse
US 0.02394 0.01694 0.02 1
(CO2 P20)
US Short Time Inverse
US 0.16758 0.11858 0.02 1
(CO2 P40)
US Long Time (CO5) US 4.842 1.967 1.1 1
US Definite Minimum Time
US 0.3164 0.1934 1.4 1
(CO6)
US Moderately Inverse Time
US 0.0094 0.0366 0.02 1
(CO7)
US Time Inverse (CO8) US 5.95 0.18 2 1
US Very Inverse Time (CO9) US 4.120 0.0958 2 1
US Extreme Inverse Time
US 5.570 0.028 2 1
(CO11)
BNP (EDF) EDF 1000 0.655 2 1
RI -4.2373 0 -1 1.43644
HV_Fuse 80 0 3 1
A time multiplier setting TMS is used to adjust the operating time of IEC & UK IDMT
curves.

A time multiplier setting TD is used to adjust the operating time of IEEE or US IDMT
curves.
Note:
1. For (CO2 P20), TD is defined like in MiCOM P20 series

2. For (CO2 P40), TD is defined like in MiCOM P40 series

131 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Functions and Parameters Protection Relay

RXIDG Curves and RI Curves

The operate delays of RI and RXIDG depend on the measured value and other
parameters according to following equations.

These equations can only be used to draw graphs or when the measured value l is
constant during the fault.

Modified versions are implemented in the relay for real-time usage.

The RXIDG curves available follow the formula:

 
 1 
t = 5.8 − 1.35  ln  
  k  Is  
 I 
 
Where:
t = tripping time
k = coefficient (from 0.3 to 1, by steps of 0.01), k = TMS/TD
Is = value of the programmed threshold (Pick-up value)
I = value of measured current

The RI curves available follow the formula:

k
𝑡=
ls
0.339 − 0.236 ∙
𝑙

which is same as
−4,237
𝑡 = TD ∙
𝑙 −1
( ) − 1,436
ls
Where:
t = tripping time
k = coefficient (from 0.02 to 10, by steps of 0.01), k = TMS/TD
Is = value of the programmed threshold (Pick-up value)

I = value of measured current

132 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Functions and Parameters

Standard Inverse IEC Very Inverse IEC

100 100

Time [s]
Time [s]
A A
1
B B
C
C
1
D
0.1
D

0.1
E 0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Multiples of pickup setting: I/Is Multiples of pickup setting: I/Is

E: TMS=0.05 D: TMS=0.2 C: TMS=0.5 E: TMS=0.05 D: TMS=0.2 C: TMS=0.5

B: TMS=1 A: TMS=2 B: TMS=1 A: TMS=2

Extremely Inverse IEC RI Inverse Time

100 100

A
Time [s]

Time [s]

1
B

A C
1
B
0.1 C D

E
0.01 E 0.1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Multiples of pickup setting: I/Is Multiples of pickup setting: I/Is
E: TMS=0.05 D: TMS=0.2 C: TMS=0.5 E: TMS=0.05 D: TMS=0.2 C: TMS=0.5
B: TMS=1 A: TMS=2 B: TMS=1 A: TMS=2

133 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Functions and Parameters Protection Relay

Long Time Inverse UK Short Time Inverse

100
1000

10
100

Time [s]
Time [s]
A 1
10 A
B
B
C
C
D 0.1
1 D

E
E
0.01
0.1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Multiples of pickup setting: I/Is Multiples of pickup setting: I/Is

E: TMS=0.05 D: TMS=0.2 C: TMS=0.5 E: TMS=0.05 D: TMS=0.2 C: TMS=0.5
B: TMS=1 A: TMS=2
B: TMS=1 A: TMS=2

Rectifier Moderately Inverse IEEE

100
100

10
10

A
Time [s]
Time [s]

1 B
1

D
0.1
0.1

E D C B A 0.01
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Multiples of pickup setting: I/Is
Multiples of pickup setting: I/Is
E: TMS=0.05 D: TMS=0.2 C: TMS=0.5 E: TD=0.05 D: TD=0.2 C: TD=0.5
B: TMS=1 A: TMS=2 B: TD=1 A: TD=2

134 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Functions and Parameters

Very Inverse IEEE Extremely Inverse IEEE

100
100

10
10

Time [s]

Time [s]
1 A
1
B
A
C
B
0.1 D 0.1 C

D
E

0.01 E
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314151617181920
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Multiples of pickup setting: I/Is
Multiples of pickup setting: I/Is
E: TD=0.05 D: TD=0.2 C: TD=0.5
E: TD=0.05 D: TD=0.2 C: TD=0.5 B: TD=1 A: TD=2
B: TD=1 A: TD=2

Short Time Inverse (CO2) US Inverse (CO8) US

100 100

A
Time [s]
Time [s]

1
B
A
C
B
1
0.1 C
D
D

E 0.01 E
0.1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Multiples of pickup setting: I/Is
Multiples of pickup setting: I/Is E: TD=0.05 D: TD=0.2 C: TD=0.5
E: TD=0.05 D: TD=0.2 C: TD=0.5 B: TD=1 A: TD=2
B: TD=1 A: TD=2

135 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Functions and Parameters Protection Relay

US Long Time (CO5) US Definite Minimum Time (CO6)

100 100

10
1

Time [s]
Time [s]
A A
B
B
0,1 C

1 C D

D 0,01 E

0,1 E
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112 1314 15 16171819 20
Multiples of pickup setting: I/Is Multiples of pickup setting: I/Is

E: TD=0.05 D: TD=0.2 C: TD=0.5 E: TD=0.05 D: TD=0.2 C: TD=0.5

B: TD=1 A: TD=2 B: TD=1 A: TD=2

US Moderately Inverse Time (CO7) US Very Inverse Time (CO9)

100 100

10 10

1 1
Time [s]
Time [s]

A A
B B
0,1 C 0,1 C
D D

0,01 E 0,01 E

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11121314 1516 17181920 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314151617181920

Multiples of pickup setting: I/Is Multiples of pickup setting: I/Is

E: TD=0.05 D: TD=0.2 C: TD=0.5 E: TD=0.05 D: TD=0.2 C: TD=0.5

B: TD=1 A: TD=2 B: TD=1 A: TD=2

136 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Functions and Parameters

US Extreme Inverse Time (CO11)

100

Time [s] 1

A
B
0.1 C

0.01 E

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112 131415 1617 1819 20

Multiples of pickup setting: I/Is

E: TD=0.05 D: TD=0.2 C: TD=0.5

B: TD=1 A: TD=2

Reset IDMT Characteristic

• For IEC/UK/FR standard curves:

 
 
 tr 
reset time = RTMS 
  I P 
 1−   
  Is  
• For IEEE/US standard curves:

 
 
tr
reset time = RTD   
  I P 
 1−   
  Is  
where:
tr, P - Constants
Is - Current threshold setting [A]
I - Measured current in [A]
RTD - Time dial setting for IEEE/US curves
RTMS - A time multiplier setting for IEC and HV_Fuse curves

137 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Functions and Parameters Protection Relay

Note:
To be in line with IEEE/US/IEC the RTMS (RTD) value should be equal to the TMS
(TD) value. The setting for RTMS or RTD is given to adjust the reset characteristic to
specific applications. Typically, RTMS = TMS and RTD = TD.

Type of Curve Standard tr P

IEC Standard Inverse Time (SI) IEC/A 12.1 2
IEC Very Inverse Time (VI) IEC/B 43.2 2
IEC Extremely Inverse Time (EI) IEC/C 80 2
IEC Long Time Inverse (LTI) IEC 0 0
FR Short Time Inverse (STI) FR 0 0
UK Rectifier (Rect) UK 0 0
IEEE Moderately Inverse Time (MI) IEEE (IEC/D) 4.9 2
IEEE Very Inverse Time (VI) IEEE (IEC/E) 21.6 2
IEEE Extremely Inverse Time (EI) IEEE (IEC/F) 29.1 2
Long Time (CO5) US 4.85 2
Definite Minimum Time (CO6) US 31 2
Moderately Inverse Time (CO7) US 0.94 2
Time Inverse (CO8) US 5.95 2
Very Inverse Time (CO9) US 4.12 2
Extreme Inverse Time (CO11) US 5.57 2
Short Time Inverse (CO2_P20) US 2.261 2
Short Time Inverse (CO2_P40) US 2.261 2
BNP EDF BNP EDF 0 0
RXIDG RXIDG 0 0
HV_Fuse 80 2
Note:
1. For CO2_P20, RTD is defined like in MiCOM P20 series
2. For CO2_P40, RTD is defined like in MiCOM P40 series
3. 0 in above table means resetting immediately

138 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Functions and Parameters

Cold Load Pick-up

Applicable to PowerLogic P1F Series

L N B A E E+

Description

The Cold Load Pick-up feature allows selected settings of P1F relays to be changed
to react to temporary overload conditions that may occur during cold starts. This
condition may happen by switching on large heating loads after a sufficient cooling
period, or loads that draw high initial starting currents.

These transient currents may occur due to:

● Simultaneous resetting of all the loads in an installation (air conditioning,
heating, etc.)
● The power transformer magnetizing currents
● The motor starting currents

In normal circumstances, the protection settings should be defined so as to avoid

tripping due to these transient currents. However, if this rule results in inadequate
sensitivity levels or delays that are too long, this function can be used to increase or
inhibit set points temporarily after energization. Use of this function maintains a good
level of protection sensitivity, regardless of the constraints affecting energization.

NOTE: In the rest of this manual, this function is referred to by abbreviation: CLPU.

Setting the function parameters allows the user to:

● Define the type of triggering CLPU (current or binary input criteria or both)
● Choose which stages it acts on: I>, I>>, I>>>, IN>, IN>>, IN>>>, Broken
Conductor, Itherm, I2>
● Define temporary pick-up level (in %) to increase (or decrease) set points.
● Define for how long the set point increase is applied after detection

Block Diagram
Figure 13. Operating principles diagram for cold load pick-up
I> setting value
MAX SETTING GROUP 1(2)
IA, IB, IC /PROTECTION/
[50/51] PHASE O/C G1(2) Start I> Threshold
& Reset

tCL
&
Pulse
Cold Load PU Input SETTING GROUP
& 1(2)
/PROTECTION/
Cold Load PU? 2:Input COLD LOAD PU G1
OR (I> setting value {see above}) x
Cold Load PU? 1:Cur.+Input Reset (Cold Load PU Level {SETTING GROUP
1(2)/PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PU G1(2))} &
T TIMER 0
& &
OR
10s
I< 5% In
Time Delay
I> 10% In
& P0930ENb

139 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Functions and Parameters Protection Relay

Operation

The Cold Load Pick-up (CLPU) logic raises the settings of selected stages for a set
duration (tCLPU). This allows the protection settings to be set closer to the load
profile. Cold load pick-up cannot restart until the end of tCLPU duration. The CLPU
logic provides stability, without compromising protection performance during starting.
The CLPU can be triggered by a digital logic Input Cold Load PU (Cold Load PU?
1: Cur+Input or Cold Load PU? 2: Input (A, E, E+)) which can be assigned to 52a
CB status or by current stages logic (Cold Load PU? 1: Cur+Input). If the CLPU
logic has to be triggered by current criteria only, Cold Load PU Input (A, E, E+)
function must not be configured to any digital input. Typically, Cold Load PU (A, E,
E+) binary Input is wired to 52A CB status. If this function is configured to selected
input, both criteria will work in parallel way.

Additional Functions

By default, this function is off.

Settings

Setting Authorized Values Default Setting

Cold Load PU? Disabled,
Input+Curr N/A
Input Only (A, E, E+)
Cold load PU Level … (step: 1 %)
Cold load PU tCL … s (step ms)
CLPU I> Yes or No
CLPU I>> Yes or No
CLPU I>>> Yes or No
CLPU IN_1 (IN>) Yes or No
CLPU IN_2 (IN>>) Yes or No
CLPU IN_3 (IN>>>) (E, E+) Yes or No
CLPU Brkn Cond (E, E+) Yes or No
CLPU Itherm (N, A, B, E, E+) Yes or No
CLPU I2> (E, E+) Yes or No

Additional Info

By default, this function is off.

140 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Functions and Parameters

Inrush blocking
Applicable to PowerLogic P1F

L N B A E E+

Description

In applications where the sensitivity of overcurrent thresholds need to be set below

the prospective peak inrush current, the inrush blocking function can be used to
block the overcurrent, earth fault and negative sequence overcurrent stages. During
transformer inrush conditions, the second harmonic component of the inrush current
may be as high as 70%. In practice, the second harmonic level may not be the same
for all phases during an inrush and therefore the relay will issue an Inrush Blocking
signal for any phase above the set threshold. A setting of 15% to 20% for the Inrush
harmonic 2 ratio can be applied in most cases. Care must be taken that it is not set
too high, as inrush blocking may not operate for low levels of second harmonic
current which may result in the O/C element tripping during transformer
energization. Similarly, if it is set too low, inrush blocking may prevent tripping for
some internal transformer faults with significant second harmonic current

The inrush blocking function help to ensure protection stability during transformer
energizing based on the presence of harmonic 2. The Inrush Blocking function
measures the ratio of second to fundamental harmonic currents. It can be used as
“bloc ing logic” for I , I , I , (B, A, E, E+), IN_1, IN_2, IN_3 (E, E+), I2>
(E, E+), Broken Conduct (E, E+), in cases where the harmonic 2 ratio is higher than
the set threshold. Indeed, inrush blocking functions will reset selected protection
starts.

Two options are available (GLOBAL SETTINGS/INRUSH BLOCKING menu):

1: Yes

2: Closing

If 1: Yes, is selected, the minimum duration of the overcurrent stage inhibition

(Inrush Reset Time) can be also set. This value depends on the transformer power
transient inrush duration: between 0.1 second (for a 100 kVA transformer) to 1.0
second (for a larger unit). It is used to avoid any maloperation during a fixed time
period in case of too sensitive a setting. For example, this option is recommended
for incoming feeders where the inrush current is caused by a transformer connected
to an outgoing line. However, using the second harmonic can increase the tripping
time in case of a fault, especially with DC component included. This option can also
be used if the CB contacts are not assigned to any P1F inputs (no information about
CB closing).

If 2: Closing is selected, the protection element block is active after the CB closes
until Unblock Inrush Time elapses (this can be also set in the GLOBAL
SETTINGS/INRUSH BLOCKING menu column). If 1: Closing is selected, the
minimum duration of the overcurrent stage inhibition (Inrush Reset Time) can be
also set (see above: 1: Yes). This option can increase protection reliability, because
inrush blocking is limited to cases where inrush current can appear (closing of CB).
Therefore it can be used on outgoing lines with transformers. Note that for incoming
feeders the inrush current can be also present when CB is closed and an outgoing
line with a transformer is closing. In such a case the CB status of the incoming

141 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Functions and Parameters Protection Relay

feeder is not changed but Inrush current can trip protection element. The 2: Closing
option is not recommended for such an application.

Block Diagram
Figure 14. Diagram depicts the example for the I> protection element only
Inrush Blocking? 1:Yes
Inrush
Reset Time
Calculation for curents above Pulse
0.2In: IA2h, IB2h, IC2h 2nd Harmonic Inrush detection (I2h/I1h)
MAX Ratio setting & setting
{IA2h, GLOBAL SETTINGS
If IA<0.2In then IA2h=0% GLOBAL SETTINGS
/INRUSH BLOCKING
IB2h, /INRUSH BLOCKING
If IB<0.2In then IB2h=0%
IC2h}
If IC<0.2In then IC2h=0%
OR
Inrush Blocking? 2:Yes,
Closing

HMI Close CB Order

&
RS485 Close CB Order
Unblock
Inrush Time &
Pulse
Front key Close CB Order OR setting
GLOBAL SETTINGS
/INRUSH BLOCKING
Manual Close Input

T TIMER 0

[79] Close CB Order

tI> Time Delay
& DMT/IDMT
Start I> Threshold with DMT or IDMT
RESET
I> setting value SETTING GROUP 1(2)
/PROTECTION/
IA, IB, IC SETTING GROUP 1(2)
/PROTECTION/ [50/51N] E/GND FAULT G1
{50/51] PHASE O/C G1(2)

P0932ENb

Operation

For each of the three phases currents (IA, IB, IC), the harmonic restraint function
compares the ratio of 2nd harmonic to the fundamental with the set ratio (Harmonic
2/Fundamental settable from 10 % up to 50 % in steps of 1%).

The minimum fundamental current value required for operation of the Inrush
Blocking function is 0.2 In, and there is no upper limit to disable this feature.
However, in transformer protection, the high set overcurrent stage should not be
controlled by this Inrush Blocking feature; this enables detection of all high current
faults without inrush blocking.

It is possible to set two options for Inrush Current logic in the GLOBAL SETTINGS/
INRUSH BLOCKING/Inrush Blocking? Menu:
1: Yes – monitoring is permanent. The Inrush Blocking function will block the
selected protection stages every time inrush conditions are present on the line
(Ratio of 2nd Harmonics measured greater than Inrush set ratio), and will be active at
least for the duration of Inrush Reset Time. This timer defines the minimum
duration of overcurrent threshold inhibition (0-200 s, settable). This timer starts as
soon as operating inrush current threshold picks up:
● If the inrush condition lasts less than the set value for Inrush Reset Time, the
selected overcurrent function will be inhibited for the duration of Inrush Reset
Time.
● If the inrush condition lasts longer than the set value for Inrush Reset Time, the
selected overcurrent function will remain inhibited as long as the inrush condition
is present.
2: Closing – monitoring is based on the Close CB order output. The Inrush
Blocking function will block the selected protection stages every time a close
command is executed and the Ratio of measured 2nd harmonics is greater than the
set Inrush set ratio, and will be active at least for the duration of Unblock Inrush
Time.

142 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Functions and Parameters

NOTE: Inrush Blocking in PowerLogic P1F relays is not phase-selective. If an inrush

condition occurs on any phase, the selected protection stages will be blocked
in all 3 phases.

Additional Functions

By default, this function is off.

Settings

Setting Authorized Values Default Setting

Inrush Blocking? 0: No
1: Yes 0: No
2: Closing
2nd Harmonic Ratio … (step ) 20%
Inrush Reset Time . … s (step . s) 0.0 s
Unblock Reset Time . … s (step . s) 1.0 s

Additional Info

The 2nd harmonic blocking detects high inrush current flows that occur when
transformers or machines are connected. The function will then block the following
functions:
● PHASE O/C [50/51]
● SOTF [50/51] (B, A, E, E+)
● E/GND FAULT [50/51N]
● NEGATIVE SEQ. O/C [46] (E, E+)
● BROKEN CONDUCTOR (E, E+)
● AUX TIMERS (B, A, E, E+)

Blocking of a protection function is enabled if the main configuration of protection

criteria is set to “ rip-Inrush Bl” (for e ample “SETTING GROUP x/PROTECTION
Gx/PHASE O/C [50/51] Gx/I>? Trip-Inrush Bl” submenu)

The 2nd harmonic blocking function identifies an inrush current by evaluating the
ratio of the second harmonic current components to the fundamental wave. If this
ratio exceeds the set thresholds, then the inrush stabilization function operates.
The minimum fundamental current value required for operation of the inrush
blocking function is 0.2 In, and there is no upper limit to disable this feature.

2nd harmonic blocking operates across all phases.

143 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Functions and Parameters Protection Relay

Thermal Overload Protection (ANSI 49)

Applicable to PowerLogic P1F Series

L N B A E E+

Description

The relay incorporates a current-based thermal replica, using r.m.s. load current to
model heating and cooling of the protected plant. The element can be set with both
alarm and trip stages.

The heat generated within an item of plant, such as a cable or a transformer, is the
resistive loss (I2R x t). Thus, heating is directly proportional to current squared. The
thermal time characteristic used in the relay is therefore based on current squared,
integrated over time. The relay automatically uses the largest phase current for input
to the thermal model.

The equipment is designed to operate continuously at a temperature corresponding

to its full load rating, where the generated heat is balanced by heat dissipated
through radiation, etc.

Over-temperature conditions therefore occur when currents in excess of the rating

are allowed to flow for a period of time. It can be shown that temperatures during
heating follow exponential time constants and a similar exponential decrease of
temperature occurs during cooling.

This characteristic is used to help to protect cables, dry type transformers (e.g. type
AN), and capacitor banks.

The thermal time characteristic is given by:

 K ² - 
 p 
tTrip = Te  ln  
 K ² −  t rip 
 
Where:
tTrip = Tripping time (in seconds)
Te = Thermal time constant of the equipment to be protected (in seconds)
θP = Steady state pre-loading thermal state before application of the overload
θtrip rip thermal state. If the trip thermal state is set at , then θ trip
I eq
K = Thermal overload equal to
1.05  Itherm
Ieq = Equivalent current corresponding to the R.M.S. value of the largest phase
current
Itherm = Setting value. It is full load current rating

The tripping time varies according to the load current carried before application of
the overload, i.e. whether the overload was applied from ‘hot” or “cold”.

The parameter settings are available in the various menus. The calculation of the
thermal state is given by the following formula:

144 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Functions and Parameters

 Ieq 
2
   
 −t   −t 
 
 +1 =   1 − e Te   +  e Te 
 1.05  Itherm  



θ is calculated every 10 ms.

If all the phase currents are above 0.1 x Itherm the value of Tr (time constant for
cooling) is used instead of Te (time constant for heating):

 Ieq 
2
   
 −t   −t 
 
 +1 =   1 − e Tr   +  e Tr 
 1.05  Itherm  



In a typical application (transformer, cable, ...) Tr should be equal to Te. Different
setting values of Te and Tr are only used in motor applications.

NOTE current of Ιs ( ΙFLC) has to be applied for several time constants

to cause a thermal state measurement of 100%.

Block Diagram
Figure 15. Operating principle diagram for thermal overload protection
HMI Reset Theta val.
OR
Reset Theta val. Input

Alarm
IA Theta
Alarm
IB MAX Threshold
IC Alarm Recorder

Thermal Characteristic
Block. Itherm Input SETTING GROUP 1(2)
/PROTECTION/
[49] THERM OVERLOAD G1(2) Theta Trip
Therm OL? 1: enabled Threshold

Protect. Trip

Protect. Trip pulse

Theta Trip/Reset
Ratio OR
& Fault Recorder

P0926ENb

Operation

The magnitudes of the three phase currents are compared and the largest
magnitude selected as the input to the thermal overload function. If this current
exceeds the thermal trip threshold setting a start condition is asserted.

Additional Functions

By default, this function is off.

145 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Functions and Parameters Protection Relay

Settings

Thermal Overload Protection Authorized Values Default Setting

Therm. OL? Disabled, Enabled Disabled
Itherm . … . In (step . In) 1In
Te (heating) … mn (step mn) 40mn
Tr (cooling) … mn (step mn) 40mn
Theta Trip … 200 % (step: 1%) 100%
Theta Reset Ratio … 99 % (step: 1%) 90%
Theta Alarm ? Disabled, Enabled Disabled
Theta Alarm … 200 % (step: 1%) 100%

Additional Info

The Thermal Trip signal remains high until the thermal state drops below the thermal
reset threshold.

The thermal reset threshold is settable using the Theta Trip/Reset Ratio value.

The Thermal Reset Ratio is calculated:

Thermal Reset Threshold = Theta Trip/Reset Ratio x Theta Trip

For Theta Trip/Reset Ratio = 90% (0.9) and Theta Trip=120%:

Thermal Reset Threshold = 0.9 x 120%=108%

If the Thermal State is above the Theta Trip threshold and then drops, the Thermal
Trip signal will reset when the Thermal State drops below the Thermal Reset
Threshold.

If Blocking Ithermal Input (B, A, E, E+) is in high state, for calculation Thermal
Characteristic uses current value 0xIn instead of measured value.

Thermal protection also provides an indication of the thermal state in the

MEASUREMENTS column of the relay. The thermal state can be reset by either an
opto-input (if assigned to this function using the programmable scheme logic) or the
relay menu.

The reset function in the menu is also found in the MEASUREMENTS column with
the thermal state menu.

146 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Functions and Parameters

Circuit Breaker Control

Applicable to PowerLogic P1F Series

L N B A E E+

Description

The P1F relays includes the following options for control of a single circuit breaker:
- Local tripping and closing, via the relay menu or function keys (L, N, B, A, E, E+)
- Local tripping and closing, via relay binary inputs (B, A, E, E+)
- Remote tripping and closing, using the relay communications (N, B, A, E, E+)

Operation

A manual trip will be permitted provided that the circuit breaker is initially closed.
Likewise, a close command can only be issued if the CB is initially open. To confirm
these states, it will be necessary to use the breaker 52A (assigned to CB status
52A input (B, A, E, E+)) and/or 52B (assigned to CB status 52B input (B, A, E, E+))
contacts. Under these circumstances manual CB control will be possible, but the
Auto-reclose function will not be available. Additionally, it will be not possible to see
the CB status in the Control default cell.

Once a CB Close command is initiated the output contact (Close CB order) can be
set to operate following a user-defined time-delay (Time delay for Close setting in
GLOBAL SETTINGS/CIRCUIT BREAKER menu). This would give personnel time
to move away from the circuit breaker following the close command. This time-delay
will apply to all manual CB Close commands.

The length of the trip or close control pulse can be set via the tOpen pulse and
tClose Pulse settings respectively (GLOBAL SETTINGS/CIRCUIT BREAKER
menu). These should be set long enough to ensure the breaker has completed its
open or close cycle before the pulse has elapsed.

Note: The manual trip and close commands are found in the default Control cell and
the Close/Trip keys on the front panel.

If an attempt to close the breaker is being made, and a protection trip signal is
generated, the protection trip command overrides the close command.

If CB FLT Ext.Sign. (B, A, E, E+) is assigned to a binary input this signal is checked
before manual closing of the CB. This function uses the signal received at the relay’s
binary input to confirm whether the breaker is capable of closing (sufficient circuit
breaker energy for example). A user-settable time-delay, tCB FLT Ext.Sign. (B, A,
E, E+), is included for manual closure. If, following a close command, the CB does
not signal a healthy condition before that timer elapses, then the relay will lockout
and issue an alarm.

147 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Functions and Parameters Protection Relay

Connection of Output RL1: Circuit Breaker Tripping

Shunt trip coil
Figure 16. Shunt trip coil application

If PowerLogic P1F detects a fault, closing of the output relay RL1 normally open
contact trips opening of the circuit breaker by supplying power to the shunt trip coil.
This contact stays closed after the circuit breaker trips, until the fault is
acknowledged.
Undervoltage trip coil
Figure 17 Undervoltage trip coil application

In this case, it is necessary to invert the control logic for output relay RL1. The
normally open contact will be kept in the closed position continuously, until a fault
appears. If P1F detects a fault, opening of the contact trips opening of the circuit
breaker by opening the undervoltage trip coil power supply circuit. This contact stays
open after the circuit breaker trips, until the fault is acknowledged.

148 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Functions and Parameters

Connection of Output RL2: Trip Lockout (ANSI 86 Function)

Figure 18.Trip Lockout diagram

If P1F detects a fault, opening of the RL2 output relay normally closed contact cuts
the closing coil power supply circuit. This contact stays open after the trip order, until
the fault is acknowledged. In this state, all close orders are inhibited.

Additional Functions

By default, this function is off.

Settings for Using the Function

Circuit breaker Authorized Values Default Setting

(Circuit breaker control settings)
tOpen pulse 0.10… .00 s (step: 0.01 s) 0.10 s
tClose Pulse 0.10… .00 s (step: 0.01 s) 0.10 s
Time Delay for Close Command . … .0 s (step: 0.01 s) 0.00 s
tCB FLT Ext.Sign. . … . s (step . s) 16 s

149 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Functions and Parameters Protection Relay

External Trip (Auxiliary timers)

Applicable to PowerLogic P1F Series

L N B A E E+

Description

Using a binary input, PowerLogic P1F relays can be used to take account of a trip
order issued by an external protection device.

For example, specific protection devices for power transformers (Buchholz, gas-
pressure-temperature detectors, etc.) can be hard-wired on an PowerLogic P1F
binary input to trip the circuit breaker.

The external devices can be hard-wired directly into the circuit breaker trip circuit,
but there are three advantages in connecting a PowerLogic P1F binary input:
● External trip orders will be memorized by the ANSI 86 function, integrated in the
PowerLogic P1F unit. Trip lockout will apply until the fault is acknowledged.
● The trip order and its origin will be indicated on the PowerLogic P1F front panel.
The trip will be saved and time tagged in the log of the last 20 faults.
● The circuit breaker trip circuit is simplified, and hence more reliable.

Block Diagram
Figure 19. Operating principle diagram for exteranal trip (auxiliary timers)
n= 1, 2, 3, 4
Alarm
AUXn? 2: Alarm
&
Inrush detection (I2h/I1h)
& T TIMER 0
Alarm Recorder
AUXn? 3: Trip-Inrush Bl

Block.AUXn Input & tAUXn Time Delay

DMT tAUXn
SETTING GROUP 1(2)
/PROTECTION/
AUX TIMERS G1(2)
AUXn? 0: disabled
&
AUXn Input
AUXn

INSTANTENOUS
& Recorder

RESET LEDs
& OR Protect. Trip

& Protect. Trip pulse

AUXn? 4: Trip-Latch
Fault Recorder
AUXn? 1: Trip OR
AUXn? 3: Trip-Inrush Bl
P0928ENb

Standard Operation

Four auxiliary timers, tAux1, tAux2, tAux3 and tAux4, are available and associated
with logic inputs Aux1, Aux2, Aux3 and Aux4 (refer to the SETTING GROUP
x/INPUTS CONFIGURATION menu). When these inputs are energized, the
associated timers start and, when the set time has elapsed, the associated LEDs
(SETTING GROUP 1(2)/LEDs CONFIGURATION menu) are lit or/and the
associated output relays close (refer to the SETTING GROUP 1(2)/OUTPUT
RELAYS CONFIGURATION menu). Time-delays can be independently set from 0
ms to 600 s.

150 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Functions and Parameters

Each auxiliary timer can be set independently to:

- Alarm: Alarm signal
- Trip: Protection Trip signal
- Trip-Inrush Bl (A, E, E+): Protection Trip signal with inrush blocking
- Trip-Latch (A, E, E+): Protection Trip signal latched until it is reset via a binary
input (Reset Ltch Sign), the HMI or a remote reset command

In the SETTING GROUP x/INPUTS CONFIGURATION (B, A, E, E+) menu AUX5

(B, A, E, E+) and/or AUX6 (B, A, E, E+) can be mapped to inputs. These input
functions have no timers (instantaneous action). They can be used as bridges
between inputs and LEDs or inputs and outputs. It is not possible to link this input
function to a Trip or Alarm signal.

Additional Functions
By default, this function is off.

Settings for Using the Function

SETTING GROUP x/PROTECTION Gx/AUX TIMERS Gx screen:

Aux timers Authorized Values Default Setting
AUX1 Disabled,
Trip,
Alarm,
Trip-Inrush Bl (A, E, E+),
Disabled
Trip-Latch (A, E, E+),
Load Shedding (E, E+),
AR after LS Hi (E, E+),
AR after LS Lo (E, E+)
tAUX1 . … . s (step: 0.01 s) 0.00 s
AUX2 Disabled,
Trip,
Alarm,
Trip-Inrush Bl (A, E, E+),
Disabled
Trip-Latch (A, E, E+),
Load Shedding (E, E+),
AR after LS Hi (E, E+),
AR after LS Lo (E, E+)
tAUX2 . … . s (step: 0.01 s) 0.00 s
AUX3 Disabled,
Trip,
Alarm,
Trip-Inrush Bl (A, E, E+),
Disabled
Trip-Latch (A, E, E+),
Load Shedding (E, E+),
AR after LS Hi (E, E+),
AR after LS Lo (E, E+)
tAUX3 . … . s (step: 0.01 s) 0.00 s
AUX4 Disabled,
Trip,
Alarm,
Trip-Inrush Bl (A, E, E+),
Disabled
Trip-Latch (A, E, E+),
Load Shedding (E, E+),
AR after LS Hi (E, E+),
AR after LS Lo (E, E+)
tAUX4 . … . s (step: 0.01 s) 0.00 s

151 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Functions and Parameters Protection Relay

Logic Discrimination (ANSI 68)

Applicable to PowerLogic P1F Series

L N B A E E+
All PowerLogic P1F relays can send a logic discrimination blocking order.

Only PowerLogic P1F model B, A, E, E+ relays can receive a logic discrimination

blocking order.

Description

The logic discrimination function can achieve a significant reduction in tripping times
for circuit breakers located right next to the source. It can mitigate the disadvantages
of the conventional time discrimination process.

This function exploits the hard-wiring of a logic data item between the protection
functions, making it possible to block the protection upstream by protection functions
located downstream. With logic discrimination, the protection settings should be
fixed in relation to the element to be protected without worrying about the
discrimination aspect.

Block Diagram
Figure 20. Operating principles diagram for logic discrimination

T TIMER 0
[79] Inhib.Trip tI>
tI> Time Delay
DMT/IDMT
Block.tI> Input & with DMT or IDMT
tI>
RESET
SETTI NG GROUP 1(2)
/PROTECTION/
I>? 0: disabled [50/51] PHASE O/C G1
&
Start I> Threshold
Start I>
&
CBF: Block I>
P0931ENb

Standard Operation

Each stage of the phase protection element can be blocked via an appropriately
configured binary input. Binary inputs can be assigned to the following functions
(SETTING GROUPx/INPUT CONFIGURATION Gx ):
• Block.tI> (ABE)

• Block.tI>> (ABE)

• Block.tI>>> (ABE)

• Block.tSOTF (ABE)

• Block.tIN_1 (ABE)

• Block.tIN_2 (ABE)

• Block.tIN_3 €

• Block.tI2> €

• Block.tBrkn Cond €

152 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Functions and Parameters

• Block.Itherm (ABE)

• Block.AUX1 (ABE)

• Block.AUX2 (ABE)

• Block.AUX3 (ABE)

• Block.tCB Fail (ABE)

• Block. [79] €
Such a configured input can be used by the blocking logic function or by a protection
element disabling function (Auto-reclose I, CB Fail or AUX (ABE)).
The blocking logic function can be applied to radial feeder circuits where there is
little or no back feed. For parallel feeders, ring circuits or where there can be a back
feed from generators, directional relays should be considered.
The blocking logic function allows the upstream IDMT relay to be blocked by the
start output of a downstream relay that has detected the presence of a fault current
above its threshold. Thus both upstream and downstream relays can have the same
current and time settings, and the blocking feature will automatically provide grading.
If in SETTING GROUPS x/PROTECTION Gx/[[50BF] CB Fail the function: Block I>
(IN>)? I is set to 0: Yes and the Circuit Breaker Fail protection is enabled, the
blocking command on the upstream relay will be removed if the downstream circuit
breaker fails to trip.

Additional Functions
By default, this function is off.

Settings for Using the Function

Logic discrimination Authorized Values Default Setting

Sel1 Disabled,
Disabled
Enabled.
tSel1 . … . 0.40
Sel2 Disabled,
Disabled
Enabled.
tSel2 . … . 0.40

153 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Functions and Parameters Protection Relay

Operating Language
Applicable to PowerLogic P1F Series

L N B A E E+

Description

The default language is English.

Settings

Selection of the operating language can be accessed in the parameter’s menu. The
parameter to be set is GLOBAL SETTINGS/LOC/LANGUAGE screen.

For ordering options: REL15000, REL15001, REL15002, REL15003, REL15004,

REL15005, REL15006, REL15007, REL15008, REL15009, REL15010, REL15011,
REL15012, REL15013, REL15014, REL15015, REL15016, REL15017, REL15020,
REL15021, REL15022, REL15023.
GLOBAL SETTINGS/LOC/Language menu cell
Language Authorized Values Default Setting
Language English,
(L, N, B, A, E, E+) German
French
Spanish
English
Russian
Turkish
Portuguese
Polish

For ordering options (EAC marking): REL15007R, REL15009R, REL15011R,

REL15013R, REL15021R, REL15023R.

GLOBAL SETTINGS/LOC/Language menu cell

Language Authorized Values Default Setting
Language English,
(B, A, E+) German
French
Spanish
English
Russian
Turkish
Portuguese
Polish

For ordering options: REL15006C, REL15007C, REL15008C, REL15009C,

REL15014C, REL15015C, REL15016C, REL15017C.
GLOBAL SETTINGS/LOC/Language menu cell
Language Authorized Values Default Setting
Language English,
English
(B, E) Chinese

154 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Functions and Parameters

Trip Circuit Supervision (TCS)

Applicable to PowerLogic P1F Series

L N B A E E+

Description

The trip circuit extends beyond the relay’s enclosure and passes through more
components, such as fuses, wires, relay contacts, auxiliary switch contacts and so
on.

These complications, coupled with the importance of the circuit, have directed
attention to its supervision.

The simplest arrangement for trip circuit supervision contains a healthy trip lamp in
series with a resistance placed in parallel with the trip output relay contacts of the
protection device.

Block Diagram
Figure 21. Operating principle diagram for trip circuit supervision

TC Supervision? 1: Yes T TIMER 0

CB closed (52A)
OR CB Alarm

TC Supervision? & TC Supervision

2: Yes – A tSUP Time Delay
& GLOBAL SETTINGS/
Alarm
Trip Circ Supervis. Input CIRCUIT BREAKER

TCS 52 Fail
Protect Trip

Prot.Trip pulse OR
Trip CB Order
P0933ENb

Standard Operation

The Trip Circuit Supervision function included in the PowerLogic P1F relays is
described below:

A logic input is programmed to the GLOBAL CONFIGURATION/CIRCUIT

BREAKER/TC Supervision function. The logic input is associated to the label Trip
Circ Supervis. Within the SETTING GROUPx/INPUT CONFIGURATION Gx menu.
Then, this logic input is wired in the trip circuit according to one of the typical
application diagrams shown in the following example.

When the TC Supervision function is set to Yes under the CIRCUIT BREAKER sub-
menu, the relay checks continuously on trip circuit continuity whether the CB’s status
is open or closed.

When the TC Supervision function is set to Yes-52A under the CIRCUIT BREAKER
sub-menu, the relay checks continuously on trip circuit continuity in case when the
CB’s status is closed only.

The TC Supervision function is enabled when the Protect.trip or Trip CB order

output is not energized. The TC Supervision function is not enabled when the
Protect.trip or Trip CB is energized.
A TCS 52 Fail and CB Alarm output function, TCS Supervision Alarm and CB
Alarm LEDs function signal is generated if the logic input detects no voltage signal

155 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Functions and Parameters Protection Relay

during a time longer than the settable timer tSUP (in GLOBAL
CONFIGURATION/CIRCUIT BREAKER menu).

As this function is disabled when the Protect.trip or Trip CB order output is

energized, this function is suitable for use with the enabled relay latching logic.

Example 1

In this example only the 52a auxiliary contact is available, the PowerLogic P1F relay
monitors the trip coil whatever the CB status is (CB open or CB closed).
Figure 22. Example 1 – Trip Coil Monitoring

Example 2

In this example both 52a and 52b auxiliary contacts are available; the PowerLogic
P1F relay monitors the complete trip circuit when the CB is closed and a part of the
trip circuit when the CB is open.

In this case it is necessary to insert a resistor R1 in series with 52b, if either the
output trip is latched or if it stays accidently closed, or if a long-time trip pulse is
programmed.

156 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Functions and Parameters

Figure 23. Example 2 – Trip Coil and Auxiliary Contact Monitoring

Example 3

In this example both 52a and 52b auxiliary contacts are available, the PowerLogic
P1F relay monitors the complete trip circuit whatever the CB status (CB open or CB
closed).

In this case it is necessary to insert a R1, if either the output trip is latched, or if it
stays accidently closed, or if a long-time trip pulse is programmed.
Figure 24. Example 3 – Trip Coil and Auxiliary Contact Monitoring Whatever
the Position of the CB contacts

External Resistor R1 Calculation

The calculation of the R1 resistor value will consider the fact that a minimum current
is flowing through the logic input. This minimum current value is a function of the
relay auxiliary voltage range (Uaux).
1 – Case of example 2:

157 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Functions and Parameters Protection Relay

The R1 resistor maximum value (in Ohm) is defined by the following formula:

0.8  Uaux − Umin

R1  
Imin

Where:
Uaux = auxiliary voltage value (in this case a DC voltage; range is given on label
under the top hinged cover. See table below).
Umin = input limit voltage at state 1 (see table on page 316).
Imin = minimum current value needed for the opto logic input to operate.
Imin = Umin/Rinput

Relay auxiliary voltage range (Uaux)

24-60 Vdc 90-250 Vdc/ac
(ordering code P1F1Enhxxxxxx1xxxxxxx) (ordering code P1F1Enhxxxxxx2xxxxxxx)

R1 < (0.8 x Uaux – 19V)/ (19V/6000) R1 < (0.8 x Uaux – 72V)/ (72V/109000)

The R1 resistor withstand value (in Watt) is defined below:

PR1  2 
(1.2  Uaux )2 Watts
R1
2 – Case of example 3:

The R1 resistor maximum value (in Ohm) is defined by the following formula:

0.8  Uaux − Umin

R1  − R coil 
Imin

Where:
Uaux - auxiliary voltage value (in this case a DC voltage; its range is given on the
label - under the top hinged cover. See table below.)
Umin - internal minimum voltage value needed for the opto-input to operate.
Imin - minimum current value needed for the opto-input to operate.
Rcoil - trip coil resistance value.

Relay auxiliary voltage range (Uaux)

24-60 Vdc 90-250 Vdc/ac

R1 < R1 <
(0.8 x Uaux – 19)/(19V/6000) – Rcoil (0.8 x Uaux – 72)/ (72V/109000) – Rcoil

The R1 resistor withstand value (in Watt) is defined below:

Notes:

– The presence of auxiliary relays, such as an anti-pumping system for instance, in

the trip circuit must be considered for the R1 resistance values specification.
– We consider that the maximum variation of the auxiliary voltage value is ±20%.

Example 4

In this example both 52a and 52b auxiliary contacts are available, the PowerLogic
P1F relay monitors the complete trip circuit whatever the CB status (CB open or CB
closed).

158 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Functions and Parameters

This application needs to assign two Binary Inputs to one TC Sup. Input logic
function.

In this case it is necessary to insert a RL1, if either the output trip is latched, or if it
stays accidently closed, or if a long-time trip pulse is programmed.
Figure 25. Example 4 – Trip Coil and Auxiliary Contact Monitoring by using
two Binary Inputs

Example 5

In this example 52a auxiliary contacts is available, the PowerLogic P1F relay
monitors the complete trip circuit if the CB status is closed.

This application needs to assign one Binary Input to TC Sup. Input logic function.

In this case it is necessary to insert a RL1, if either the output trip is latched, or if it
stays accidently closed, or if a long-time trip pulse is programmed.

159 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Functions and Parameters Protection Relay

Figure 26. Example 5 – Trip Coil and Auxiliary Contact Monitoring by using
two Binary Inputs

Additional Functions

By default, this function is off.

Settings

GLOBAL SETTINGS/CIRCIUT BREAKER/TC Supervision screen

Logic discrimination Authorized Values Default Setting
TC Supervision No
Yes No
Yes-52a
tSUP . … . s 0.500 s

160 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Functions and Parameters

Date and Time

Applicable to PowerLogic P1F Series

L N B A E E+

Description

PowerLogic P1F has an internal clock which can be used to assign a date and time:
● To events recorded by the time-tagged record of the last 200 events function
● To other time-tagged events (Fault recorder), which can be accessed via the
communication

If the relay is powered from auxiliary voltage then the internal clock is maintained
from this voltage. In the event of failure of the PowerLogic P1F auxiliary power
supply, the internal clock is maintained by a backup capacitor (no battery inside). If
the backup capacitor will be discharged (161pprox.. after 72hours without voltage),
the internal clock will reset itself to 01/01/2015 00:00:00.

NOTE: Operation of the protection functions is not affected by the charged or

discharged of the backup capacitor.

Settings

The date and time setting can be accessed in the OP PARAMETERS menu.

The parameters to be set are:

● Date setting (Date menu cell)
● Time setting (Time menu cell)

The date and time setting in the parameter’s menu is not considered when the
PowerLogic P1F date and time are synchronized via the communication.

161 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Functions and Parameters Protection Relay

Password
Applicable to PowerLogic P1F Series

L N B A E E+

Description

The password protection of the relay comprises three levels:

− Configurator (Administrator) – all the menu settings may be changed. On
this password level all programmable LEDs (from 3 up to 7 LEDs)
sequential flashing.

− Operator (Protection setting) – it is possible to change settings in the

PROTECTION column; CTRL Default Windows (CB status CTRL, L/R
status CTRL, [79] CTRL) and COMMISSIONING/Maintenance Mode
windows are also possible. On this password level all programmable LEDs
(from 3 up to 7 LEDs) sequential flashing.

− User (Control only) – this level is used for tests and/or control execution
only (no changing of setting parameters) so signaling of SETTING
CHANGE MODE differs from above. On this password level all
programmable LEDs (from 3 up to 7 LEDs) flashing in the same time.

All password levels are additionally signaled by the special sign: , which informs
that change settings or controls (depend on password level) are allowed.

For each level the password consists of 4 digits (0 to 9)

NOTE: The default password for each password level:

1. Configurator – 0002
2. Operator – 0001
3. User – 0000

It is recommended to change default passwords from 0000, 0001, 0002 to unique

value for every password level.

If the first password is different, this means that the Configurator password has been
changed.

The Operator password is still 0000. Therefore, to help to protect settings against
unauthorized access it is necessary to change the Protection setting password by
first entering 0000 then a new value.

The User password is still 0000. Therefore, if it is necessary to change it, first enter
0000 then the new value (Control right) of the password.

Notes: 1. If the Operator rights have not been changed, or if it has been set to
the default value (0000), it is possible to change all the settings in the
PROTECTION column, reset the counters and control the CB without
entering a password, simply by pressing the OK navigation key. This
makes it possible to change a chosen parameter by automatically
switching the P1F to the SETTING CHANGE MODE (the programmable
LEDs are flashing). This means that even after changing only one
parameter it is necessary to switch the P1F back to PROTECTION
MODE in order to activate the new settings (warm restart).

162 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Functions and Parameters

2. If the User rights password has not been changed or if it has been set to the
default value (0000) it is possible to control the CB in menu without password
protection.

Additional Functions

SETTING CHANGE MODE

The SETTING CHANGE MODE should be used to change settings.

Using the SETTING CHANGE MODE helps to ensure that all changed parameters
will be applied simultaneously so as to avoid any problems caused by possible
setting inconsistencies.

The SETTING CHANGE MODE makes it possible to change settings while the relay
is active without any risk (the P1F continues to use the previous settings).

After exiting the SETTING CHANGE MODE, a warm reset of firmware is applied so
that all the protection counters are reset.

Note: Latched LEDs and outputs are reset (stored values are cleared during a
P1F reset).
To switch the P1F to the SETTING CHANGE MODE navigate to the SETTING
CHANGE MODE main header, then press the key:

Edit settings?
Enter PSWD

Press the OK navigation key.

Edit settings?
Enter PSWD 0000

The 0 digit furthest to the right is flashing.

Enter the password:

1. If the digit is flashing, change the digit to the required value by pressing the
key or the key.

2. Change the flashing digit by pressing the key or key.

3. Continue as above to set the whole password (4 digits)

4. If the correct password is set, press the OK navigation key

The LCD displays ‘OK’ during approximately 1 second, then the new SETTING
CHANGE cell is displayed:

If the password entered is for:

- Configurator rights:
Setting change:
Configurator

To indicate that the P1F is in SETTING CHANGE MODE on the level: Configurator
the programmable LEDs are sequential flashing

- Operator settings:
Setting change:
Operator

163 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Functions and Parameters Protection Relay

To indicate that the P1F is in SETTING CHANGE MODE on the level: Operator the
programmable LEDs are sequential flashing

- User only:
Setting change:
User

To indicate that the P1F is in SETTING CHANGE MODE on the level: User the
programmable LEDs are flashing (all LEDs in the same time). User mode is active
by 5 minutes only (since the last menu activity). After this time the relays
automatically leaves this mode.

The screen displays the scope of the current modification rights.

At this time, it is possible to start changing the setting parameters.

Note: The parallel pressing: and keys it makes jump from any place
to:
Edit settings?
Enter PSWD

the menu cell in which the password can be entered (hot keys).

If all settings are changed, it is necessary to return to PROTECTION MODE to apply

a warm reset.

Press the and keys simultaneously to jump to the following cell:

Edit settings?
Exit:press ENTER

Press the OK navigation key to apply a warm reset and display the following cell:
Setting change:
Protected

The programmable LEDs stop flashing. The P1F is in PROTECTION MODE.

Note: In SETTING CHANGE MODE all functions use the previously stored
settings (before the SETTING CHANGE MODE was entered).

Changing of a single setting parameter

- Go to the required setting cell.

- Press the HMI OK key:

Edit settings?
Enter PSWD 0000

Enter the password and then press OK navigation key to confirm the password and
switch to SETTING CHANGE MODE.

- Press OK navigation key to enter the chosen setting parameter.

- Set the required value.

- Confirm the change by pressing the OK navigation key.

- Switch from SETTING CHANGE MODE to PROTECTION MODE.

Changing the password

164 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Functions and Parameters

To change the password, first enter the existing password to obtain the appropriate
password protection rights.

Press the key to display the following cell:

Change Password

Press the OK navigation key, to display:

Change Password
0000

Enter the new password.

Press OK navigation key to confirm the new password and jump to the cell
displaying information on protection rights.

Switch from SETTING CHANGE MODE to PROTECTION MODE. After this the
settings are password-protected and the P1F is in PROTECTION MODE.
Additionally the programmable LEDs stop flashing.

165 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Functions and Parameters Protection Relay

Watchdog Relay
Applicable to PowerLogic P1F Series

L N B A E E+

Description

PowerLogic P1F

PowerLogic P1F relays are equipped as standard with a watchdog relay (WD,
terminal numbers A3-A4-A5, see Installation chapter). This is a changeover relay
output which is kept permanently in the on-position (A3 – A5) by PowerLogic P1F. In
the event of PowerLogic P1 failure, or if the auxiliary power supply fails, the
watchdog relay reverts to the off-position.

Note: In special application watchdog relay (normally open terminals A4-A5)

can be used as typical relay outputs. In this case to WD relay can be
assigned Alarm signal only from SETTING GROUP x/OUTPUT
RELAYS CONFIGURATION Gx signals. This Alarm signal comes from
protection function set on Alarm only.

When WD relay is used as typical WD contacts (not assigned Alarm signal to WD)
then WD status in COMMISSIONING/RELAY O/P Status cell is not visible.

166 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Functions and Parameters

Auto-Reclose (ANSI 79)

Applicable to PowerLogic P1F Series

L N B A E E+

Description

The auto-reclose function is enabled in the SETTING GROUP x/PROTECTION

Gx/[79] AUTORECLOSE Gx menu. The current state of the auto-reclose function is
shown in the default Autoreclose cell of the menu:

[79]: Ready
CTRL: no operation

The first line informs about the current state of the auto-reclose function. The
following can be displayed:
● [79] Ready – The auto-reclose function is unblocked and ready to operate.
● [79] In progress – An auto-reclose cycle is in progress.
● [79] Tempor.Block. – The auto-reclose function is temporary blocked after
Closing of CB (from RS485, Front Panel or via configured Binary Input) during
Inhibit Time tI on Close (GLOBAL SETTINGS/[79] ADVANCED
SETTINGS/Inhibit Time tI on Close). Also, temporary blocking feature is
activated when breaker closes (either 52a contact energizes or 52b contact de-
energizes) and [79] – IN PROGRESS is inactive. In this way the temporary
blocking feature will not be activated when the [79] function initiates the reclose,
only when its manually done by an operator who turns a control switch.
● [79]: Lockout – The auto-reclose function is internally blocked up to reset
signaling (Input assigned to Reset Latched Signals, C clear key on the front
panel, Reset Latched Signals via RS485, closing of CB command via P1F or
Unlockout command in CTRL line).
● [79] Block:CTRL. – The auto-reclose function is blocked via the communication
port or from P1F menu via the Auto-reclose default cell (CTRL line)
● [79] Block:Input – The auto-reclose function is blocked via a binary input
assigned to this effect.
● [79] Disabled – The auto-reclose function is disabled in the SETTING GROUP
x/PROTECTION Gx/AUTORECLOSE Gx [79] submenu.

There are two menu columns in which the Auto-reclose function can be configured:
● SETTING GROUP x/PROTECTION Gx/AUTORECLOSE Gx [79] – separate
settings for each setting group,
● GLOBAL SETTINGS/ [79] ADVANCED SETTING – common settings for all
setting groups.

The Auto-reclose function of the PowerLogic P1F is available only if the following
conditions are verified:
● The auxiliary contact of the CB status, 52a or 52b, must be connected to the
relay. Refer to the SETTING GROUP Gx/INPUTS CONFIGURATION Gx menu.
● The auto-recloser is ready for operation (neither disabled nor blocked). The
Autoreclose default cell should display: [79]: Ready.
● The trip output relay must be set to Prot.Trip pulse (recommended if an output
contact is used) or/and Protect Trip (if an energy trip output is used) and not
latched in the protection element’s settings (for example I>? Trip-Latch). The
trip output must not be latched either.

167 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Functions and Parameters Protection Relay

● The Close CB Order command must be assigned to the close CB output. The
close contact output must not be latched.
● In the SETTING GROUP x/PROTECTION Gx/AUTORECLOSE Gx [79] menu
all settings are properly configured.

NOTE: If the auxiliary supply is lost during an auto-reclose cycle, the auto-reclose
function is totally disabled.

In addition to [79] AUTORECLOSE Gx settings, the user will be able to fully link the
auto-reclose function to the protection function using the menus:
● SETTING GROUPS x/PROTECTION Gx/[50/51] PHASE O/C Gx,
● SETTING GROUPS x/PROTECTION Gx/[50/51N] E/GND FAULT Gx,
● SETTING GROUPS x/PROTECTION Gx/AUX TIMERS Gx.

Logic Inputs

The auto-reclose function has four inputs that can be assigned to the auto-reclose
logic. These inputs can be mapped to opto-isolated inputs in the SETTING GROUP
x/PROTECTION Gx/INPUTS CONFIGURATION Gx menu. External contacts can
then be wired to these inputs and influence the auto-recloser scheme. These four
logic inputs are:
● one external CB FLT Ext Sign. – external information that CB is not ready to
close (a spring not charged, too low level of CB gas, etc.),
● AUX 1 or AUX 2 assigned to trip and [79] shots – the external starting
commands,
● Block [79] – the external blocking command (for example: an external switch).

Logic Description

The auto-reclose function makes it possible to automatically control the CB’s

reclosing cycles (two, three or four shot cycle, settable using the Close Shot?
Parameter – separate for each protection element (SETTING GROUP
x/PROTECTION Gx/[79] AUTORECLOSE G1(2) menu).

Dead times for all the shots (reclose attempts) can be independently adjusted.

The number of shots is directly related to the types of fault likely to occur on the
system and the voltage level of the system (for instance medium voltage networks).

The Dead Time (tD1, tD2, tD3 and tD4) and the minimum drop-off time start when
the CB has tripped (when the 52a input has dropped off – Start Dead t on 1: CB
trips or the protection element has reset – Start Dead t on 0: Protect.Reset
configuration option). The Dead Time is set to initiate the auto-recloser when the
circuit breaker is opened.

At the end of the relevant dead time the close command (Close CB Order) is
executed and the CB supervision timer is started. The length of this timer is equal to:
tClose Pulse (GLOBAL SETTINGS/CIRCUIT BREAKER) + 150 ms (Auto-reclose
CB Supervision logic). If the CB is not closed after this time-delay, the auto-
recloser is locked out ([79] Lockout) and the Alarm is issued (Alarm CB Time
Monitor).

The reclaim time (Reclaim Time tR) starts when the CB has closed. If the circuit
breaker does not trip again, the auto-reclose function resets at the end of the reclaim
time.

If a protection element operates during the reclaim time, the relay either advances to
the next shot programmed in the auto-reclose cycle, or it locks out (see Inhib.Trip
function description).

168 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Functions and Parameters

The total number of reclosures is displayed in the RECORDS /COUNTERS/

AUTORECLOSE COUNTER menu cell.

Standard Operation

The auto-reclose function provides the ability to automatically control the recloser,
with one, two, three, or four shot cycles. Each cycle implements a dead time and
a reclaim time.

During the auto-reclosing cycle, if the relay receives a command to switch setting
groups, this command is kept in memory, and will be executed only after the timer
elapses.

The auto-reclose function is available if:

● a logical input is assigned to the 52a state (if the CB trips option is set in
submenu: GLOBAL SETTINGS/[79] ADVANCED SETTINGS/Start Dead t on)
● and the trip output relay is not latched to the earth and/or phase protection
element.

In addition to these settings, the user can fully link the auto-reclose function to the
protection function using the menus PROTECTION G1 / Phase OC and
PROTECTION G1/ E/Gnd.

Additional Functions

External CB faulty signal

Most circuit breakers provide one trip-close-trip cycle. A time-delay is necessary for
the CB to return to its nominal state (for example, the spring that allows the circuit
breaker to close should be fully charged). The state of the CB can be checked using
an input assigned to the CB FLT Ext.Sign. function. If the CB FLT Ext.Sign. signal
is detected during Closing time, the Auto-reclose Close Command is interrupted and
blocked and the CB remains open. In this case the Autorecloser will be Lockout by
not successful close command monitored by Auto-reclose CB Supervision logic
(it’s separate function to CB Supervision in GLOBAL SETTINGS/CIRCUIT
BREAKER column). If, on completion of the tCB FLT ext time (GLOBAL
SETTINGS/CIRCUIT BREAKER submenu), the CB FLT ext (Alarm) indicates a
failed state of the CB, a lockout occurs and the CB remains open.

External Starting Commands

Two independent and programmable inputs (AUX1 and AUX2) can be used to
initiate the auto-reclose function from an external device (such as an existing
overcurrent relay). These logic inputs may be used both independently and in
parallel with the overcurrent elements.

Note:

1. The input must be assigned to an AUXx function (SETTING GROUPx/INPUTS

CONFIGURATION Gx),

2. AUXx must be set to Trip (SETTING GROUP x/PROTECTION Gx/AUX TIMERS

Gx/AUXx?) and time-delay tAUXx must be configured (instantaneous: tAUXx set to
0 s),

3.The tAUXx Close Shot cell must be set for every cycle (Close shot).

Internal and External Blocking Commands

169 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Functions and Parameters Protection Relay

The auto-recloser can be blocked by an internal or an external control. It can be

used when protection is needed without requiring the use of the auto-reclose
function.

The external block is executed by the Block. [79] input, Blocking via RS485, [79]
default cell in CTRL line, or temporary blocked after a close command made by an
operator until Time Inhibit tI on Close set in GLOBAL SETTINGS/ [79]
ADVANCED SETTINGS column.

The internal block can be executed by a final trip, a number of valid A/R rolling
demands or an A/R conflict.

A typical example is on a transformer feeder, where the auto-recloser may be

initiated from the feeder protection device but needs to be blocked on the
transformer protection side.

Auto-reclose Output Information

The following output signals can be mapped to an LED (see SETTING GROUP x
/LEDS CONFIGURATION Gx menu) or to output relays (see SETTING GROUP
x/OUTPUT RELAYS CONFIGURATION Gx menu) in order to provide information
about the status of the auto-reclose cycle:
- Auto-reclose cycle in progress
- Final Trip
- Internal block
- External block
- Auto-reclose successful

The following table gives the SETTING GROUP x /LEDS CONFIGURATION Gx

and the SETTING GROUP x/OUTPUT RELAYS CONFIGURATION Gx menus
used to assign the auto-reclose output signal.

LEDs menu Output relays menu

Auto-reclose in progress [79] in Progress [79] in Progress
Final Trip [79] Trip Final [79] F.Trip Final
Internal block [79] Lockout [79] Lockout
External block [79] Blocked [79] Blocked
Auto-reclose successful [79] Success. [79] Success.

Auto-reclose in Progress

The Auto-reclose in progress signal is present during the complete reclosing

cycles from protection initiation to the end of the reclaim time or lockout.

Final Trip

The Final trip signal indicates that a complete auto-reclose cycle has been
performed and that the fault has not been cleared.

The Final trip signal can be reset after a manual closing of the CB after the settable
Inhibit Time tI on Close (GLOBAL SETTINGS/ [79] ADVANCED SETTING)
time-delay or reset via a Reset Command (assigned Binary Input, RS485 Reset
Latched Signaling command, C clear key).

Auto-reclose Inhibit Trip

170 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Functions and Parameters

Freely settable the inhibit of the trip after closing command issued via the [79], set
separately for each protection element:

tI>, tI>>, tI>>>, tIN_1, tIN_2, tIN_3, tAUX1, tAUX2

The trip inhibit is used for following cases:

- e/f protection in neutral-insulated or compensated systems. The [79] can
clear a non-permanent fault in the first cycles. If it will be permanent fault,
there will be no the final trip up to reset of the protection trip. For 4-cycle [79]:
Inhibit Trip 1000 setting. In the first three cycles (000) the trip is executed to
allow fault clearance, but the last one (1) is with inhibition, so no trip is
executed in case of permanent fault).

- application where for example the setting for the I> stage covers more than
the protected zone, so that the [79] can clear faults downstream too, but the
final trip will be executed by the downstream relay or a fuse, therefore in the
upstream relay, tI> should be inhibited – waiting for tI>> trip of the
downstream relay).

Note: for this case Fast Trip O/C function can be used too (see below).

Inhibit Trip setting:

- 0: means that after close via the [79], the protection element trip will be not
inhibited (function is disabled).
- 1: means that after close via the [79], the protection element trip will be
inhibited.

It is recommended to set another protection stage with setting for Alarm only, to
inform that this fault was not cleared by autorecloser so it’s still present (tripping
from this protection element is inhibited). For above case when the auto-reclose is
successful, the reset of inhibition is applied after reset of protection stage (current
below the stage value). For another case when during inhibition of protection
element, another protection element (set to run [79]) makes a trip after going to the
next cycle (the next [79] close command is executed) the inhibition is reset and the
further action depends on the configuration:

if in the next cycle this protection element is still set with inhibition, the protection
element is still inhibited

if in the next cycle this protection element is not set with inhibition, but the fault is still
not cleared, this protection element will trip CB (If another protection element moves
auto-reclose to the next cycle, the inhibition is removed automatically and [79] logic
checks configuration for the next [79] shot).

Auto-reclose Fast Trip

On circuits using time-graded protection, the auto-recloser allows the use of

instantaneous (fast) protection (Fast O/C Trip function in SETTING GROUP
x/PROTECTION Gx/AUTORECLOSE Gx [79] menu) to issue a high speed first trip.
With fast tripping, the duration of the power arc resulting from an overhead line fault
is reduced to a minimum, thus lessening the chance of damage and of the transient
fault developing into a permanent fault. To avoid maloperation because of
transients, it is possible to assign a short time-delay to the fast trip: Fast O/C Trip
Delay setting (SETTING GROUP x/PROTECTION Gx/AUTORECLOSE Gx [79]
menu column) above the typical transient time value. The fast trip can be associated
with phase-to-phase faults (Fast O/C Trip) and/or earth faults (Fast E/Gnd Trip),
separately for every shot in the auto-reclose sequence. If in Fast O/C Trip

171 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Functions and Parameters Protection Relay

configuration the setting for chosen trip shot is ‘ 0 ‘, the trip is executed after the
time-delay of the protection element. If it is set to ‘ 1 ‘, the time-delay set in the Fast
O/C Trip Delay menu cell is applied. In some regions the typical setting of the fast
trip for a 2-shot AR is set:
- Fast O/C Trip (trip shots): 00011 (The first and second trips with Fast O/C
Trip Delay to reduce to minimum the resulting power arc; The third – final
– trip after the time-delay of the protection element to help to ensure the
grading in the power system – trip selectivity)
- Fast E/GND Trip (trip shots): 00000 (all trips re executed after the time-
delays of the protection elements).

Fast O/C Trip – refers to all O/C stages in the PHASE O/C menu column: I>, I>>,
I>>>.

Fast E/GND Trip – refers to all E/GND stages in the PHASE E/GND menu column:
IN_1, IN_2, IN_3.

Fast O/C (E/GND) Trip Delay is associated with a DMT characteristic even if the
protection element is set to an IDMT characteristic. For the fast trip the reset time-
delay of the protection element is not applied.

Auto-reclose Inhibit after Manual Closing

The Inhibit Time tI on Close timer (GLOBAL SETTINGS/[79] ADVANCED

SETTING) can be used to block the auto-reclose cycle being initiated after the CB
has been manually closed onto a fault. The auto-recloser is blocked for the duration
of Inhibit Time tI on Close after a manual CB Closure.

Recloser Lockout

If a protection element operates during the reclaim time, following the final reclose
attempt, the relay will lockout and the auto-reclose function will be disabled until the
lockout condition is reset.

The lockout condition is reset by a manual closing after the Inhibit Time tI on Close
timer elapses.
Additionally, the lockout condition is reset by a reset signaling command (via Inputs,
HMI  key, Remote Reset command),

The auto-recloser can also be locked out using a CB FLT Ext.Sign. input. This
information can be issued from the “not charged” or “Low gas pressure” indications
of CB springs.

Note that the auto-recloser can also be locked out by:

• The fact that the CB does not open after the tBF delay (CB Fail) elapses,
• An operating time longer than the set thresholds,
• Local or remote manual Close or Open command when the auto-reclose is
in progress,
• The Rolling Demand function detects too many auto-reclose shots.
• CB monitoring logic detects abnormal CB position (opened and closed, or
not opened and not closed) for longer than set: Max CB Close or Max CB
Open time.

In the lockout condition the ALARM with the cause: ALARM [79] Lockout is
displayed up to reset of the lockout condition.

Setting Group Change when the auto-reclose is in progress

172 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Functions and Parameters

During the auto-reclose cycle, if the relay receives a command to switch setting
groups, it is executed after the end of auto-reclose action (if auto-reclose is not in
progress).

Rolling Demand

This specific counter avoids frequent operations of a CB in case of intermittent

faults. The numbers of shots can be set from 2 to 100 in the cell Max cycles No.
Rol.Demand, settable over a time period (GLOBAL SETTINGS/[79] ADVANCED
SETTING /Time period Rol.Demand) from 1 min to 24 hours.

The rolling demand is used when a defined number of successful recloses are
performed over a defined time. If it is happened auto-reclose function is Lockout and
he ALARM with the cause: ALARM [79] Roll.Demand is displayed up to reset the
lockout condition.

If after Alarm [79] Rolling Demand signaling, the lockout condition reset is applied,
the recorded number of rolling demand shots are cleared.

Signaling Reset after Close via 79.

In the GLOBAL SETTINGS/ [79] ADVANCED SETTING menu it is possible to set

the signaling reset after a close command executed by the auto-recloser. If
Signaling Reset is set to 1: Close via 79, after the auto-recloser’s close shot
(confirmed by the 52a CB status), signaling (LEDs, display) of the last trip before the
close shot is reset:
- Latched LEDs,
- Trip information on the PowerLogic P1F front panel,
- Electromagnetic Flag Indicators on the Front Panel,
- Latched outputs.

This function signals the final trip only and clears signaling if the CB remains closed
(Auto-reclose is successful). This function is recommended if the P1F is integrated
into a SCADA system or if the substation is rarely supervised by maintenance
personnel. In this case it is not necessary to clear signaling if the fault has
disappeared and the line is healthy.

Note: Reset of signaling and of latched outputs can be done using the General
resetting function.
This configuration can be set in the GLOBAL SETTINGS/LOC submenu:
- LEDs Reset:
- 0: Manual only (via Inputs, HMI  key, Remote Reset command)

- 1: Start protect. (Start of the protection element set to Trip)

- Ltchd Outp.Reset:
- 0: Manual only (via Inputs, HMI  key, Remote Reset command)

- 1: Start protect. (Start of the protection element set to Trip)

The Manual only option helps to prevent a close command from being issued
without readout of the cause of trip by maintenance personnel. It reduces the risk to
switch on to fault.

The Start protect option allows signaling of the latest trip only.

173 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Functions and Parameters Protection Relay

Additional Functions

By default, this function is off.

Settings

Multishot Auto-recloser Settings

Menu Text Authorized Values Default Setting
Auto-reclose? Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Dead Time tD1 0.0… 600 s (step: 0.01 s) 0.2 s
Dead Time tD2 . … s (step . s) 20 s
Dead Time tD3 . … 600 s (step: 0.01 s) 1s
Dead Time tD4 . … s (step . s) 20 s
Reclaim Time tR . … s (step . s) 2s
Menu Text 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 54321
trip shot trip shot
Fast O/C Trip 0-1 (step: 1) 00000
Fast O/C Trip Delay . … . s (step . s) 0.0 s
Fast E/Gnd Trip 0-1 (step: 1) 00000
Fast E/Gnd Trip Delay . … . s (step . s) 0.0 s
Menu Text 4, 3, 2, 1 4321
reclosing shot reclosing shot
Close Shot?
0-1 (step: 1) 0000
tI>
Inhib.Trip
0-1 (step: 1) 0000
tI>: Shot
Close Shot?
0-1 (step: 1) 0000
tI>>
Inhib.Trip
0-1 (step: 1) 0000
tI>>: Shot
Close Shot?
0-1 (step: 1) 0000
tI>>>
Inhib.Trip
0-1 (step: 1) 0000
tI>>>: Shot
Close Shot?
0-1 (step: 1) 0000
tIN_1
Inhib.Trip
0-1 (step: 1) 0000
tIN_1: Shot
Close Shot?
0-1 (step: 1) 0000
tIN_2
Inhib.Trip
0-1 (step: 1) 0000
tIN_2: Shot
Close Shot?
0-1 (step: 1) 0000
tIN_3
Inhib.Trip
0-1 (step: 1) 0000
tIN_3: Shot
Close Shot?
0-1 (step: 1) 0000
tAUX1
Inhib.Trip
0-1 (step: 1) 0000
tAUX1: Shot
Close Shot?
0-1 (step: 1) 0000
tAUX2
Inhib.Trip
0-1 (step: 1) 0000
tAUX2: Shot

Auto-reclose settings, common for Group 1 and Group 2, are available in column:
GLOBAL SETTINGS/[79] Advanced Settings.

174 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Functions and Parameters

[79] Advanced Settings

Menu Text Authorized Values Default Setting
CB FLT Monitor? No
No
Yes
Block.via Input? No
No
Yes
Start Dead t on Protect.Reset
CB trips
CB trips
Rolling Demand? No
No
Yes
Max cycles No.
… (step ) 10
Rol.Demand
Time period Rol.
… mn 10 mn
Demand
Inhibit Time tI
. … . s (step . s) 1.00 s
On Close
Signaling Reset No
No
Close via 79

175 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Functions and Parameters Protection Relay

Negative Sequence Overcurrent (ANSI 46)

Applicable to PowerLogic P1F Series

L N B A E E+

Description

In traditional phase overcurrent protection schemes, overcurrent thresholds must be

set above the maximum load current levels. This limits the sensitivity of the relay.
Most protection schemes also use an earth fault element based on residual current,
which improves sensitivity for earth faults. However, it can happen that some faults
occur and stay undetected by such schemes.

Any unbalanced fault condition will produce negative sequence current. Thus,
a negative phase sequence overcurrent element can detect both phase-to-phase
and phase-to-earth faults.

The negative phase sequence overcurrent element included in the PowerLogic P1F
relays provides one stage non-directional overcurrent protection with independent
time-delay characteristics, which are selectable between inverse definite minimum
time (IDMT) and definite time (DMT). The inverse time-delayed characteristics
support both IEC and IEEE curves. Please refer to Overcurrent Protection Tripping
Curves in this chapter for the detailed description.
This section describes how negative phase sequence overcurrent protection may be
applied in conjunction with standard overcurrent and earth fault protection in order to
solve some application problems.
● Negative phase sequence overcurrent protection is more sensitive to resistive
phase-to-phase faults than phase overcurrent elements, which may not operate.
● In some applications, an earth fault relay may not be able to detect a residual
current because of the configuration of the network. For example, an earth fault
relay connected on the delta side of a delta-star transformer is unable to detect
earth faults on the star side. However, negative sequence current will be present
on both sides of the transformer in any fault condition, independently of the
transformer configuration. Therefore, negative phase sequence overcurrent
element may be used to provide time-delayed back-up protection for any
uncleared asymmetrical faults.
● Where fuses are used to protect motors on rotating machines, a blown fuse
produces a large amount of negative sequence current. This is a dangerous
condition for the machine because negative phase sequence current generates
overheating. Then, a negative phase sequence overcurrent element may be
used to back-up motor protection relays.
● It may also be required to trigger an alarm to announce the presence of negative
phase sequence currents in the system. Operators are then prompted to
investigate the cause of the unbalance.

The negative phase sequence overcurrent elements have a current pick up setting,
I2>, and can be time-delayed using configurable timer tI2>.

The current pick-up stage I2> must be set to a value that is higher than the normal
negative phase sequence current because of the normal unbalance conditions on
the network. This can be done practically during the commissioning, using the
MEASUREMENTS menu of the relay to display the negative phase sequence
current value. Then, this value has to be increased by 20%.

176 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Functions and Parameters

It is essential to set correctly the time-delay associated with this function. It should
also be noted that this element is used primarily as a back-up protection to other
protective devices or to provide an alarm. Therefore, this function is usually set with
a long time-delay.

NOTE: care must be made to help to ensure that the time-delay is set above the
operating time of any other protection device (at minimum fault level) present on the
system and that may react to unbalanced faults, such as:
• Phase overcurrent elements.
• Earth fault elements.
• Broken conductor elements.
• Negative phase sequence influenced thermal protection elements.

The tI2> time-delay associated with the I2> stage can be set under the menu
SETTING GROUP x/PROTECTION Gx/[46] NEGATIVE SEQ. O/C.

Block Diagram
Figure 27. Operating principle diagram for negative sequence overcurrent

Operation

If the I2> protection element is set to Trip, Trip-Inrush Bl or Trip-Latch, it means

that that element is linked to the Protect.Trip and Prot.Trip pulse functions (see
Setting a LED indicators and Setting a Relay Output in chapter Use).

If the I2> protection element is set to Alarm, it means that that element is linked to
the Alarm function (see Setting a LED indicators and Setting a Relay Output
sections in chapter Use).

If Trip-Inrush Bl is selected, the negative sequence overcurrent element is blocked

via the Inrush Blocking function (refer to Inrush Blocking section, page 141).
If Trip-Latch is selected, the negative sequence overcurrent element will remain
high after a trip, until it is reset via a binary input, the HMI or a remote RESET
command.

Additional Functions

By default, this function is off.

177 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Functions and Parameters Protection Relay

Settings

Menu Text Authorized Values Default Setting

I2>? Disabled
Trip
Alarm Disabled
Trip-Inrush BI
Trip-Latch
I2> Threshold . … . In (step . In) 1.0 In
I2> Delay Type DMT
IEC SI
IEC VI
IEC EI
LTI
STI
RC
RI
IEEE MI
IEEE VI
IEEE EI IEC SI
US CO2-P20
US CO8
RXIDG
BNP EDF
US CO2-P40
US CO5
US CO6
US CO7
US CO9
US CO11
tI2> . … s (step . s) 1s
I2> TMS . … .5 s (step: 0.01 s) 1s
I2> Time Dial . … 100 s (step: 0.01 s) 1s
Reset Delay Type I2> DMT
DMT
IDMT
DMT tReset I2> . … s (step: 0.01 s) 0s
RTD/RTMS Reset I2> . … 00 s (step: 0.01 s) 0.02

178 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Functions and Parameters

Broken Conductor (ANSI 46BC)

Applicable to PowerLogic P1F Series

L N B A E E+

Description

Most of the faults that affect a power system occur between one phase and the
earth or between two phases and the earth. These faults are shunt faults and are
caused by lightning discharges and other overvoltages generating flashovers. They
may also arise from birds on overhead lines or mechanical damage on underground
cables, etc.

Such faults lead the current to increase appreciably and therefore they can easily be
detected in most applications. Open circuit faults are a different type of faults that
can happen in electrical networks. These faults can be caused by broken
conductors, blown fuses or maloperation of a pole of a circuit-breaker.

Series faults will not lead to an increase in phase current and therefore they cannot
easily be detected by common overcurrent relays. However, this type of fault
produces an unbalance that creates negative phase sequence current, which can be
detected. The use of negative phase sequence overcurrent is then recommended to
detect such faulty conditions. However, on lightly loaded lines, the value of the
negative sequence current caused by a faulty condition may be very close to, or
even inferior, to the full load steady state unbalance generated by CT errors, load
unbalances, etc. As a consequence, a negative sequence protection element would
not work for low level of loads.

As a solution, the PowerLogic P1F have a protection element that measures the
ratio between the negative and the positive phase sequence current (I2/I1). By using
this ratio rather than only the measured I2, the relay will be able to detect a fault
condition independently of the load level on the power system, since the ratio
remains approximately constant whatever the variations in load current. It is then
possible to have a more sensitive setting.

Block Diagram
Figure 28. Operating principle diagram for broken conductor protection

179 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Functions and Parameters Protection Relay

Operation

The relay incorporates an element that measures the ratio of negative to positive
phase sequence of current (I2/I1). This will be affected to a lesser extent than the
measurement of negative sequence current alone, since the ratio is approximately
constant with variations in load current. Hence, a more sensitive setting may be
achieved. The logic diagram is as shown below. The ratio of I2/I1 is calculated and
compared with the Ratio I2/I1 threshold. If it exceeds the threshold then the time-
delay tBCond is initiated. The Brkn Cond I< block signal is used to disable Broken
Conductor function if the max current value from three phases is too low. The Brkn
Cond I< block undercurrent threshold is settable (GLOBAL SETTINGS/O/C
ADVANCED/[46BC]Brkn.Cond. I< Block.). Factory setting value is 0.1 In.

Additional Functions

By default, this function is off.

Settings

BROKEN CONDUCTOR [46BC] settings

Menu Text Authorized Values Default Setting
Broken Cond.? Disabled
Trip
Alarm Disabled
Trip-Inrush BI
Trip-Latch
Ratio I2/I1 … (step ) 20 %
tBCond . … s (step . s) 100 s

O/C ADVANCED
Menu Text Authorized Values Default Setting
[46BC]Brkn.Cond. I< Block. . … . In (step . In) 0.10 In

Additional Info

The Broken Conductor function can be set to: Trip, Trip-Inrush Bl, Trip-Latch or
Alarm.
If the Broken Conductor element is set to Trip, Trip-Inrush Bl or Trip-Latch, it
means that it is linked to the Protect.Trip and Prot.Trip pulse functions (see LED
configuration, page 308).

If the Broken Conductor element is set to Alarm, it means that it is linked to the
Alarm function (see LED configuration, page 308).

If Trip-Inrush Bl is selected, the I2/I1 threshold is blocked via the Inrush Blocking
function (refer to Inrush Blocking, page 141).

If Trip-Latch is selected, the Broken Conductor element will remain high after a trip,
until it is reset via a binary input, the HMI or a remote RESET command.
NOTE: The Broken Conductor function is inhibited if the value of the current flowing
in each of the three phases is below [46BC]Brkn.Cond I< Block. Undercurrent
threshold (factory setting: 10% of the nominal current).

180 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Functions and Parameters

Switch-On-To-Fault
Applicable to PowerLogic P1F Series

L N B A E E+

Description

In some feeder applications, fast tripping may be required if a fault is still present on
the feeder after the reclosure of the circuit breaker (Close on to fault).

Some faults may not be cleared after a reclose due to the fact that the conditions
that led to the fault have not been removed from the feeder after a reclosing cycle or
a manual trip, or due to earthing clamps left on after a maintenance visit. In these
cases, it may be desirable to clear the fault more quickly, rather than wait for the
DMT or IDMT trip time-delay associated with the involved protection to elapse.

In the case of a CB being manually closed, a switch on to an existing fault may

Enabling and setting the SOTF (Switch-On-To-Fault) function can be done under the
SETTING GROUP x/PROTECTION Gx/SOTF Gx submenu.

Crossing of SOTF threshold will initiate the SOTF function which can be activated
with the following functions:
● closing by Input (Manual Close binary input order),
● manual closing controlled by the HMI, (close key order),
● front panel communication control (HMI order),
● rear communication control (rear RS485 communication port order),

Block Diagram
Figure 29. Operating principle diagram for switch on to fault
Inrush detection (I2h/I1h)
&
SOTF? 2: Alarm
SOTF? 3: Trip-Inrush Bl Alarm

Block.tSOTF Input &

Alarm Recorder
SOTF? 0: disabled & T TIMER 0

Start SOTF Threshold tSOTF>

Time Delay
(0-200s) tSOTF
& SETTING GROUP 1(2)
Rear Com order /PROTECTION/
[50/51] SOTF G1(G2)
52 Unblock.
Close key order SOTF Time
Pulse
OR (0-200s)
HMI order GLOBAL SETTINGS/ Start SOTF
CIRCUIT BREAKER/

Manual Close Input

INSTANTENOUS
& Recorder

RESET LEDs OR Protect. Trip

&
Protect. Trip pulse
SOTF? 4: Trip-Latch &
Fault Recorder
SOTF? 1: Trip OR
SOTF? 3: Trip-Inrush Bl

P0921ENb

181 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Functions and Parameters Protection Relay

Operation

When at least one of the selected signals has been detected, a 52 Ublock.SOTF
Time (GLOBAL SETTINGS/CIRCUIT BREAKER/52 Unblock.SOTF Time
submenu) timer starts to activates SOTF protection element

Once this timer (52 Ublock.SOTF Time) is active and SOTF thresholds have been
crossed, the tSOTF settable time-delay starts. This settable time-delay is particularly
useful in applications where fault selectivity in stages two or three is required.

This time-delay (tSOTF) is also useful in cases where serious transients may be
present, where the three poles of the CB do not all close at the same time and in
cases where the CB may not close instantaneously.

tSOTF can also be considered as a trip time-delay that substitutes itself to the trip
time-delay associated with the crossed threshold so that the tripping time is
accelerated.
If a trip due to switch on to fault occurs during the reclaim time of the ARC, the trip
will be final and the ARC will be locked.

If the SOTF stage is reset before the settable time-delay tSOTF elapses, the SOTF
function is reset.

Additional Functions

By default, this function is off.

Settings

With the Switch-On-To-Fault (SOTF) submenu, it is possible to shorten the time to

trip when for example the relay has detected a fault that is still present on a feeder
after energizing.

The SOTF overcurrent element is activated after the CB’s state changes from open
to closed. SOTF is blocked when the auto-recloser is running (E, E+).

Menu Text Authorized Values Default Setting

SOTF? Disabled
Trip
Alarm Disabled
Trip Inrush Bl (A, E, E+)
Trip Latch (A, E, E+)
SOTF 1.0… 40 In (step: 0.01 In) 4 x In
tSOTF 0.0.… s (step . s) 0.1 s

GLOBAL SETTINGS/CIRCUIT BREAKER/52 Unblock.SOTF Time

Menu Text Authorized Values Default Setting
52 Unblock.SOTF Time . … . s (step . s) 1.00 s

182 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Functions and Parameters

Circuit Breaker Failure (ANSI 50BF)

Applicable to PowerLogic P1F Series

L N B A E E+

Description

When a fault is detected, one or more main protection elements will issue a trip
command to the associated circuit breaker(s). To isolate the fault, and prevent
(further) damage to the power system it is essential that the circuit breaker operates
correctly.

A fault that is not cleared quickly enough threatens the stability of the system. It is
therefore common practice to install circuit breaker failure protection
devices/elements that check that the circuit breaker has opened within a reasonable
period of time. If the fault current has not been eliminated after the set time-delay,
breaker failure protection (CB Fail) will send a signal.

The CB Fail protection element can be used to back-trip upstream circuit breakers to
ensure that the fault is correctly isolated. The CB Fail protection element can also
clear all blocking commands associated with logic selectivity.

Block Diagram
Figure 30. Operation principle diagram for circuit breaker failure
CBF? 0: Disabled

Block.tCB Fail Input

50/51, 46, 46BC,

49 Trip Alarm
&
& CBF? 2: Alarm
& &
50N/51N Trip
& T TIMER 0 Alarm Recorder

Start A I< Threshold CB Fail Time

tBF DMT
Start B I< Threshold SETTING GROUP CB Fail
OR 1(2)

Start C I< Threshold & & /PROTECTION/

[50BF] CB Fail G1(2)

Start IN< Threshold

& Block I>

&
AUX n Trip

& Block IN>

Strt tBF Input

CBF: Block I>? Yes Protect. Trip

CBF: Block IN>? Yes
Protect. Trip pulse

CBF? 1: Retrip &

Fault Recorder

P0927ENb

Operation

The circuit breaker failure protection function incorporates one timer allowing
configuration for the following scenario: upon any protection trip, CB Fail Timer tBF
is started, and normally reset when the circuit breaker opens to isolate the fault. If
breaker opening is not detected, CB Fail Timer tBF times out and closes an output
contact assigned to CB Fail. This contact is used to backtrip upstream switchgear,
generally tripping all infeeds connected to the same busbar section.

The CBF element CB Fail Timer tBF operates for trips triggered by protection
elements within the relay or via an external protection device (binary input). The
latter is achieved by assigning one of the relay opto-isolated inputs to AUX n (B, A,
E, E+) set for tripping or Strt tBF (B, A, E, E+) (depends on the application).

183 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Functions and Parameters Protection Relay

When CBF is triggered by a current-based protection element included in the P1F, it

is reset by an undercurrent element (I<Threshold CBF or IN< Threshold CBF)
only.

When it is triggered via the AUX n (B, A, E, E+) input, CBF is reset by an
undercurrent element.

When it is triggered via the Strt tBF input (B, A, E, E+), CBF is reset by the low
state of this input only.

The Block I>? (E, E+) and Block IN>? (E, E+) settings are used to cancel starts
issued by the overcurrent and earth fault elements, respectively, following a breaker
fail time out. The start is cancelled when the cell is set to Yes.

If the Retrip option is selected for the CB Fail function, it means that it is linked to
the Protect.Trip and Prot.Trip pulse functions (see LED and Output
configuration).
If CB Fail is set to Alarm, any outputs and LEDs assigned to the Alarm or tCBF
function are energized.

If CB Fail is not set to Disabled, any outputs and LEDs assigned to the tCBF
function are energized.

Additional Functions

By default, this function is off.

Settings

Menu Text Authorized Values Default Setting

CBF? Disabled
Retrip Disabled
Alarm
CB Fail Time tBF 0.0… s (step 0.01 s) 0.1 s
I< Threshold CBF . .… .00 In (step: 0.01 In) 0.1 In
IN< Threshold CBF . .… .00 Ien (step: 0.01 Ien) 0.1 Ien
Block I>? No
No
Yes
Block IN>? No
No
Yes

NOTE: One of the following options must be set in order to enable CB Fail
protection:
● Retrip: a retrip signal is issued concurrently with the CB Fail output
(Protect.Trip and Prot.Trip pulse output). The TRIP LED is activated,
● Alarm: typical setting. In case of CB Failure, an alarm is issued concurrently with
the CB Fail output. The Alarm LED is lit.

Additional Info

The CB Fail Timer tBF timer is initiated when a trip command is issued by a
protection element. Note that the trip command can be issued either by a protection
element, or by a logic input (B, A, E, E+) assigned to an AUX counter. Then the
relay monitors the current signal of each phase and compares each phase current
signal with the band zone made by the undercurrent I< threshold. This value can be
set under the SETTING GROUP x/PROTECTION Gx/[50BF] CB FAIL Gx menu.

184 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Functions and Parameters

Communication Orders
Applicable to PowerLogic P1F Series

L N B A E E+

Description

In PowerLogic P1F are available two communication orders commands:

• Comm.Order 1 is used for control of outputs via an RS485 command. The pulse
duration is set at GLOBAL SETTING/COMMUNICATION ORDER/Pulse Time
tCOM1

• Comm.Order 2 is used for control of outputs via an RS485 command (if in

GLOBAL SETTINGS/COMMUNICATION ORDERS/COM2 order Conf.
“0:RS485” or “1:RS485+Button_C” is set) or via pressing “ ” clear ey on the
front panel (if in GLOBAL SETTINGS/COMMUNICATION ORDERS/COM2
order Conf. “2: Button_C” or “1:RS485+Button_C” is set) he pulse duration
set in GLOBAL SETTING/COMMUNICATION ORDER/Pulse Time tCOM2

Settings

Menu Text Authorized Values Default Setting

Pulse Time tCOM1 . … s (step . s) 1.00 s
Pulse Time tCOM2 . … s (step . s) 1.00 s
COM2 Order Conf. 0: RS485
1: RS485+Button C RS485
2: Button C

185 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Functions and Parameters Protection Relay

Circuit Breaker Monitoring

Applicable to PowerLogic P1F Series

L N B A E E+

Description

The PowerLogic P1 protection relay has a condition monitoring function that

supervises circuit breaker (CB) wear. The condition monitoring can provide an alarm
to help prevent a CB maintenance.

The CB condition monitoring measures the breaking current of each CB pole

separately and then estimates CB wear according to the permissible cycle diagram.

Periodic maintenance of circuit breakers is necessary to help to ensure that the trip
circuit and mechanism operate correctly and that the interrupting capability has not
been compromised due to previous fault interruptions. The PowerLogic P1
protection relay records various statistics related to each circuit breaker operation,
allowing an accurate assessment of the circuit breaker condition. Statistics are
recorded to allow evaluation of both the electrical wear of the breaker contacts and
the mechanical wear of the breaker mechanism.

Circuit breaker curve

The permitted CB operation number is defined by a CB permissible operation curve.
This curve is usually available in the documentation of the CB manufacturer. The
curve specifies the permissible number of operations for every level of broken
current.
Figure 41. An example of a circuit breaker permissible operation curve

186 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Functions and Parameters

Point Interrupted current (kA) Number of permitted operations

1 0 (mechanical age) 10000

2 1.25 (rated current) 10000

3 31.0 (maximum breaking current) 80

4 100 1

5 100 1

6 100 1

7 100 1

8 100 1

Two alarms on “Operations left” limit

The CB monitoring function is designed with two alarms, each with two parameters:

• urrent
This parameter can be set to the CB’s nominal current or any typical application
current for the first alarm, and to a typical fault current for the second alarm.

• perations left

his parameter determines when an alarm is activated. hen the “operations left” at
the given current level drops below this limit, the alarm is started.

The permitted operations at these two alarm levels can be calculated automatically
according to the breaker curve and logarithmic interpolation (see next section). Any
actual interrupted current is logarithmically weighted for the two given alarm current
levels and the number of operations left at the alarm points is decreased
accordingly. As shown in the figure below, the PowerLogic P1 protection relay
shows the allowed “operations left” based on the brea er curve, logarithmic
interpolation and actual interrupted current.
Figure 42. Permitted “Operations left” settings for the alarms

Logarithmic interpolation
The permitted number of operations for the currents between the defined points is
logarithmically interpolated using this equation:

a
C=
In
where:
C = permitted operations
I = broken current

a, n = constant according to the following two equations, where ln represents the

natural logarithm function, Ck/Ck+1 is the permitted number of operations defined by

187 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Functions and Parameters Protection Relay

CurveN, Curve(N+1) in the breaker curve table, and Ik/Ik+1 is the corresponding
broken current defined by CurveIk, CurveI(k+1) in the breaker curve table.
a = C k I kn

 C 
ln k 
n =  k +1 
C
I 
ln k +1 
 Ik 
Each time a trip signal is detected, the corresponding permitted operations should
be calculated based on the broken current Ibrk:
a
Cbrk = n
I brk

The corresponding decreased number of operations of the alarm level is calculated

as:
Calarm
Δ=
Cbrk

Example of logarithmic interpolation

According to the equations above and the breaker operation curve points definition
taken from Values of the above circuit breaker wear characteristic graph,

• 10000 operations at 1.25 kA

• 80 operations at 31 kA

if the alarm 2 current setting is 6 kA, then the permitted number of operations can be
calculated as follows:

 10000 
ln 
n= 
80 
= 1.5038
 31000 
ln 
 1250 

a = 10000 12501.5038 = 454 10 6

a 454  10 6
Cbrk = n
= = 945
I brk 60001.5038

Thus, the maximum number of current-breaking operations at 6 kA is 945. A useful

alarm level for “ perations left” could be in this case for example 50, which is about
five percent of the maximum.

If the interrupted three phase currents are L1 = 12.5 kA, L2 = 12.5 kA and L3 = 1.5
kA, the corresponding decreased number of operations of phase L1, L2 for alarm 2
are calculated as:

a 454  10 6
Cbrk 1,2 = n
= = 313
I brk 12500 1.5038

945
Δ= =3
313
In phase L3, the current is less than the alarm limit current 6 kA. For such currents,
the decrement is one.

188 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Functions and Parameters

Five ranges of cumulative current

Each time the CB opens, the broken current is added to the corresponding total
cumulative broken current, phase by phase. The cumulative broken current is given
in (kA)2.

In addition to the total cumulative broken current, there are five cumulative broken
current ranges to assess the breaking device pole condition. Each range’s high limit
value is configurable and the low limit value equals to the high limit of its previous
range. Each range has three different counters, one for each phase, to record how
many times the broken current falls into the range. See figure below.
Figure 43. Cumulative broken current record

The cumulative broken current is also computed by phase. When the PowerLogic
P1 protection relay is in test mode, the cumulative broken current and counters are
not updated.
An alarm signal will be generated when the cumulative broken current of any phase
exceeds the broken current alarm setting.

Mechanical wear
CB Open counter, Protection Trip counter and Rack out counter

he “ B pen” counter is to record the number of B close to open operation. It is

incremented even if the PowerLogic P1 protection relay is in test mode.

he “ rotection rip” counter is to record B open times issued from trip (global
trip). This counter can also be set to a custom value but it does not increment during
test mode.

If, for whatever reason the circuit breaker does not open successfully after the pulse
setting time out (500ms), the trip counters are not incremented.

he “ ac out” counter is to record the number of rac ing in out operations of the
CB truck. It is incremented in test mode.

Open time, close time and charging time

If two different digital signals are used to indicate the 52a and 52b status of the CB
position, the open time is measured from the moment when the “ b” status
becomes false to the moment when the “ a” status becomes true; the close time is
measured from the moment when the “ a” status becomes false to the moment
when the “ b” status becomes true.

However, if the CB position is only configured as 52a or 52b, the open time and
close time will not be recorded.

The charging time is computed from the moment when the CB position changes to
the moment when the spring status changes to ready. The spring status is
configured through CB FLT Ext.Sign_G1 for Setting group 1 and CB FLT
Ext.Sign_G2 for Setting group 2 setting in MATRIX/Inputs configuration.

189 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Functions and Parameters Protection Relay

Totally 8 the last CB open/close times and charging times are recorded in the
PowerLogic P1, each with a timestamp. If the time recorded exceeds the range, the
time will be tagged as an “out of range“, which allows the customer to easily detect
something is wrong with the CB.

These CB open times, close times and charging times are also recorded when the
PowerLogic P1 is in test mode.
Figure 44. Open and close time calculation

Standard Operation

Periodic maintenance of circuit breakers is generally based on a fixed time interval,

or a fixed number of fault current interruptions.

The relays record the following controls and statistics related to each circuit breaker
trip operation:
● time-delay setting
● monitoring time for CB open and close operations
● CB open count
● summation of the current interrupted by the CB
● exponent for the summation
● tripping and closing pulse time

For each circuit breaker trip operation, the relay records statistics. The RECORDS/
COUNTERS/CB Monitoring menu cells shown are counter values only:
● No.CB Close Mon. – number of closing circuit breaker
● No.CB Open Mon. – number of opening circuit breaker
● CB AMPS Value. – sum of the current (in Amps or square Amps) interrupted by
the circuit breaker

The circuit breaker condition monitoring counter increases when it receives:

● a protection trip command (Protect Trip, Prot.Tr pulse),
● an HMI (eSetup Easergy Pro) opening command (Trip CB Order),
● a rear com opening command (Trip CB Order),
● a digital input opening command (Trip CB Order).

In cases where the breaker is tripped by an external protection device it is also

possible to update the CB condition monitoring. This is achieved by assigning one of
the logic inputs or via the communication to accept a trigger from an external device.

Additional Functions

By default, this function is off. Its mean that all counters are incremented, but not
generate alarms. When the functions is enabled all counters are incremented and
generate alarms signals.

190 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Functions and Parameters

Settings

Parameter Value Unit Description Note

CB monitoring status

Last broken current

Phase current IL1 / IL1 A Broken current of phase L1
Phase current IL2 / IL2 A Broken current of phase L2
Phase current IL3 / IL3 A Broken current of phase L3
Cumul. Broken current (kA)2
IL1/CmltvIL1
Cumul. Broken current (kA)2
IL2/CmltvIL2
Cumul. Broken current (kA)2
IL3/CmltvIL3
Alarm

Alarm 1
Current 0.00 – 100.00 kA Alarm1 current level Editable
Cycles 100,000 – 1 Alarm1 limit for operations Editable
left
Alarm 2
Current 0.00 – 100.00 kA Alarm2 current level Editable
Cycles 100,000 – 1 Alarm2 limit for operations Editable
left
Cumulative broken
current setting
High limit / Iprim 0.0 – 100.0 kA High limit setting for each Editable
bin
Broken current alarm 0 – 65,535 Cumulative broken current Editable
setting alarm threshold

191 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Functions and Parameters Protection Relay

Circuit Breaker Status Monitoring

Applicable to PowerLogic P1F Series

L N B A E E+

Description

CB positions can be selected at SETTING GROUP x/INPUTS CONFIGURATION

Gx:
● CB status 52A
● CB status 52B

If two inputs are assigned to both the above inputs, CB status is based on both
indications.

If only one function is used, CB status is based on a single-bit information only (the
second is derived from the first one).

The CB status is indicated on the LCD display in control menu cell as follows:

CB status: Opened
CTRL: No operat.
CB status is used by various protection and monitoring functions (e.g. auto-reclose,
open time etc.) for proper operation.

Example

To binary input 1 is assigned CB status 52a and AUX5

To binary input 2 is assigned CB status 52b and AUX6
To LED 7 is assigned to AUX5
To LED 8 is assigned to AUX6

In the above configuration LED7 indicates the CB closed position and LED8
indicates the CB open position.

192 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Functions and Parameters

Circuit Breaker Supervision

Applicable to PowerLogic P1F Series

L N B A E E+

Description

Periodic maintenance of circuit breakers is generally based on a fixed time interval,

or a fixed number of fault current interruptions, thus PowerLogic P1F relays record
controls and statistics related to each circuit breaker trip or close operation allowing
proper maintenance and operation of substation equipment.

Standard Operation

The relays record the following controls and statistics related to each circuit breaker
trip or close operation:

● monitoring time for CB opening (triggered by the Trip CB order and

Protect.Trip outputs). Operations based on the setting
● time-delay setting for tripping (GLOBAL SETTINGS/CIRCUIT BREAKER/
Max CB Open Time)
If CB opening time is longer than Max CB Open Time the Alarm is issued
(Alarm CB Time Monit.). This function can be activated in the menu: GLOBAL
SETTINGS/CIRCUIT BREAKER/ CB Supervision? 1: Yes,
● monitoring time for CB closing (triggered by the Close CB order output).
Operations based on the setting:
● time-delay setting for closing (GLOBAL SETTINGS/CIRCUIT BREAKER/
Max CB Close Time)

If CB closing time is longer than Max CB Close Time the Alarm is issued
(Alarm CB Time Monit.). This function can be activated in the menu: GLOBAL
SETTINGS/CIRCUIT BREAKER/ CB Supervision: 1: Yes,

● CB open operations counter (triggered by Trip CB order: HMI, Manual Trip

Logic Input, HMI, open control key, rear communication trip command, USB port
(NABE) trip command
● Number of open operations
(RECORDS/COUNTERS/CONTROL COUNTER/No.Trips)

● CB close operations counter (triggered by Close CB order: HMI, Manual Close

ogic Input, H I ‘ lose’ ey, rear communication close command, B port
(NABE) close command)
● Number of close operations
(RECORDS/COUNTERS/CONTROL COUNTER/No. Close)

● protection CB open operations counter (triggered by Protect Trip, Prot.Tr pulse

output)
● Number of CB open operations
(RECORDS/COUNTERS/FAULT COUNTER/No. Fault Trips)

● CB open operations counter monitoring (triggered by the Trip CB order and

Protect Trip, Prot.Tr pulse output function)
● setting threshold (GLOBAL SETTINGS/CIRCUIT BREAKER/MAX CB
Open Time.)

193 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Functions and Parameters Protection Relay

● current value (RECORDS/COUNTERS/CB MONITORING COUNTER/ CB

Oper. Counter).

● summation of the current interrupted by the CB (triggered by the Protect.Trip,

Prot.Tr pulse output function):
● current value (RECORDS/COUNTERS/CB MONITORING COUNTER/CB
AMPS Value),

This function can be activated in menu: GLOBAL SETTINGS/CIRCUIT

BREAKER/CB Diagnostic: 1: Yes.

NOTE: summation of the current interrupted by CB is phase selective, but the

max value from three phases is displayed in menu only. If the new value is
entered, it is applied for all phases.

CB Alarm output function and CB Alarm LEDs function signal is generated if

CB Supervision or CB Diagnostic function detects any problem.
Additionally CB Diagnostic function triggers TCS 52 Fail output function.

CB Alarm output function and CB Alarm LEDs function signal is generated if CB

Supervision or CB Diagnostic function detects any problem.

Additionally CB Diagnostic function triggers TCS 52 Fail output function.

Cause of Alarm Alarm Key setting Alarm Output LED

function Label
The monitoring time CB Max CB Open CB Time CB Alarm CB Alarm
for CB opening Supervision Time Monit.
The monitoring time CB Max CB Close CB Time CB Alarm CB Alarm
for CB closing Supervision Time Monit.
he abnormal B’s CB value: Max CB State of CB Alarm CB Alarm
position for two bits Supervision Close Time CB
B’s connection or
(00 or 11) Max CB Open
Time
CB open operations CB MAX CB Open CB Nb CB Alarm, CB Alarm
counter monitoring Diagnostic No Diagn. TCS 52
Fail
Summation of the CB Max Sum CB Curr, CB Alarm, CB Alarm
current interrupted by Diagnostic AMPS^n Diagn. TCS 52
the CB Fail

Settings

Menu Text Authorized Values Default Setting

CB Supervision? Yes
No
No
Max.CB Open Time . … . s (step . s) 0.1 s
Max.CB Close Time . … . s (step . s) 0.5 s
CB Diagnostic? Yes
No
No
Max.CB Open Nb .… (step ) 0
Max Sum AMPS^n . …. . ^n (step .
0.1 MA^n
MA^n)
’s n .… (step ) 1

194 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Functions and Parameters

Local / Remote Mode

Applicable to PowerLogic P1F Series

L N B A E E+

Description

The Local / Remote Mode function is to make possible blocking commands sent
remotely through communication networks (such as setting parameters, control
commands, etc.), to help to prevent any accidents or maloperation during
maintenance work performed on site.

Standard Operation

PowerLogic P1 can be operated in three modes “Remote”, “Local” and “L+R” (local
and remote) depending on the user selected settings. Main setting is available at
GLOBAL SETTINGS/CIRCUIT BREAKER/Remote CTRL Mode:

0: Remote only – remote control is permitted only. All manual controls (HMI,
Close/Trip function keys, Binary Inputs assigned to Manual Close or Trip) are
blocked.

In Remote only mode the menu default control mode cell looks as follow:

LR Stat.: Remote
CTRL: Remote

Remote only status means that remote control via RS485/USB is possible only
(local control is rejected by PowerLogic P1F).

This control mode can be changed (the second line (CTRL) of menu cell) from
Remote to Local and inversely.

To change from Remote to Local mode it is necessary to press the OK button,

enter Control Password (if set), press OK button (confirm password – if set; and
select changing). Press down or up button to choose Local and confirm with OK
button. After applying above procedure the menu cell looks as follow:

LR Stat.: Local
CTRL: Local

Local status means that local control is possible only. Remote commands via
RS485/USB are rejected by PowerLogic P1F (except the synchronizing time signal,
CTRL: Remote or CTRL: Local, Comms. Order commands).

With Local/Remote control mode functionality the digital input label “Local CTRL
mode“ can be associated. hen this signal is assigned to any digital input then
Local/remote control mode gets following functionality:
● With Local CTRL Mode binary input energized the menu cell looks as follow:

LR Stat.: Local

LR Stat.: Local status means that only local control is possible. It is not possible to
change the control mode from the HMI.
● With Local CTRL Mode binary input deenergized the menu cell looks as follow:

LR Stat.: Remote

195 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Functions and Parameters Protection Relay

LR Stat.: Remote status means that remote control commands can be issued. It is
not possible to change the control mode from the HMI.

1: Remote + Local – remote and local control permitted.

In Remote + Local mode the menu default control mode cell looks as follow:

LR Stat.: L+R
CTRL: Remote

Remote only status means that both the local (HMI, control buttons on the front
panel, binary inputs) and remote control (RS485/USB) is possible.

This control mode can be changed (the second line (CTRL) of menu cell) from L+R
to Local and inversely.

LR Stat.: Local
CTRL: Local

Local status means that local control is possible only

ith ocal emote control mode functionality the digital input label “Local CTRL
mode“ can be associated. When this signal is assigned to any digital input then
Local/remote control mode gets following functionality:
● With Local CTRL Mode binary input energized the menu cell looks as follow:

LR Stat.: Local

LR Stat.: Remote

LR Stat.: Remote status means that remote control commands can be issued. It is
not possible to change the control mode from the HMI.

Settings

Local / remote parameters can be selected at GLOBAL SETTING /CIRCUIT

BRAKER/ Remote CTRL Mode:

Menu Text Authorized Values Default Setting

Remote CTRL Mode 0: Remote only 0: Remote only
1: Remote+LOC

196 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Functions and Parameters

Setting Group Selection

Applicable to PowerLogic P1F Series

L N B A E E+

Description

PowerLogic P1 relays have two protection setting groups called PROTECTION G1

and PROTECTION G2. Only one group is active at a time.

Standard Operation

If a group is used in an application it is not possible to remove the other group from
the menu. If one group only is chosen the relay uses Group 1 even if the other
parameters are set to Group 2 (Inputs(B, A, E, E+), Menu, Remote Group Setting).
Switching between groups can be done via:

● the selected binary input (B, A, E, E+) assigned to the Setting Group 2 logic
input (SETTING GROUP x/INPUTS CONFIGURATION Gx submenu)
● the relay front panel interface (GLOBAL SETTINGS/SETTING GROUP
SELECT/ Setting Group: 1: Group1 or 2: Group2),
● through the communications port (refer to the Mapping Database for detailed
information).

Switching between setting groups can be done even while a protection function is
active, but it resets all timers, LEDs on P1F front panel).

The user can check which one of the setting groups is active in the menu OP
PARAMETERS/Active Set Group cell.

The user can also assign the active group (Setting Group x function) to an output
relay (SETTING GROUP x/OUTPUT RELAYS CONFIGURATION Gx) or to an LED
(SETTING GROUP x/LEDs CONFIGURATION G1).

Setting group change via a digital input

It is possible to change the setting group by energizing a digital input (B, A, E, E+)
(operates on level: logic input is low – setting group 1, logic input is high – setting
group 2).

If the setting group switchover is done via a binary input (B, A, E, E+), the change
from Group 1 to Group 2 is executed after the set time-delay: t Change Setting G1
->G2 (GLOBAL SETTINGS/SETTING GROUP SELECT) (B, A, E, E+). The
switching from Group 2 back to Group 1 is instantaneous.

NOTE: If the digital input that has been assigned to the setting group change
operates on level (low or high), it is not possible to change the setting group via
remote communications.

Switching between Active Groups via a Binary Input (B, A, E, E+)

When powering up the relay, the selected group (Group 1 or Group 2) corresponds
to the state of the logic input assigned to Setting Group 2. This means:

A – Reverse Inp.Logic = 0 and Setting Group 2 = 1

(SETTING GROUP x/INPUTS CONFIGURATION Gx submenu).

197 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Functions and Parameters Protection Relay

If the programmed logic input starts being supplied with +V, then after the t Change
Setting G1->G2 time-delay the active group will be G2. If the programmed logic
input is not supplied with +V, the active group will be G1.

B – Reverse Inp.Logic = 1 and Setting Group 2 = 1

(SETTING GROUP x/INPUTS CONFIGURATION Gx submenu).
If the programmed logic input is supplied with +V, then the active group will be G1. If
the programmed logic input stops being supplied with +V , then after the t Change
Setting G1->G2 time-delay the active group will be G2.
NOTES:
● Binary Input configuration is associated with both Setting Groups, so that if in a
Setting Group the selected binary input is assigned to Setting Group 2, in the
other group it must be set to Setting Group 2 as well, otherwise no switch will
occur.
● If the PowerLogic P1F is powering up (from the currents or the auxiliary voltage)
and Group 2 is selected via a binary input, the t Change Setting G1->G2 time-
delay is ignored (changing to setting group 2 is instantaneous – without time-
delay).
● The setting group switch is based on the level of the binary input. So as long as
Setting Group 2’s logic signal is high, the PowerLogic P1F uses Setting Group 2.

If the programmed logic input is supplied with +V, then the active group will be G1.
If the programmed logic input stops being supplied with +V , then after the t Change
Setting G1->G2 time-delay the active group will be G2.

Switch between Active Groups via the Menu or a Remote Command (RS485,
USB)

By using the relay front panel interface it is possible to change the active setting
group:

1: Group 1 or 2: Group 2 (menu cell: GLOBAL SETTINGS/SETTING GROUP

SELECT/ Setting Group).

This menu cell is commonly used for switching groups from the front panel interface
and via a remote command (RS485 or USB).

It means that if the GLOBAL SETTINGS/SETTING GROUP SELECT/ Setting

Group menu cell is set to 1: Group 1 and the remote setting group 2 command is
executed, the value of menu cell: GLOBAL SETTINGS/SETTING GROUP
SELECT/ Setting Group will be changed to 2: Group 2 (Active group: 2).
Setting group 1 will be applied if:
● 1: Group 1 is set in the GLOBAL SETTINGS/SETTING GROUP SELECT/
Setting Group menu cell from the relay’s front panel interface,
● the remote setting group 1 command is executed. The value of the GLOBAL
SETTINGS/SETTING GROUP SELECT/ Setting Group menu cell will then be
changed to 1: Group 1
Priority

NOTE: If the digital input that has been assigned to the setting group change
operates on level (low or high), it is not possible to change the setting group via
neither remote communications nor the front panel.

The detailed logic table for setting group selection is shown below:

198 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Functions and Parameters

Binary Input Setting Front Panel and Active Group

Group 2 (ABE) Remote Setting
Not configured G1 G1
Not configured G2 G2
G1 G1 G1
G1 G2 G1
G2 G1 G2
G2 G2 G2

NOTE: If a setting group change initiated by a remote command has not been
effected due of priority settings, that command is ignored (not recorded in the P1F’s
logic for the future, when priority settings allow changing).

It is possible to assign an Active Group state to an output contact by setting the

output contact to the Setting Group x output (SETTING GROUP x/OUTPUT
RELAYS CONFIGURATION Gx).

If Active Group signaling is required, some LEDs should be assigned to the Setting
Group x function (SETTING GROUP x/LEDs CONFIGURATION Gx).

Settings

Setting group select parameters can be selected at GLOBAL SETTINGS/SETTING

GROUP SELECT:

Menu Text Authorized Values Default Setting

Setting Group Group 1 Group 1
Group 2
t Change Settings 0.00 to 200 s, (step 0.00 s
G →G (B, A, E, E+) 0.01 s)
Copy Settings No Operation No Operation
opy G →G
opy G →G

199 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Functions and Parameters Protection Relay

Commissioning Mode
Applicable to PowerLogic P1F relays

L N B A E E+

Description

Commissioning Mode in PowerLogic P1F relays (A, E, E+) has three modes:
Maintenance mode, Output tests and Functional test, amongst which the last two
are available only if Maintenance mode is active.

Maintenance Mode

Maintenance mode menu allows the user to check the operation of the protection
functions.

It is possible to set following Maintenance mode options (settings):

● No – maintenance mode is disabled. All window cells below are hidden
(Maintenance mode is the latest cell in COMMISIONING column).
● Yes – maintenance mode is enabled. In this mode all test cells in
COMMISIONING column are shown. During the tests outputs are energized
(control of outputs are not blocked).
● Yes – Bl.Out. – maintenance mode is enabled and all test cells in
COMMISIONING column are shown. In this mode, the high state of output
functions are ignored (control of outputs are blocked)

This option allows the user to check the operation of the protection functions without
actually sending any external command (Tripping or signaling).

Independently on the rear protocol selected in menu (Modbus RTU or IEC 60870-5
-103), transmission of information to SCADA is active with additional information to
know that PowerLogic P1F is in Maintenance mode (refer to Communication chapter
and IEC 60870-5-103 standard).

Changing of setting from No to Yes or Yes – Bl.Out. from the front panel activate
this mode for 10 minutes only. After this time setting is automatically switched to No.

The selection of the maintenance mode is possible by logic input (the level), control
command (rear or front port), or by front panel HMI. The maintenance mode is
terminated by:
● Low state of logic input assigned to Maintenance mode function.
● Control command which activate this mode (rear command or setting: Yes,
Yes – Bl.Out. ) and by turning off the power supply.

NOTE: Maintenance rear command is available in Modbus protocol only.

Maintenance Mode
1: Yes

It is possible to assign the state of Maintenance mode to programmable LEDs.

In Yes – Bl.Out. case, all the output contacts are blocked, and no command can be
issued to these contacts, even if a protection threshold associated with one of these
output contacts has been crossed. (If a protection threshold is crossed, all
associated LEDs will be ON, even the TRIP LED, if protection element is set to
Trip).

200 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Functions and Parameters

If the input assigned to Maintenance mode is logical high the Maintenance Mode is
active (without any time limitation) up to low state of the logical input.

Outputs Test

This function is available after activation of Maintenance mode – setting Yes.

The commissioning cells allow the user to check the external wiring to the relay’s
output contacts. To do this, the user has only to set to 1 the desired output contact’s
corresponding bit, and this will close the contact and allow the continuity of the
wiring to be checked.
Test 7654321
Pattern 0000000

In the cell below, the contact test time can be set:

Contact Test
Time 1.00s

If the outputs for test are selected and Time for output closing is set, the closing
command can be executed in this cell:
Test output
0: no operation

To execute the test, press OK key, select 1: Apply test and confirm action by OK.
The contact will be closed for the duration of the Contact Test Time pulse.

Functional Test

This function is available after activation of Maintenance mode.

This functionality is used to check the functional outputs of the PowerLogic P1F. To
do this, the user has only to select which protection element will be triggered, and
this will close the contact assigned to this protection element and allow the continuity
of the wiring to be checked. If the protection element is disabled there will be no
action.
Functional Test
0: I>

In the cell below the end of the functional test can be configured:
Functional Test
End 0: CB trip

The following options are possible:

● 0: CB trip – after triggering the functional test, the test is interrupted after trip
command.
● 1: Time – the protection element will be triggered for the duration of the pulse
time.

If the 1: Time option is selected it is necessary to set the pulse length:

Functional Test
Time 01.00s

The next cell is used for functional test execution:

Functional Test
0: no operation

201 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Functions and Parameters Protection Relay

To execute this test, press the OK key, select 1: Operate and confirm action by
pressing OK. The contact will be closed for the duration of the Functional Test
Time pulse.

NOTE: In Maintenance mode PowerLogic P1F works with full functionality (ready to
trip in a fault condition, even during functional test). During functional test of selected
stage (for example tI>), P1F measures currents so the rest active stages (for
example tI>>, tIN>, etc) work on the measured current from the field. Only the tested
stage (for example tI>) sees test current: two times greater than tI> current setting
value in all phases. After functional test of Thermal replica, the thermal value is set
to 0%. After test, in the fault record all recorded current values are based on the
currents measured in the field.

If Functional Test will be applied for protection element which is disabled there will
be no any action done.

202 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Functions and Parameters

Real Time Clock Synchronization via Opto-Inputs

Applicable to PowerLogic P1F relays

L N B A E E+

Description

In modern protective schemes it is often desirable to synchroni e the relay’s real

time clock so that events from different relays can be placed in chronological order.
This can be done using the communication interface connected to the substation
control system or via a binary input.

Any of the available binary inputs on the PowerLogic P1F relay can be selected for
synchronization. Pulsing this input will result in the real time clock snapping to the
nearest minute.

Recommended pulse duration is 20 ms, repeated no more than once per minute.

Standard Operation

The example of time synchronization function is shown in table below:

Time of “Sync. Pulse” Corrected Time

19:47:00.000 to 19:47:29.999 19:47:00.000
19:47:30.000 to 19:47:59.999 19:48:00.000

NOTE: The above assumes a time format of hh:mm:ss

The input is configured in the SETTING GROUP x/INPUTS CONFIGURATION Gx

menu. The input must be assigned to the Time Synchr. Input.

203 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Functions and Parameters Protection Relay

Resetting of Latched LEDs and Outputs

Applicable to PowerLogic P1F relays

L N B A E E+

Description

The way or resetting the latched LEDs and outputs is determined by the inputs
assigned to the resetting of latched LED. Outputs can be reset via external inputs,
by pressing the R key on the PowerLogic P1F’s front panel if the LCD shows the
default display or via the communication port.

NOTICE
Resetting of LEDs and relay outputs is impossible if reason of the triggering
and/or tripping any protections or functions still exist (e.g. trip signal occurred, but
CB is closed and fault current flowing thru analog inputs of the relay).
In this case if R button was pushed on the relay LCD is displayed following
window:

It is mean that reset of the LEDs and outputs in this moment is impossible.

Standard Operation

The resetting configuration can be entered in the GLOBAL SETTINGS/LOC menu:

● LEDs Reset:
● 0: Manual only (via Inputs, HMI (R key), Remote Reset command)

● 1: Start protect. (Start of a protection element set to Trip)

● 2: Close Command (Resetting of latched LEDs upon Close Command
applied by PowerLogic P1F)

● Ltchd Outp.Reset:

● 0: Manual only (via Inputs, HMI (R key), Remote Reset command)

● 1: Protect.Start (Start of a protection element set to Trip)

● 2: Close Command (Resetting of latched LEDs upon Close Command

applied by PowerLogic P1F)
● Trip Info Reset:

● 0: Manual only (via Inputs, HMI (R key), Remote Reset command)

● 1: Protect.Start (Start of a protection element set to Trip)

● 2: Close Command (Resetting of latched LEDs upon Close Command
applied by PowerLogic P1F)

● Alarms Info.:

● 0: Self Reset – This option means that if an alarm signal has disappeared
no information is available in the ALARM STATUS column

204 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Functions and Parameters

● 1: Manual Reset – this option means that if an alarm signal has

disappeared information is still available in the ALARM STATUS column
until it is reset in the ALARM STATUS/Alarm Reset cell.

The Manual only option helps to prevent a close command from being issued
without readout of the cause of trip by maintenance personnel. It reduces the risk to
switch on to fault.

The Start protect and Protect.Start options allows to signal the latest trip only:
Start of any protection element set to trip the CB, reset all latched LEDs and show
the default display.

Settings

Resetting method of latched LEDs can be selected at GLOBAL SETTINGS/LOC:

Menu Text Authorized Values Default Setting

LEDs Reset Manual only Manual only
Start protect.
Close command
Ltchd Outp.Reset Manual only Manual only
Protect.Start
Close command
Trip Info Reset Manual only Manual only
Protect.Start
Close command
Alarms Info Self Reset Self Reset
Manual Reset

205 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Functions and Parameters Protection Relay

Fault and Alarm Records

Applicable to PowerLogic P1F relays

L N B A E E+

Description

The specified, for each type of PowerLogic P1F series, data is recorded for any
relevant elements that operated during a fault or an alarm. The recorded data can
be viewed in each of the last 20 fault records for fault elements and 5 records for
alarm elements.

Standard Operation

Each fault and alarm record is generated with time stamp.

Both fault and alarm records are stored in non-volatile memory (FRAM memory).
This type of memory does not require any maintenance (no battery inside the
PowerLogic P1F is required). Fault records are stored without any time limitation
even if the PowerLogic P1F is not supplied from any power source.

● Fault records
The following data is recorded for any relevant elements that operated during
a fault, and can be viewed in each of the last 20 fault records:

● Event Text (the reason for a trip):

2> trip
I>> trip
I>>> trip
SOTF trip (A, B, E, E+)
IN_1 trip
IN_2 trip
IN_3 trip (E, E+)
I2> trip (E, E+)
Brkn Cond (E, E+) trip
CB Fail trip
AUX1 trip (B, A, E, E+)
AUX2 trip (B, A, E, E+)
AUX3 trip (B, A, E, E+)
AUX4 trip (B, A, E, E+)
Therm OL (N, A, B, E, E+)

● Active setting Group

● Fault Time an Fault Date

● Fault Origin: type of fault (for example: phase A-B, A-B-C, etc.)

● Event Value:
Per phase record of the current value during the fault:
I , and ( o) φ

206 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Functions and Parameters

● Alarm records

The following data is recorded for any relevant elements that operated during an
alarm, and can be viewed in each of the last 5 alarm records:

● Event Text (the reason for a protection alarm):

tI> Alarm
tI>> Alarm
tI>>> Alarm
tSOTF Alarm (B, A, E, E+)
tIN_1 Alarm
tIN_2 Alarm
tIN_3 Alarm (E, E+)
tI2> Alarm (E, E+)
tBrkn Cond Alarm (E, E+)
tCB Fail Alarm
tAUX1 Alarm (B, A, E, E+)
tAUX2 Alarm (B, A, E, E+)
tAUX3 Alarm (B, A, E, E+)
tAUX4 Alarm (B, A, E, E+)
tTherm OL Alarm (N, A, B, E, E+)

● Active setting Group

● Alarm Time an Alarm Date

● Alarm Origin: type of alarm (for example: phase A-B, A-B-C, etc.)

● Event Value:
Per phase record of the current value during the fault:
I , and ( o) φ

207 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Functions and Parameters Protection Relay

Instantaneous Records
Applicable to PowerLogic P1F relays

L N B A E E+

Description

Each time any of set thresholds are crossed, an instantaneous record is created and
displayed in the RECORDS/INSTANTANEOUS RECORD menu. The last five
starting records are available, with the duration of the signal.

The following information is displayed in the RECORDS/INSTANTANEOUS

RECORD menu: number of starts, time, date, origin (crossing of a current threshold
or start of a protection element’s time-delay), current values.
The recorder stores data of the last 5 instantaneous records.

Standard Operation

Each instantaneous record is generated with time stamp.

Instantaneous record are stored in non-volatile memory (FRAM memory). This type
of memory does not require any maintenance (no battery inside the PowerLogic P1F
is required). Instantaneous record is stored without any time limitation even if the
PowerLogic P1F is not supplied from any power source.

208 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Functions and Parameters

Alarm Status
Applicable to PowerLogic P1 Series

L N B A E E+

Description

The Alarm status function presents the current Alarm signals.

Standard Operation

The Alarm signals information can be realized with latching or without latching,
depending on the GLOBAL SETTINGS/LOC/Alarms Info value:

● 0:Self-reset – only current Alarm status is displayed,

● 1:Manual Reset – Alarm information is latched up, to reset via cell ALARM
STATUS/Reset Press ENTER cell.

The following Alarm statuses can be displayed:

Time of “Sync. Pulse” Corrected Time

tI> Alarm Alarm by the first phase overcurrent stage
tI>> Alarm Alarm by the second phase overcurrent stage
tI>>> Alarm Alarm by the third phase overcurrent stage
tSOTF Alarm (B, A, E, E+) Alarm by SOTF element
tIN_1 Alarm Alarm by the first earth fault overcurrent stage
tIN_2 Alarm Alarm by the second earth fault overcurrent stage
tIN_3 Alarm (E, E+) Alarm by the third earth fault overcurrent stage
tI2> Alarm (E, E+) Alarm by the negative sequence overcurrent element
tBrkn Cond Alarm Alarm by Broken Conductor protection
CB Fail Alarm Circuit Breaker Failure protection time-delay elapsed
tAUX1 Alarm (B, A, E, E+) tAUX1 time-delay elapsed
tAUX2 Alarm (B, A, E, E+) tAUX2 time-delay elapsed
tAUX3 Alarm (B, A, E, E+) tAUX3 time-delay elapsed
tAUX4 Alarm (B, A, E, E+) tAUX4 time-delay elapsed
Thermal Overload Alarm (N, A, B, Thermal Alarm stage crossed by actual Thermal State value
E)
tCB FLTY Ext.Sign. Alarm An input mapped to this function detects CB problems that may
influence control possibilities (for example spring problem,
insufficient pressure, etc.)
Inrush Bl. Alarm. (A, E, E+) Inrush Blocking (the second harmonic level crossing threshold)
TC Supervision Alarm. (A, E, E+) Trip Circuit Supervision detects a problem
CB Time Monit. Alarm. (A, E, E+) The monitoring time for CB opening/closing
CB Curr.Diagn. Alarm. (A, E, E+) Summation of the current interrupted by the CB
CB Nb Diagn. Alarm. (A, E, E+) CB open operations counter monitoring
[79] Lockout Alarm (E, E+) Auto-recloser lockout condition
Hardw.Warning Alarm Any hardware problem detected
State of CB Alarm (A, E, E+) he abnormal B’s position for two bits B’s connection ( or
11)
[79] Roll.Demand Alarm (E, E+) The number of Autoreclose cycles in the defined (set) time
window is greater than set value

209 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Functions and Parameters Protection Relay

Event Records
Applicable to PowerLogic P1F relays

L* N B A E E+
*event recorder is not available if model L is not equipped with RS485
communication port (hardware option).

Description

The PowerLogic P1F relay records and time tags up to 200 events and stores them
in non-volatile FRAM memory. This enables the system operator to establish the
sequence of events that occurred within the relay following a particular power
system condition, switching sequence etc. When the available space is exhausted,
the oldest event is automatically overwritten by the most recent one.

The real time clock within the relay provides the time tag for each event, with a
resolution of 1 ms.
The event records are available for remote viewing, via the communications ports
RS485 or USB.
For extraction from a remote source via communications ports, refer to the SCADA
Communications section where the procedure is fully explained.

Standard Operation

Any event may be a change of state of a control input or output relay, a trip
condition, etc.

The following sections show the various items that constitute as an event:

● Change of state of binary inputs (B, A, E, E+)

If one or more of the binary inputs has changed state since the last time that the
protection algorithm ran, the new status is logged as an event. The information
is available if the event is extracted and viewed via a PC.

● Change of state of one or more output relay contacts

If one or more of the output relay contacts have changed state since the last
time that the protection algorithm ran, then the new status is logged as an event.
The information is available if the event is extracted and viewed via PC.

● Relay alarm conditions

Any alarm conditions generated by the relays will also be logged as individual
events. The following table shows examples of some of the alarm conditions and
how they appear in the event list:

Alarm Condition Event Text Event Value

Auxiliary Supply Fail Vx Fail ON/OFF Bit position 0 in 32 bit field

The above table shows the abbreviated description that is given to the various
alarm conditions and also a corresponding value between 0 and 31. This value
is appended to each alarm. It is used by the event extraction software, such as
eSetup , to identify the alarm. Either ON or OFF is shown after the description to
signify whether the particular condition is operational or has reset.

210 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Functions and Parameters

● Protection element trips

Any operation of protection elements (a trip condition) will be logged as an event

record, consisting of a text string indicating the operated element and an event
value. Again, this value is intended for use by the event extraction software,
such as eSetup Easergy Pro.

211 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Functions and Parameters Protection Relay

Measurements and Related Settings

Applicable to PowerLogic P1F Relays

L N B A E E+

Description

For the convenience of an operator and substation maintenance process the

PowerLogic P1F relay produces a variety of directly measured power system
quantities.

Standard Operation

The directly measured power system quantities available in PowerLogic P1F relay
are listed below:
IA, IB, IC - R.M.S. values
I1 (E, E+) - calculated positive (I1)
I2 (E. E+) - calculated negative (I2)
I2/I1 (E, E+) - calculated negative to positive ratio
IN - measured fundamental harmonic only
(E/F analogue input)
Thermal (N, B, A, E, E+) - thermal state based on RMS value from
the max phase current
IA 2nd harmonic (A, E, E+) - second harmonic in phase A
IB 2nd harmonic (A, E, E+) - second harmonic in phase B
IC 2nd harmonic (A, E, E+) - second harmonic in phase C

NOTE: All the measured current values depends on the CT Ratio setting (GLOBAL
SETTINGS/CT RATIO). The typical deviations of measurements for phase and
earth currents is ±2% at In and ±2% at Ien.

Standard Operation

The following settings under the measurements heading can be used to configure
the relay measurement function:

● CT Ratio setting – responsible for phase and earth currents transformer input’s
primary and secondary current ratings, can be found in: GLOBAL
SETTINGS/CT RATIO menu.

● Default Measuring Window – displayed after connection of power supply to

PowerLogic P1 or after resetting of signaling, can be found in: GLOBAL
SETTINGS/ LOC menu.

● Measurement criteria – the LOC submenu makes it possible to set parameters

associated with this function (fundamental harmonic (1. Harm.) or true RMS
(True RMS)): GLOBAL SETTINGS/LOC menu.

212 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Functions and Parameters

Counters
Applicable to PowerLogic P1F Relays

L N B A E E+

Description

The PowerLogic P1F’s counters gather information on the vast number of various
events during relay operation, e.g.: manual trip commands, trip commands from
protection elements, hardware problems detected by the self-monitoring function,
auto-recloser starts, etc.

Standard Operation

The PowerLogic P1F’s counters are available in the RECORDS/COUNTERS menu:

● CONTROL COUNTER:
● No. Trips – number of manual trip commands (inputs, menu default control
window, control key, remote control via RS485 or USB).
● No. Close – Number of manual close commands (inputs, menu default
Control Window, control key, remote control via RS485 or USB).
Counters can be reset in the CONTROL COUNTER column – Counter Reset
cell.

● FAULT COUNTER:
● No. Fault Trips – number of trip commands from protection elements
(current based protection element trip, AUX trips and Auto-recloser trips).
● No. Fault Starts – Number of timer starts by protection elements set to trip
(current-based protection element and AUX).
● No. Alarms – number of Alarm signals from protection elements set to
Alarm or functions mapped to an Alarm signal.
● No. HW Warnings – Number of hardware problems detected by the self-
monitoring function.

Counters can be reset in the FAULT COUNTER column – Counter Reset cell.

● AUTORECLOSE COUNTER (E, E+):

● No. [79] Action Total – total number of Auto-recloser starts.
● No. Trips&Lockout Total – total number of final trips or lockouts.
● No. Successful Total – total number of successful auto-reclosures (the
reclaim time has elapsed without tripping).
● Cycle 1 Reclose No. – number of first shots (the counter is incremented
with each first close shot, even if the following trip occurs during the reclaim
time).
● Cycle 2 Reclose No. – number of second shots (the counter is incremented
with each second close shot, even if the following trip occurs during the
reclaim time).
● Cycle 3 Reclose No. – number of third shots (the counter is incremented
with each third close shot, even if the following trip occurs during the reclaim
time).
● Cycle 4 Reclose No. – Number of fourth shots (the counter is incremented
with each fourth close shot, even if the following trip occurs during the
reclaim time).

213 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Functions and Parameters Protection Relay

Counters can be reset in the AUTORECLOSE COUNTER column – Counter

Reset cell.

NOTE: For a 4-shot auto-reclose sequence (TCTCTC, the next TCTC, the next
TCTCTCTCT and the next TCT (lockout)) the counters shows:

Total [79] action: 4

Total Trips&Lockout: 1
Total Successful: 2
Cycle 1 Reclose: 4
Cycle 2 Reclose: 3
Cycle 3 Reclose: 2
Cycle 4 Reclose: 1
● CB MONITORING COUNTER (A, E, E+):
For complete description see: Circuit Breaker Monitoring subchapter, page 186
● SPRING CHARGING TIME COUNTER
For complete description see: Circuit Breaker Monitoring subchapter, page 186
● OPERATING TIME COUNTER
For complete description see: Circuit Breaker Monitoring subchapter, page 186
● CUMULATIVE BREAKING CURRENT
For complete description see: Circuit Breaker Monitoring subchapter, page 186
● RACINH IN/OUT COUNTER
For complete description see: Circuit Breaker Monitoring subchapter, page 186

214 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Functions and Parameters

Disturbance Records
Applicable to PowerLogic P1F Relays

L N B A E E+

Description

The PowerLogic P1F’s integral disturbance recorder has an area of memory

specifically set aside for record storage. The number of records that may be stored
by the relay is dependent upon the selected recording duration.

Standard Operation

The total number of records available in PowerLogic P1F’s models A, E disturbance

recorder is:
● 1 – for set Max Record Time in range of: 2.51s – 4.00s
● 2 – for set Max Record Time in range of: 1.67s – 2.50s
● 3 – for set Max Record Time in range of: 1.26s – 1.66s
● 4 – for set Max Record Time in range of: 1.01s – 1.25s
● 5 – for set Max Record Time in range of: 0.10s – 1.00s
NOTE: For models A, E the maximum recording time is 4 s.

The total number of records available in PowerLogic P1F’s model E+ (with Vo)
disturbance recorder is:
● One – for set Max Record Time from in range: 2.51s – 3.00s
● Two – for set Max Record Time from in range: 1.67s – 2.50s
● Three – for set Max Record Time from in range: 1.26s – 1.66s
● Four – for set Max Record Time from in range: 1,01s – 1.25s
● Five – for set Max Record Time from in range: 0.10s – 1,00s

NOTE: For model E+ the maximum recording time is 3 s.

NOTE: The maximum number of records is 5.

The recorder stores actual samples that are taken at a rate of 16 samples per cycle.
The recording is in COMTRADE format. Each disturbance record consists of eight
analog data channels and thirty-two digital data channels. The relevant CT ratio for
the analog channels are also extracted to enable scaling to primary quantities.

NOTE: If a CT ratio is set to less than a unit, the relay will choose a scaling factor of
zero for the appropriate channel.

Settings

The GLOBAL SETTINGS/DISTURBANCE RECORDER menu column is shown in

the following table:

Menu Text Authorized Values Default Setting

Pre-Time . … . s (step . s) 0.10 s
Post-Fault Time . … . s (step . s) 0.10 s
Disturb.Rec.Trig. 0: on Inst.
0: on Inst.
1: on Trip
Max Record Time . … . s (step . s) (A, E)
1.0 s
. … . s (step . s) (E+)

It is not possible to display the disturbance records locally on the LCD; they must be
extracted using suitable software such as eSetup Easergy Pro.

215 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Communication Protection Relay

Communication
Introduction
Applicable to PowerLogic P1F Series

L* N B A E E+
*hardware option

Purpose of this document

This document describes the characteristics of the different communication protocol

of PowerLogic P1F relay.

The available communication protocols of PowerLogic P1F relay are as follows:

• MODBUS.

• IEC 60870-5-103.

NOTE:

This document shows all available functions in P1F. To see which function are
available in model refer to the rest chapters/sections of this manual.

For example: disturbance recorder is available in model A, E and E+ only, etc.

Glossary

IA, IB, IC : currents measured on the concerned phases (A, B, C)

IN : residual current measured by earth input (= 3Io zero sequence)
pf : soft weight of a word of 16 bits
PF : heavy weight of a word of 16 bits.

216 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Communication

MODBUS PROTOCOL
PowerLogic P1F relay can communicate by a RS 485 link behind the unit following
the MODBUS MODICON RTU protocol.

In PowerLogic P1F the status of the rear communication port is signaled by flashing
rectangles in the top and bottom right corners of the display. Tx (Transmit) is
assigned to the top right corner, Rx (Receive) is assigned to the bottom right corner
of the display. Flashing of the rectangles indicate the operation of the
communication port only (not frames received and/or transmitted).

TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE MODBUS CONNECTION

Parameters of the MODBUS Connection

The different parameters of the MODBUS connection are as follows:

• Isolated two-point RS485 connection (2kV 50Hz),

• MODBUS MODICON line protocol in RTU mode

• Communication speed can be configured by an operator dialog in the front
panel of the relay:

Baud rate
4800
9600
38400
57600
115200

Transmission mode of the configured characters by operator dialog:

Mode
1 start / 8 bits / 1 stop: total 10 bits
1 start / 8 bits / even parity / 1 stop: total 11 bits
1 start / 8 bits / odd parity / 1 stop: total 11 bits
1 start / 8 bits / 2 stops: total 11 bits

Synchronization of Exchanges Messages

All character received after a silence on the line with more or equal to a transmission
time of 3 characters is considered as a firm start.

Message Validity Check

The frame validity is working with a cyclical redundancy code CRC with 16 bits. The
generator polynomial is:

1 + x² + x15 + x16 = 1010 0000 0000 0001 binary = A001h

Address of the PowerLogic P1 relays

217 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Communication Protection Relay

The address of the PowerLogic P1F relay on a same MODBUS network is situated
between 1 and 247. The address 0 is reserved for the broadcast messages.

MODBUS Functions of the PowerLogic P1F Relays

The MODBUS functions implemented on the PowerLogic P1F relays are:

Function 3 or 4: Reading of n words

Function 5: Writing of 1 bit

Function 6: Writing of 1 word

Function 7: Fast reading of 8 bits

Function 16: Writing of n words

Presentation of the MODBUS Protocol

Master slave protocol, all exchange understands a master query and a slave
response

Frame size received from PowerLogic P1F relay

Frame transmitted by the master (query):

Slave Function Information CRC1 6

number code
1 byte 1 byte n bytes 2 bytes
0 to F7h 3h, 5h, 6h, 7h,
Ah, Fh, 2Bh

Slave number:

The slave number is situated between 1 and 247.

A frame transmitted with a slave number 0 is globally addressed to all pieces of

equipment (broadcast frame)

Function code:

Requested MODBUS function (1 to 16)

Information:

Contains the parameters of the selected function.

CRC16:

Value of the CRC16 calculated by the master.

Note: The PowerLogic P1F relay does not respond to globally broadcast frames
sent out by the master.

Format of Frames Sent by the PowerLogic P1F Relay

Frame sent by the PowerLogic P1F relay (response)

Slave Function Data CRC16

number code
1 byte 1 byte n bytes 2 bytes
0 to F7h 3h, 5h, 6h, 7h,
Ah, Fh, 2Bh

218 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Communication

Slave number:

The slave number is situated between 1 and 247.

Function code:

Processed MODBUS function (1 to 16).

Data:

Contains reply data to master query.

CRC 16:

Value of the CRC 16 calculated by the slave.

Messages Validity Check

When PowerLogic P1F relay receive a master query, it validates the frame:

• If the CRC is false, the frame is invalid. PowerLogic P1F relay do not reply
to the query. The master must retransmit its query. Excepting a broadcast
message, this is the only case of non-reply by PowerLogic P1F relay to a
master query.

• If the CRC is good but the PowerLogic P1F relay cannot process the query,
it sends an exception response.

Warning frame sent by the PowerLogic P1F relay (response)

Slave number Function code Warning code CRC16

1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes
1 to F7h 81h, 83h, 85h, 86h, 87h, 8Ah, pf ... PF
8Fh, Abh

Slave number:
The slave number is situated between 1 and 247.

Function code:

The function code returned by the PowerLogic P1F relay in the warning frame is the
code in which the most significant bit (b7) is forced to 1.

Warning code:

On the 8 warning codes of the MODBUS protocol, the PowerLogic P1F relay
manages two of them:

• code 01: function code unauthorized or unknown.

• code 03: reading.

Control of pages being read

Control of pages being written

Control of addresses in pages

Length of request messages

CRC16:

Value of the CRC16 calculated by the slave.

219 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Communication Protection Relay

POWERLOGIC P1F RELAY DATABASE ORGANIZATION

Description of the Application Mapping

Settings

PowerLogic P1F application mapping has 9 pages of parameters.

Page 0h: Product information, remote signaling, measurements

Page 1h: General remote parameters

Page 2h: Setting group 1 remote parameters

Page 3h: Setting group 2 remote parameters

Page 4h: Remote controls

Pages 5h/6h: Reserved pages

Pages 7h: Quick reading byte

Pages 8h: Time synchronization

Disturbance Records

Before uploading any disturbance record, a service request must be sent to select
the record number to be uploaded.

The answer following this request contains the following information:

• Numbers of samples (pre and post time)

• Phase CT ratio

• Earth CT ratio

• Internal phase and earth ratios

• Number of the last disturbance mapping page

• Number of samples in this last disturbance mapping page

The mapping pages used for this service request are from 38h to 3Ch.

Pages 9h to 21h: Contain the disturbance data (25 pages)

A disturbance mapping page contains 250 words:

0900 to 09Fah: 250 disturbance data words
0A00 to 0AFAh: 250 disturbance data words
0B00 to 0BFAh: 250 disturbance data words
......
2100 to 21Fah: 250 disturbance data words

The disturbance data pages contain the sample of a single channel from a record.
Page 22h: contains the index of the disturbance

Page 38h to 3Ch: Selection of the disturbance record and channel

Page 3Dh: A dedicated request allows to know the number of disturbance records
stored in FRAM memory.

220 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Communication

Event records

To upload the event records two requests are allowed:

Page 35h: Request to upload an event record without acknowledge of this event.

Used addresses:

3500h: EVENT 1

.....
35C8h: EVENT 200

Page 36h: Request to upload the non-acknowledged oldest stored event record.

Two modes are available for the acknowledgement: automatic acknowledgement or

manual acknowledgement.

In automatic acknowledgement, the bit1 of the remote order frame (format F38B –
mapping address 0402h) should be set to 1. On event retrieval, this event record is
acknowledged.
In manual acknowledgement, the bit12 of the remote order frame (format F38 –
mapping address 0400h) should be set to 1. On event retrieval, this event record is
not acknowledged. To acknowledge this event, another remote order should be sent
to the relay. The bit 13 of this frame (format F38 – mapping address 0400h) should
be set to 1.

Fault records

Page 37h: Page dedicated to upload fault record

Used addresses:

3700h: FAULT 1
3701h: FAULT 2

.....
3713h: FAULT 20

Page 3Eh: Request to upload the non-acknowledged oldest stored fault record.

Two modes are available for the acknowledgement: automatic acknowledgement or

manual acknowledgement.
In automatic acknowledgement, the bit1 of the remote order frame (format F38B –
mapping address 0402h) should be set to 1. On fault retrieval, this fault record is
acknowledged.
In manual acknowledgement, the bit12 of the remote order frame (format F38 –
mapping address 0400h) should be set to 1. On fault retrieval, this fault record is not
acknowledged. To acknowledge this fault, another remote order should be sent to
the relay. The bit 14 of this frame (format F38 – mapping address 0400h) should be
set to 1.

Characteristics

Page 0h can only be read through communication.

Pages 1h, 2h, 3h and 4h can be read and written.

Page 7h can be access in quick reading only.

Page 8h can be write.

221 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Communication Protection Relay

They are described more precisely in the following chapters.

Page 0h: Product Information, Remote Signaling, Measurements

Read access only

Values Default
Address Group Description Step Unit Format
range Value

Product
Information
0000 Relay description 32-127 1 - F10 P1
characters 1 and 2
0001 Relay description 32-127 1 - F10 F1
characters 3 and 4
0002 Relay description 32-127 1 - F10
characters 5 and 6
0003 Unit reference characters 32-127 1 - F10 SE
1 and 2
0004 Unit reference characters 32-127 1 - F10
3 and 4
0005 Software Version 10 to 99 1 - F15
0006 Hardware Version 0 to 3 1 - F58
0007 Line CT Sec 9 1 - F23
0008 E/Gnd CT Sec 0, 3, 4 1 - F23A
0009 Active Set Group 0 to 1 1 - F32 0
000A Nominal frequency 0 to 1 1 - F57 0
000B Software Version Number 0 to 99 1 - F90
000C-000F Reserved -

Remote
signaling
0010 Logical inputs 0 to 255 1 bits F11

0011 Current Protection disable 0 to 4095 1 bits F12

status (1)
0012 Protection Function disable 0 to 1023 1 bits F12A
status (2)
0013 Output contacts status 0 to 31 1 bits F24
0014 Logical LEDs status 0 to 255 1 bits F25
0015 Latched Output info.: Current 0 to 65535 1 bits F28
Protection starting status (1)
0016 Latched Output info.: 0 to 511 1 bits F28A
Protection Function starting
status (2)
0017 Latched Output info.: Current 0 to 65535 1 bits F29
Protection trip status (1)
0018 Output information: Protection 0 to 511 1 bits F29A
Function trip status (2)
0019 Latched Output info.: Current 0 to 4095 1 bits F31
Protection Alarm status 1
001A Latched Output info.: 0 to 8191 1 bits F31A
Protection Function Alarm
status 2

222 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Communication

Values Default
Address Group Description Step Unit Format
range Value
001B CB status 0 to 4 1 - F30
001C [79] Status 0 to 32767 1 - F59
001D [79] Blocking Status 0 to 6 1 - F60
001E Local/Remote Mode Status 0 to 2 1 - F61
001F Maintenance Mode 0 to 2 1 - F62
0020 Hardware Warning 0 to 31 1 - F26
0021 Output information: I> 0 to 255 1 bits F37
0022 Output information: I>> 0 to 255 1 bits F37
0023 Output information: I>>> 0 to 255 1 bits F37
0024 Output information: IN_1 stage 0 to 255 1 bits F50
0025 Output information: IN_2 stage 0 to 255 1 bits F50
0026 Output information: IN_3 stage 0 to 255 1 bits F50
0027 Output information: AUX1 0 to 127 1 bits F51
0028 Output information: AUX2 0 to 127 1 bits F51
0029 Output information: CB Fail 0 to 127 1 bits F51
002A Output information: tCB ext. 0 to 127 1 bits F51
sign
002B Output information: SOTF 0 to 255 1 bits F37
002C Output information: I< 0 to 255 1 bits F50
002D Output information: I2> 0 to 255 1 bits F50
002E Output information: Brkn.Cond 0 to 255 1 bits F50
002F Output information: Thermal 0 to 255 1 bits F50
OL
0030 Output information: AUX3 0 to 127 1 bits F51
0031 Output information: AUX4 0 to 127 1 bits F51
0032 Output information: Input 0 to 4095 1 bits F101
Protection blocking 1
0033 Output information: Input 0 to 255 1 bits F102
Protection blocking 2
0034 Output information: Input 0 to 255 1 bits F103
Selective logic 1
0035 Output information: Trip latch 0 to 32767 1 bits F17
status 1
0036 Output information: Trip latch 0 to 2047 1 bits F17A
status 2
0037 Output information: Input logic 0 to 32767 1 bits F104
data
0038 – 0039 Reserved
003A CB Status 0 to 255 1 bits F14
003B LR Status 0 to 15 1 bits F13
003C Maintenance Mode Status 0 to 15 1 bits F13A
003D – Reserved
003F

223 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Communication Protection Relay

Values Default
Address Group Description Step Unit Format
range Value

Remote
measurements
0040 Phase IA (L1) secondary 0 to 60 000 1 [A]/100 F1
current [A]
0041 Phase IB (L2) secondary 0 to 60 000 1 [A]/100 F1
current [A]
0042 Phase IC (L3) secondary 0 to 60 000 1 [A]/100 F1
current [A]
0043 E/GND IN (IE) secondary 0 to 60 000 1 [A]/1000 F1
current [A]
0044 I2 (negative sequence) 0 to 60 000 1 [A]/100 F1
secondary current [A]
0044 I1 (positive sequence) 0 to 60 000 1 [A]/100 F1
secondary current [A]
0045-004F Reserved
0050 Phase IA (L1) current [In] 0 to 60 000 [In]/100 F1
0051 Phase IB (L2) current [In] 0 to 60 000 1 [In]/100 F1
0052 Phase IC (L3) current [In] 0 to 60 000 1 [In]/100 F1
0053 E/F current [Ien] 0 to 60 000 1 [Ien]/100 F1
0054 I2 (negative sequence) current 0 to 60 000 1 [In]/100 F1
[In]
0055 I1 (positive sequence) current 0 to 60 000 1 [In]/100 F1
[In]
0056-005F Reserved
0060 I2/I1 current [%] 0 to 100 1 [%] F1
0061 Thermal Overload [%] 0 to 300 1 [%] F1
0062 2th harmonic [%] Phase A 0 to 100 1 [%] F1
0063 2th harmonic [%] Phase B 0 to 100 1 [%] F1
0064 2th harmonic [%] Phase C 0 to 100 1 [%] F1
0066-00FF Reserved

Calculation Formula for Phase Current Values

Line phase current value (primary value) = phase sampled value (e.g. address
0040h, 0041h or0042h) * {line primary CT ratio (address 0120h)/Line CT sec
(address 0121h)} A/100.

Calculation Formula for Earth Current Values

Line phase current value (primary value) = earth sampled value (e.g. address
0043h) * {line primary CT ratio (address 0122h)/Line CT sec (address 0123h)}
A/1000.

224 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Communication

Page 1h, PowerLogic P1F: General Remote Parameters

Read and write access

Values Default
Address Group Description Step Unit Format
range Value

Remote
parameters
0100 Address 1 to 247 1 - F1 247

0101 Protocol for RS485 0 to 1 1 F56 0

0102 Baud Rate 0 to 5 1 F19 2
0103 Parity 0 to 2 1 F20 0
0104 Stop bits 0 to 1 1 F22 0
0105-010F Reserved

Counters
0110 Trips Number 0 to 65535 1 - F1 0

0111 Close Number 0 to 65535 1 - F1 0

0112 Fault Trips Number 0 to 65535 1 - F1 0
0113 Fault Start Number 0 to 65535 1 - F1 0
0114 Alarm Number 0 to 65535 1 - F1 0
0115 HW Warnings Number 0 to 65535 1 - F1 0
0116 79 Action Total 0 to 65535 1 - F1 0
0117 79 Total Trips&Lockout 0 to 65535 1 - F1 0
0118 79 Successful Number 0 to 65535 1 - F1 0
0119 79 Cycle 1 Recloses 0 to 65535 1 - F1 0
011A 79 Cycle 2 Recloses 0 to 65535 1 - F1 0
011B 79 Cycle 3 Recloses 0 to 65535 1 - F1 0
011C 79 Cycle 4 Recloses 0 to 65535 1 - F1 0
011D CB close Monitoring 0 to 65535 1 - F1 0
011E CB open Monitoring 0 to 65535 1 - F1 0
011F CB AMPS Value 0 to 65535 1 - F1 0
0116-011F Reserved

CT Ratio
0120 Line CT primary 1 to 30000 1 A F1

0121 Line CT Sec. 0 to 1 1 - F91

0122 E/Gnd CT Primary 1 to 30000 1 A F1
0123 E/GND CT Sec. 0 to 1 1 - F92
0122-012F Reserved

Blocking Inrush
0130 Inrush Blocking? 0 to 2 1 - F74 0

0131 2nd Harmonic Ratio 10 to 50 1 % F1 20

0132 Inrush Reset Time 0 to 20000 1 1/100 s F1 100

225 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Communication Protection Relay

Values Default
Address Group Description Step Unit Format
range Value
0133 Unblock Inrush Time 0 to 20000 1 1/100 s F1 100
0134-013F Reserved
O/C Advanced
Settings
0137 I< stage for Broken Conductor 10 to 100 1 [In]/100 F1 10
0138 IDMT interlock by DMT stage 0 to 1 1 - F88 0

GLOBAL SETTINGS

LOC
0140 Language 0 to 5 1 - F52 0

0141 Default display 0 to 2 1 - F53 0

0142 LEDs Reset by 0 to 2 1 - F54 0
0143 Ltchd Outp Reset 0 to 2 1 - F54 0
0144 Trip Info Reset 0 to 2 1 - F54 0
0145 Alarm Display Reset 0 to 1 1 - F55 0
0146 Nominal frequency 0 to 1 1 - F57 0
0147 Reserved
0148 Control Keys Mode 0 to 2 1 - F82 0
0149 I>, I>>, I>>> (1harmonic or 0 to 1 1 - F81 0
True RMS)
014A I>>>, IN>>>, IN>> HCDFT 0 to 1 1 - F109 0

014B-014F Reserved

SETTING GROUP
SELECT
0150 Number of Setting Groups 0 to 1 1 - F71 0

0151 Setting group change 0 to 1 1 - F32 0

0152 t Change Setting 0 to 20000 1 1/100 s F1 0
G1->G2
0153-0154 Reserved

E/F ADVANCED
0155 UN Threshold 5.0 to 90.0 0.1 v F1 5.0 v

0156 G1 IN_1 direct. 0-2 1 - F3 0

0157 G1 IN_2 direct. 0-2 1 - F3 0
0158 G2 IN_1 direct. 0-2 1 - F3 0
0159 G2 IN_2 direct. 0-2 1 - F3 0
015A Incos, Insin Sector Angle 10 to 90 ̊ 1 ̊ F1 90 ̊
015B-015F Reserved

[79] ADVANCED
SETTINGS
0160 [79] CB Healthy Monit? 0 to 1 1 - F63

0161 [79] Block via Input? 0 to 1 1 - F63 0

0162 [79] Start Dead t On 0 to 1 1 - F64 1

226 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Communication

Values Default
Address Group Description Step Unit Format
range Value
0163 Rolling Demand? 0 to 1 1 - F54 0
0164 Max cycles Nb Rol.Demand 2 to 100 1 - F1 2
0165 Time Period Rol.Demand 1 to 1410 1 mn F1
0166 [79] Time Inhibit on Close 1 to 60000 1 1/100 s F1 100
0167 [79] Reset Signaling on Close 0 to 1 1 - F106 0
0168-017F Reserved

CIRCUIT
BREAKER
0180 tOpen pulse min 10 to 1000 1 1/100 s F1 50

0181 tClose Pulse 10 to 1000 1 1/100 s F1 50

0182 Time Delay for close 0 to 20000 1 1/100 s F1 0
Command
0184 tCB FLT ext.sign. 1 to 200 1 S F1 16
0185 Remote Mode 0 to 1 1 - F73
0186 52 Unblock SOTF Time 10 to 20000 1 1/100 s F1 100
0187 TC Supervision? 0 to 2 1 - F107 0
0188 tSUP 10 to 1000 1 1/100 s F1 10
0189 CB Supervision? 0 to 1 1 - F63 0
018A Max CB Open Time 1 to 1000 1 1/100 s F1 10
018B Max CB Close Time 1 to 1000 1 1/100 s F1 10
018C CB Diagnostic? 0 to 1 1 - F63 0
018D Max CB Open No. 0 to 65535 1 - F1 0
018E Max Sum AMPS^n 0 to 65535 1 - F1 0
018F AMPS’s n= 1 to 2 1 - F1 2
0190 Reserved

DISTURBANCE
RECORDER
019A Pre-Time 10 to 700 1 1/100 s F1 10

019B Post TripTime 10 to 100 1 1/100 s F1 10

019C Distrurb Rec Trig 0 to 1 1 - F65 0

019D Max record Time 150 to 750 1 1/100 s F1 10

019E-01A4 Reserved

COMMISIONING
01A5 Maintenance Mode 0 to 2 1 - F62 0

01A6 Test Pattern 1 bits F40 00000000

01A7 Contact Test Time 0-20000 1 1/100 s F1 10

01A8 Test Outputs 0 to 1 1 - F75 0

01A9 Functional Test Pattern 0 to 4095 1 - F76 0

01AA Functional Test End 0 to 1 1 - F77 0

01AB Functional Test Time 10-20000 1 1/100 s F1 10

227 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Communication Protection Relay

Values Default
Address Group Description Step Unit Format
range Value
01AC Functional Test 0 to 1 1 - F75 0

01AD-01AF Reserved

01C3-01FF Reserved

228 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Communication

Page 2h : setting Group 1

Access in reading and in writing

0191 Phase SBC Alarm Threshold 0 to 65535 1 kA2 F1 1000

0192 SBC Interval 1 High Limit 0 to 65535 1 1/10 kA2 F1 2

0193 SBC Interval 2 High Limit 0 to 65535 1 1/10 kA2 F1 5

0194 SBC Interval 3 High Limit 0 to 65535 1 1/10 kA2 F1 10

0195 SBC Interval 4 High Limit 0 to 65535 1 1/10 kA2 F1 40

0196 CB Alarm Threshold 1 0 to 65535 1 1/100 kA F1 80

0197 CB Alarm Counter 1 0 to 65535 1 F1 500

0198 CB Alarm Threshold 2 0 to 65535 1 1/100 kA F1 600

0199 CB Alarm Counter 2 0 to 65535 1 F1 50

Page 4h; CB Monitoring

Access in reading only

0408 CB Close Counter 0 to 65535 1 F1 0

0409 CB Open Counter 0 to 65535 1 F1 0

040A CB Trips Counter 0 to 65535 1 F1 0

040B Squared Breaking Current Total 0 to 65535 1 1/10 MA F1 0

040C SBC Phase A Interval 1 0 to 65535 1 1/10 kA2 F1 0

040D SBC Phase A Interval 2 0 to 65535 1 1/10 kA2 F1 0

040E SBC Phase A Interval 3 0 to 65535 1 1/10 kA2 F1 0

040F SBC Phase A Interval 4 0 to 65535 1 1/10 kA2 F1 0

0410 SBC Phase A Interval 5 0 to 65535 1 1/10 kA2 F1 0

0411 Phase A Interval 1 Counter 0 to 65535 1 F1 0

0412 Phase A Interval 2 Counter 0 to 65535 1 F1 0

0413 Phase A Interval 3 Counter 0 to 65535 1 F1 0

0414 Phase A Interval 4 Counter 0 to 65535 1 F1 0

0415 Phase A Interval 5 Counter 0 to 65535 1 F1 0

0416 SBC Phase B Interval 1 0 to 65535 1 1/10 kA2 F1 0

0417 SBC Phase B Interval 2 0 to 65535 1 1/10 kA2 F1 0

0418 SBC Phase B Interval 3 0 to 65535 1 1/10 kA2 F1 0

0419 SBC Phase B Interval 4 0 to 65535 1 1/10 kA2 F1 0

041A SBC Phase B Interval 5 0 to 65535 1 1/10 kA2 F1 0

041B Phase B Interval 1 Counter 0 to 65535 1 F1 0

041C Phase B Interval 2 Counter 0 to 65535 1 F1 0

041D Phase B Interval 3 Counter 0 to 65535 1 F1 0

041E Phase B Interval 4 Counter 0 to 65535 1 F1 0

243 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Communication Protection Relay

041F Phase B Interval 5 Counter 0 to 65535 1 F1 0

0420 SBC Phase C Interval 1 0 to 65535 1 1/10 kA2 F1 0

0421 SBC Phase C Interval 2 0 to 65535 1 1/10 kA2 F1 0

0422 SBC Phase C Interval 3 0 to 65535 1 1/10 kA2 F1 0

0423 SBC Phase C Interval 4 0 to 65535 1 1/10 kA2 F1 0

0424 SBC Phase C Interval 5 0 to 65535 1 1/10 kA2 F1 0

0425 Phase C Interval 1 Counter 0 to 65535 1 F1 0

0426 Phase C Interval 2 Counter 0 to 65535 1 F1 0

0427 Phase C Interval 3 Counter 0 to 65535 1 F1 0

0428 Phase C Interval 4 Counter 0 to 65535 1 F1 0

0429 Phase C Interval 5 Counter 0 to 65535 1 F1 0

042A SBC Phase A Total 0 to 65535 1 kA2 F1 0

042B SBC Phase B Total 0 to 65535 1 kA2 F1 0

042C SBC Phase C Total 0 to 65535 1 kA2 F1 0

042D Reserved

042E Racking Counter 0 to 65535 1 F1 0

042F Racking Input Group1 0 to 1 1 bits F35 000000

0430 Racking Input Group2 0 to 1 1 bits F35 000000

0431-043E Reserved

043F CB Spring Ready Input Group1 0 to 1 1 bits F35 000000

0440 CB Spring Ready Input Group2 1 bits F35 000000

244 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Communication

Page 4h : Remote Controls

In P1F it is possible to use both functions Function 5 or Function 6

Access in writing.

MODBUS Function 6

Note: A one control can be executed in a one message only. Two control commands
in a one message will be rejected by P1F

Address Group Description Values Step Unit Format Default

range Value
0400 Remote Remote control word 1 0 to 15 bits - F38 0
0401 control Remote control word 2 0 to 15 bits - F38A 0
0402 Remote control word 3 0 to 15 bits - F38B 0

Examples of messages

The example 1
Query to apply “ hermal tate reset” via PowerLogic P1F:

An example of request to “Thermal state reset” in slave 10 (dec):

Field name Value (hex) Remarks
Slave Address 0A P1F setting value
Function 06
Register Address Hi (Address Hi) 04 Address
Register Address Lo (Address Lo) 01 (See table above)
Preset Data Hi 00 bit 3
Preset Data LO 08 (See format F38A)
Error Check (CRC) - -

The example 2
Query to apply “ emote B lose ommand” via PowerLogic P1F:

An example of request to “Remote CB close command” in slave 17 (dec):

Field name Value (hex) Remarks
Slave Address 11 P1F setting value
Function 06
Register Address Hi (Address Hi) 04 Address
Register Address Lo (Address Lo) 00 (See table above)
Preset Data Hi 80 bit 15
Preset Data LO 00 (See format F38)
Error Check (CRC) - -

MODBUS Function 5

Modbus Coil Address

Modbus Force Data Force Data
Lo (hex)
Group Coil Address Hi Lo
Hi (hex) Values (hex) (hex)
Number of controls Step
range

Remote
04 See format: F113 0 to 21 1 FF 00
control

245 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Communication Protection Relay

The example of query to apply “Remote CB Close Command” via PowerLogic

P1F:

An example of request to “remote CB close command” (force coil 0F – ON) in slave 17 (dec):
Field name Value (Hex) Remarks
Slave Address 11 P1F setting value
Function 05
Coil Address Hi 04 See table above
Coil Address Lo 0F See format F113
Force Data Hi FF Fixed value
Force Data Lo 00 Fixed value
Error Check (CRC) - -

Pages 5h/6h

These pages are reserved.

Page 7h

Access in quick reading only (MODBUS 07 function)

Address Group Description Values Step Unit Format Default

range Value
0700 Quick reading Relay status description 1 - F49 0
byte

Page 8h: Time Synchronization

Access in writing for n words (function 16). The time synchronization format is based
on 8 bits (4 words) (Inverted IEC 60870-5-4 CP56Time2a):

Address Nb Mask
Timer Values range Unit
(hex) bytes (hex)

1 (Hi)
0800 0 – 99
Year 1 (Lo) 7F Year
(2000-2099)
Month 1 (Hi) 0F 1 – 12 month
Day of week 0801 1 (Lo) E0 Not used in P1F -
day of month 1 (Lo) 1F 1 – 31 Day
0–1
Season 1 (Hi) 80 (summer-winter)
Not used
Hour 0802 1 (Hi) 1F 0-23 Hour
Invalidity 1 (Lo) 80 0 -1 (valid – invalid)
Minute 1 (Lo) 3F 0-59 Minute
Millisecond pF+pf 0803 2 FFFF 0 – 59999 ms

246 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Communication

Mapping access characteristics

• Description of accessible addresses in reading of words (function 03 and 04).

PAGE 00h PAGE 01h PAGE 02h

0000h to 0064h 0100h to 01Ach 0200h to 02Feh

PAGE 03h
0300h to 03Feh

• Definition of accessible addresses in writing of 1 word (function 06).

PAGE 01h PAGE 02h PAGE 03h

0100h to 01Ach 0200h to 02Feh 0300h to 03Feh

• Definition of accessible addresses in writing of n words (function 16).

PAGE 01h PAGE 02h PAGE 03h

0100h to 01Ach 0200h to 02Feh 0300h to 03Feh

PAGE 08h
0800h to 0803h

• Definition of accessible addresses in reading of bits (function 01 and 02).

Not available

• Definition of accessible addresses in writing of 1 bit (function 05).

PAGE 04h
0400h to 0402h

Note: The bits number must not be higher than 16.

Page 9h to 21h: Disturbance Record Data (25 pages)

Access in words writing (function 03)

Each disturbance mapping page contain 250 words.

Address Contents
0900h to 09Fah 250 disturbance data words
0A00h to 0AFAh 250 disturbance data words
0B00h to 0BFAh 250 disturbance data words
0C00h to 0CFAh 250 disturbance data words
0D00h to 0DFAh 250 disturbance data words
0E00h to 0DFAh 250 disturbance data words
0F00h to 0FFAh 250 disturbance data words
1000h to 10Fah 250 disturbance data words
1100h to 11Fah 250 disturbance data words
1200h to 12Fah 250 disturbance data words
1300h to 13Fah 250 disturbance data words
1400h to 14Fah 250 disturbance data words
1500h to 15Fah 250 disturbance data words
1600h to 16Fah 250 disturbance data words
1700h to 17Fah 250 disturbance data words

247 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Communication Protection Relay

1800h to 18Fah 250 disturbance data words

1900h to 19Fah 250 disturbance data words
1A00h to 1AFAh 250 disturbance data words
1B00h to 1BFAh 250 disturbance data words
1C00h to 1CFAh 250 disturbance data words
1D00h to 1DFAh 250 disturbance data words
1E00h to 1EFAh 250 disturbance data words
1F00h to 1FFAh 250 disturbance data words
2000h to 20Fah 250 disturbance data words
2100h to 21Fah 250 disturbance data words
NB: The disturbance data pages contain values of one channel from one given
disturbance record.

Meaning of each value channel

• IA, IB, IC and IN channels:

The value is a signed 16 bits word equivalent to the ADC value

Calculation formula for phase current values

Values in Amps can be calculated in following way:

sample_IA  Internal_P hA  Phase_Prim ary_CT_In

Value IA = 2 
Phase_ Secondary _CT_In  200
sample_IB  Internal_P hB  Phase_Prim ary_CT_In
Value IB = 2 
Phase_ Secondary _CT_In  200
sample_IC  Internal_P hC  Phase_Prim ary_CT_In
Value IC = 2 
Phase_ Secondary _CT_In  200
Where:
Internal_PhA, Internal_PhB, Internal_PhC: Internal scalling (Page 38h to 3Ch)

Calculation formula for earth current values

Value in Amps can be calculated in following way:

sample_IN  Internal_N  Earth_Prim ary_CT_Ien

Value IN = 2 
Earth_ Secondary _CT_Ien  2000
Where:
Internal_N: Internal scaling (Page 38h to 3Ch)

Calculation formula for voltage VN values

Value in Volts can be calculated in following way:

sample_VN  Internal_V N
Value VN = 2 
20
Where:
Internal_VN: Internal scaling (Page 38h to 3Ch)

248 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Communication

• Frequency channel:
Time between two samples in microseconds

• Logic channels:

Page 22h: Disturbance Record Index Frame

Access in word reading (function 03)

Address Contents

2200h Disturbance data index frame

Disturbance record index frame

Word Contents

n° 1 Disturbance record number

n° 2 Disturbance record finish date (second)
n° 3 Disturbance record finish date (second)
n° 4 Disturbance record finish date (millisecond)
n° 5 Disturbance record finish date (millisecond)
n° 6 Disturbance record starting condition:
1: tripping
2: instantaneous
3: remote command
4: logic input

249 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Communication Protection Relay

n° 7 Frequency at the post-time beginning

Page 30h (addresses 3000h to 3007h): CB open record data (6 words)

Word n° 1: Record number

Word n° 2: CB open time (ms)
Words n° 3 & 4 & 5 & 6: Event date is Inverted IEC 60870-5-4 CP56Time2a:
See format Page 8h

Page 31h (addresses 3100h to 3107h): CB close record data (6 words)

Word n° 1: Record number

Word n° 2: CB close time (ms)
Words n° 3 & 4 & 5 & 6: Event date is Inverted IEC 60870-5-4 CP56Time2a:
See format Page 8h

Page 32h (addresses 3200h to 3207h): Spring charging record data (6 words)

Word n° 1: Record number

Word n° 2: Spring charging time (s)
Words n° 3 & 4 & 5 & 6: Event date is Inverted IEC 60870-5-4 CP56Time2a:
See format Page 8h

Page 33h : Cumulative breaking current data

Access in word reading (function 03)

Address Contents

3300h Broken Current Sum IL1 – Interval 1

3301h Broken Current Sum IL1 – Interval 2
3302h Broken Current Sum IL1 – Interval 3
3303h Broken Current Sum IL1 – Interval 4
3304h Broken Current Sum IL1 – Interval 5
3305h Broken Current Sum IL2 – Interval 1
3306h Broken Current Sum IL2 – Interval 2
3307h Broken Current Sum IL2 – Interval 3
3308h Broken Current Sum IL2 – Interval 4
3309h Broken Current Sum IL2 – Interval 5
330Ah Broken Current Sum IL3 – Interval 1
330Bh Broken Current Sum IL3 – Interval 2
370Ch Broken Current Sum IL3 – Interval 3
370Dh Broken Current Sum IL3 – Interval 4
370Eh Broken Current Sum IL3 – Interval 5
370Fh Broken Current Sum IL1
3710h Broken Current Sum IL2
3711h Broken Current Sum IL3

Each value read is a floating point type (4 bytes). More than one value can be read.

250 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Communication

Page 35h (addresses 3500h to 354Ah): event record data (9 words)

Word n° 1: Event meaning

Word n° 2: MODBUS associated value
Word n° 3: MODBUS address
Word n° 4: Reserved
Words n° 5 & 6 & 7 & 8: Event date is Inverted IEC 60870-5-4 CP56Time2a:
See format Page 8h
Word n° 9: Acknowledge
0=event non-acknowledged
1= event acknowledged)

On event occurrence, the corresponding bit of the associated format is set to « 1 ».

On event disappearance, the corresponding bit of the associated format is set to
« 0 ».

Page 36h

Most older event data

Access in word reading (function 03)

256 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Communication

Address Contents

3600h Most older event data

Page 37h: Fault Record Value Data

Access in word reading (function 03)

Address Contents

3700h Fault value record n°1

3701h Fault value record n°2
3702h Fault value record n°3
3703h Fault value record n°4
3704h Fault value record n°5
3705h Fault value record n°6
3706h Fault value record n°7
3707h Fault value record n°8
3708h Fault value record n°9
3709h Fault value record n°10
370Ah Fault value record n°11
370Bh Fault value record n°12
370Ch Fault value record n°13
370Dh Fault value record n°14
370Eh Fault value record n°15
370Fh Fault value record n°16
3710h Fault value record n°17
3711h Fault value record n°18
3712h Fault value record n°19
3713h Fault value record n°20

Word n° 1: Fault number

Words n° 2 & 3 & 4 & 5: see table below (Inverted IEC 60870-5-4 CP56Time2a)

Nb
Address Mask
Timer byte Values range Unit
(hex) (hex)
s

1 (Hi)
Word n° 2 0 – 99
Year 1 (Lo) 7F Year
(2000-2099)
Month 1 (Hi) 0F 1 – 12 month
Day of week Word n° 3 1 (Lo) E0 Not used in P1F
day of month 1 (Lo) 1F 1 – 31 Day
0–1
Season 1 (Hi) 80 (summer-winter)
Word n° 4 Not used
Hour 1 (Hi) 1F 0-23 Hour

257 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Communication Protection Relay

Invalidity 1 (Lo) 80 0 -1 (valid – invalid)

Minute 1 (Lo) 3F 0-59 Minute
Millisecond pF+pf Word n° 5 2 FFFF 0 – 59999 ms (included s)

Word n° 6: Reserved

Word n° 7: Active setting group during the fault (1 or 2)

Word n° 8: Fault origin

0= none
1= phase A
2= phase B
3= phase C
4= phases A-B
5= phases A-C
6= phases B-C
7= phases A-B-C
8= earth

Word n° 9: Fault recording starting origin

Fault nature code meaning

Code Fault origin

00 Null event
01 Reserved
02 Thermal Overload
03 tI> trip
04 tI>> trip
05 tI>>> trip
06 tlN>_1 trip
07 tlN_2 trip
08 tlN_3 trip
09 Reserved

10 tBrkn Cond
11 t Aux 1 trip
12 t Aux 2 trip
13 tI2> trip
14 Reserved
15 t Aux 3 trip
16 t Aux 4 trip
17 CB Fail trip
18 tSOTF
19 Reserved
20 Cbext trip

258 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Communication

Word n° 10: Fault value current (nominal value)

Word n° 11: Phase A current value (nominal value)

Word n° 12: Phase B current value (nominal value)

Word n° 13: Phase C current value (nominal value)

Word n° 14: Earth current value (nominal value)

Word n° 15: Acknowledge of fault 0: fault non-acknowledged

1: fault acknowledged

Calculation Formula for Phase Current Values

Line phase current value (primary value) = phase sampled value (e.g. address
0040h, 0041h or 0042h) * {line primary CT ratio (address 0120h)/Line CT sec
(address 0121h)} A/100.

Calculation Formula for Earth Current Values

Line phase current value (primary value) = earth sampled value (e.g. address
0043h) * {line primary CT ratio (address 0122h)/Line CT sec (address 0123h)}
A/1000.

Page 3Eh: MOST OLDER FAULT RECORD VALUE DATA

Access in word reading (function 03)

Address Contents

3E00h Most older Fault record

Page 38h to 3Ch: Disturbance Recorder (A, E)

Selection of the disturbance record and channel (34 bytes are uploaded for each
address reading)
Access in word reading (function 03)

Address Disturbance record number Format

3800h 1 IA
3801h 1 IB
3802h 1 IC
3803h 1 IN
3804h 1 Logic input and outputs
3805h 1 Frequency
3900h 2 IA
3901h 2 IB
3902h 2 IC
3903h 2 IN
3904h 2 Logic input and outputs
3905h 2 Frequency
3A00h 3 IA

259 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Communication Protection Relay

3A01h 3 IB
3A02h 3 IC
3A03h 3 IN
3A04h 3 Logic input and outputs
3A05h 3 Frequency
3B00h 4 IA
3B01h 4 IB
3B02h 4 IC
3B03h 4 IN
3B04h 4 Logic input and outputs
3B05h 4 Frequency
3C00h 5 IA
3C01h 5 IB
3C02h 5 IC
3C03h 5 IN
3C04h 5 Logic input and outputs
3C05h 5 Frequency

Word n° 1: Number of samples included in the mapping

Word n° 2: Sample number in pre-time
Word n° 3: Sample number in post-time
Word n° 4: Line CT primary nominal current (Phase_Primary_CT_In)
Word n° 5: Line CT secondary nominal current (Phase_ Secondary _CT_In)
Word n° 6: E/GND CT primary nominal current (Earth_Primary_CT_Ien)
Word n° 7: E/GND CT secondary nominal current
(Earth_Secondary_CT_Ien)
Float1) n° 1: Phase A Internal PhA ratio (Internal_PhA)
Float1) n° 2: Phase B internal PhB ratio (Internal_PhB)
Float1) n° 3: Phase C internal PhC ratio (Internal_PhC)
Float1) n° 4: Earth internal ratio (Internal_N)
Word n° 8: Mapping last page number
Word n° 9: Number of words in the mapping last page

2) Float – 4 bytes floating point number

Page 38h to 3Ch: Disturbance Recorder (E+)

Selection of the disturbance record and channel (38 bytes are uploaded for each
address reading)

Access in word reading (function 03)

Address Disturbance record number Format

3800h 1 IA
3801h 1 IB
3802h 1 IC

260 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Communication

3803h 1 IN
3804h 1 VN
3805h 1 Logic input and outputs
3806h 1 Frequency
3900h 2 IA
3901h 2 IB
3902h 2 IC
3903h 2 IN
3904h 2 VN
3905h 2 Logic input and outputs
3906h 2 Frequency
3A00h 3 IA
3A01h 3 IB
3A02h 3 IC
3A03h 3 IN
3A04h 3 VN
3A05h 3 Logic input and outputs
3A06h 3 Frequency
3B00h 4 IA
3B01h 4 IB
3B02h 4 IC
3B03h 4 IN
3B04h 4 VN
3B05h 4 Logic input and outputs
3B06h 4 Frequency
3C00h 5 IA
3C01h 5 IB
3C02h 5 IC
3C03h 5 IN
3C04h 5 VN
3C05h 5 Logic input and outputs
3C06h 5 Frequency

Word n° 1: Number of samples included in the mapping

261 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Communication Protection Relay

Float1) n° 3: Phase C internal PhC ratio (Internal_PhC)

Float1) n° 4: Earth internal ratio (Internal_N)
1)
Float n° 5: VN internal ratio (Internal_VN)
Word n° 8: Mapping last page number
Word n° 9: Number of words in the mapping last page
2) Float – 4 bytes floating point number

Pages 3Dh: Number of Disturbance Records Available

Access in word reading (function 03)

Address Contents

3D00h Number of disturbances records available

Word n° 1: Number of disturbances records available

Word n° 2: Oldest disturbance record number (n)
Words n° 3 & 4: Oldest disturbance record date (second)
Words n° 5 & 6: Oldest disturbance record date (millisecond)
Word n° 7: Disturbance record starting origin
1= Protection trip
2= instantaneous threshold
3= remote command
4= logic input
Word n° 8: Acknowledge
Word n° 9: Disturbance record previous number (n+1)
Words n° 10 & 11: Previous disturbance record date (second)
Words n° 12 & 13: Previous disturbance record date (millisecond)
Word n° 14: Disturbance record starting origin
1= Protection trip
2= instantaneous threshold
3= remote command
4= logic input
Word n° 15: Acknowledge
Word n° 16: Disturbance record previous number (n+2)
Words n° 17 & 18: Previous disturbance record date (second)
Words n° 19 & 20: Previous disturbance record date (millisecond)
Word n° 21: Disturbance record starting origin
1= Protection trip
2= instantaneous threshold
3= remote command
4= logic input
Word n° 22: Acknowledge
Word n° 23: Disturbance record previous number (n+3)
Words n° 24 & 25: Previous disturbance record date (second)
Words n° 26 & 27: Previous disturbance record date (millisecond)
Word n° 28: Disturbance record starting origin
1= Protection trip
2= instantaneous threshold
3= remote command
4= logic input
Word n° 29: Acknowledge
Word n° 30: Disturbance record previous number (n+4)
Words n° 31 & 32: Previous disturbance record date (second)
Words n° 33 & 34: Previous disturbance record date (millisecond)

262 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Communication

Word n° 35: Disturbance record starting origin

1= Protection trip
2= instantaneous threshold
3= remote command
4= logic input
Word n° 36: Acknowledge

263 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Communication Protection Relay

Communication Protection Relay

Request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge event

Slave number Function code Word address Word number CRC

xx 03h 36h 00 00 09h xx xx

This event request may be answered an error message with the error code:

EVT_EN_COURS_ECRIT (5): An event is being written into the saved FRAM.

Note: On event retrieval, two possibilities exist regarding the event
record acknowledgement:
a) Automatic event record acknowledgement on event
retrieval.
b) Non-automatic event record acknowledgement on event
retrieval.

2) Automatic event record acknowledgement on event retrieval:

The bit1 of the remote order frame (format F38B – mapping address 0402h) should
be set to 1. On event retrieval, this event record is acknowledged.

b) Non-automatic event record acknowledgement on event retrieval:

The bit12 of the remote order frame (format F38 – mapping address 0400h) should
be set to 1. On event retrieval, this event record is not acknowledged. To
acknowledge this event, another remote order should be sent to the relay. The bit 13
of this frame (format F38 – mapping address 0400h) should be set to 1.

Request to retrieve a dedicated event

Slave number Function code Word address Word number CRC

xx 03h Refer to mapping 00 09h xx xx

This event request may be answered an error message with the error code:

EVT_EN_COURS_ECRIT (5): An event is being written into the saved FRAM.

Note: This event retrieval does not acknowledge this event.

Modbus request definition used to retrieve the fault records

Two ways can be followed to retrieve a fault record:

• Send a request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge fault record.

• Send a request to retrieve a dedicated fault record.

Request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge fault record

Slave number Function code Word address Word number CRC

xx 03h 3Eh 00 00 0Fh xx xx

Note: On fault retrieval, two possibilities exist regarding the fault record
acknowledgement:
a) Automatic fault record acknowledgement on fault retrieval.
b) Non-automatic fault record acknowledgement on fault retrieval.

a) Automatic fault record acknowledgement on fault retrieval:

The bit1 of the remote order frame (format F38B – mapping address 0402h) should
be set to 1. On fault retrieval, this fault record is acknowledged.

276 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Communication

b) Non-automatic fault record acknowledgement on fault retrieval:

The bit12 of the remote order frame (format F38 – mapping address 0400h) should
be set to 1. On fault retrieval, this fault record is not acknowledged.
To acknowledge this fault, another remote order should be sent to the relay. The bit
14 of this frame (format F38 – mapping address 0400h) should be set to 1.

Request to retrieve a dedicated fault record

Slave number Function code Word address Word number CRC

xx 03h Refer to mapping 00 0Fh xx xx

Note: This fault value retrieval does not acknowledge this fault record.

277 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Communication Protection Relay

IEC 60870-5-103 INTERFACE

The IEC 60870-5-103 interface is a master/slave interface with the relay as the slave
device. This protocol is based on the VDEW communication protocol. The relay
conforms to compatibility level 2, compatibility level 3 is not supported.

The following IEC 60870-5-103 facilities are supported by this interface:

Initialization (Reset)

Time Synchronization

Event Record Extraction

General Interrogation

Cyclic Measurements
General Commands

Physical Connection and Link Layer

Connection is available for IEC 60870-5-103 through the rear RS485 port. It is
possible to select both the relay address and baud rate using the front panel
interface. Following a change, a reset command is required to re-establish
communications.

The parameters of the communication are the following:

Even Parity

8 Data bits

1 stop bit

Data rate 9600 to 115200 bauds

Initialization

Initialization is implemented according to clause 7.4.1 of IEC 60870-5-103.

Whenever the relay has been powered up, or if the communication parameters have
been changed a reset command is required to initialize the communications. The
relay will respond to either of the two reset commands (Reset CU or Reset FCB),
the difference being that the Reset CU will clear any unsent messages in the relay’s
transmit buffer.

The relay will respond to the reset command with an identification message
ASDU 5, the Cause of Transmission COT of this response will be either Reset CU or
Reset FCB depending on the nature of the reset command. The following
information will be contained in the data section of this ASDU:

Manufacturer Name: POWERLOGIC P1

ccording to the specification “ ommunication rchitecture ( ), art

Communication based on IEC 60870-5- ” (Issue H, pril ) the oftware
Identification Section will contain the relay model number and the version number to
identify the type of relay.

Software Identification Section, Byte 0: Numerical part of device type, hex, low

Software Identification Section, Byte 1: Numerical part of device type, hex, low

Software Identification Section, Byte 2: Software version, hex, low

278 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Communication

Software Identification Section, Byte 3: Software version, hex, high

Letters in the software version are converted to numerical values according to the
following rule: A=0, B=1, C=2, D=3 etc.

The Software Identification Section of PowerLogic P1F, version 1A, will then contain
‘ ’ and ‘ ’ as he adecimal coded values

Byte 0: 6FH

Byte 1: 00H

Byte 2: 10H

Byte 3: 00H

In addition to the above identification message, if the relay has been powered up it
will also produce a power up event.

Time Synchronization

Time synchronization is implemented according to clause 7.4.2 of IEC 60870-5-103.

The relay time and date can be set using the time synchronization feature of the
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol. The relay will correct for the transmission delay as
specified in IEC 60870-5-103. If the time synchronization message is sent as a
send/confirm message then the relay will respond with a confirm. Whether the time
synchronization message is sent as a send confirm or a broadcast (send/no reply)
message, a time synchronization message will be returned as Class 1 data.

Spontaneous Events

The events created by the relay will be passed to the master station using the
compatible range and the private range of IEC 60870-5-103 function types and
information numbers.

Events are categorized using the following information:

Common Address

Function Type

Information number

Below tables contains a complete listing of all events produced by the relay.

General Interrogation

General interrogation is implemented according to clause 7.4.3 of IEC 60870-5-103.

The GI request can be used to read the status of the relay, the function numbers,
information numbers and common address offsets that will be returned during the GI
cycle are indicated in below tables.

Cyclic Measurements

The relay will produce measured values using ASDU 3 and ASDU 9 on a cyclical
basis. They can be read from the relay using a Class 2 poll.

It should be noted that the measurands transmitted by the relay are sent as a
proportion of 2.4 times the rated value of the analogue value. The selection of 2.4 for
a particular value is indicated in below tables.

279 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Communication Protection Relay

Commands

Command transmission is implemented according to clause 7.4.4 of IEC 60870-5

-103.

A list of the supported commands is contained in below tables. The relay will
respond to all other commands with an ASDU 1, with a cause of transmission (COT)
of negative acknowledgement of a command

Blocking of Monitor Direction

The relay does not support a facility to block messages in the Monitor direction.

Spontaneous Messages Managed by PowerLogic P1F

These messages include a sub-assembly of events which are generated on the

relay, because some generated events are not registered in VDEW. They are the
most priority messages.

An event is always generated on the rising edge of the information.

Some events can be generated on the rising or lowering edge.

In the list below, events only generated on rising edge will be tagged with a ‘*’.

The following list of processed events contains the messages for the compatible and
the private range for all Overcurrent protection functions, with the associated
FUNCTION TYPE, INFORMATION NUMBER, ASDU TYPE, CAUSE OF
TRANSMISSION

FUN <160>: Function type in Public range for Overcurrent Protections (compatible).

FUN <162>, <163>, <164>, <165>, <168>: Function type in Private range
(Reserved for Overcurrent Protections).

Status indications in monitor direction (Type Identification 1)

ASCI Description FUN INF ASDU COT ADDR Notes
Indication (LEDs + Signal.) 1,7,11,12,
160 19 1 *
reset 20, 21
Reset Latch. Sign Inp 162 223 1 1,7 *
Reset Latched Outputs 1,7,11,12,
162 46 1 *
(Inp+COM) 20, 21
Reset Latched Signaling. 1,7,11,12,
249 131 1 *
And Outputs (HMI+COM) 20, 21
Reset Latched Outputs
162 86 1 1,7 *
(Inp)
Maintenance (Test) Mode
162 157 1 1,7
Inp
Maintenance Mode (Test
160 21 1 11
Mode)
Local Mode 160 22 1 11
Relay Blocked/faulty
160 47 1 1,7
(Hardware Warning)
1,7,11,12,
Setting Group number 1 160 23 1
20, 21
1,7,11,12,
Setting Group number 2 160 24 1
20, 21
1,7,11,12,
Order Command 1 249 129 *
20, 21
1,7,11,12,
Order Command 2 249 130 *
20, 21

280 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Communication

ASCI Description FUN INF ASDU COT ADDR Notes

Status of input –
it includes
Auxiliary input 1 160 27 1 1,7,11
reverse logic
configuration
Auxiliary input 2 160 28 1 1,7,11 as above
Auxiliary input 3 160 29 1 1,7,11 as above
Auxiliary input 4 160 30 1 1,7,11 as above
Auxiliary input 5 163 81 1 1,7,11 as above
Auxiliary input 6 163 82 1 1,7,11 as above
Presence of the
Input 1 163 160 1 1,7 voltage on the
input terminals
Input 2 163 161 1 1,7 as above
Input 3 163 162 1 1,7 as above
Input 4 163 163 1 1,7 as above
Input 5 163 164 1 1,7 as above
Input 6 163 165 1 1,7 as above
Input 7 163 166 1 1,7 as above
Input 8 163 167 1 1,7 as above
Logical state of
the output
- before
Reverse Logic.
Logical state of
the output can
Relay output 1 249 1 1 1,7
differ from
Physical state –
terminals if
Reverse Logic
for this output is
set
Relay output 2 249 2 1 1,7 as above
Relay output 3 249 3 1 1,7 as above
Relay output 4 249 4 1 1,7 as above
Relay output 5 249 5 1 1,7 as above
Relay output 6 249 6 1 1,7 as above
Relay output 7 249 7 1 1,7 as above
Relay output 8 249 8 1 1,7 as above
49 Therm: Starting Itherm 162 194 1 1,7
49 Therm: Trip signal 162 67 1 1,7 *
Therm: Reset Theta Val.
49 162 234 1 1,7 *
(Inp)
49 Therm: Thermal Alarm 162 226 1 1,7
Therm: Reset replica
49 162 231 1 1,7 *
(HMI+RS485+Inp)
Term: Block Itherm Ext
49 162 214 1 1,7
(Inp)
46 Blocking tI2> Ext (Inp) 162 38 1 1,7
SOTF Blocking tSOTF Ext (Inp) 165 34 1 1,7
Blocking tBrkCond Ext
46BC 165 35 1 1,7
(Inp)
AUX Blocking tAUX1 Ext (Inp) 165 36 1 1,7
AUX Blocking tAUX2 Ext (Inp) 165 37 1 1,7
AUX Blocking tAUX3 Ext (Inp) 165 38 1 1,7
79 CB drive ready Ext (Inp) 162 150 1 1,7
Blocked =
Tempor.Block
or Lockout or
79 Blocked/Lockout 162 185 1 1,7
Block:CTRL or
Block:Input or
Disabled

281 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Communication Protection Relay

ASCI Description FUN INF ASDU COT ADDR Notes

Enabled = NOT
1,7,11,12,2 (Block:CTRL or
79 Enabled 160 16 1
0,21 Block:Input or
Disabled)
79 Reclaim time running 162 218 1 1,7
79 Blocking EXT (Inp) 162 152 1 1,7
79 Reclosure successful 163 73 1 1,7
79 Reclosure final trip 165 40 1 1,7
79 Running 162 233 1 1,7
79 Dead time run 162 236 1 1,7
(Re)close signal close
79 160 128 1 1,7 *
(first shot)
(Re)close signal closes
79 160 129 1 1,7 *
(2nd to 4th shot)
79 Fast Trip Phase 165 41 1 1,7 *
79 Fast Trip Earth 165 42 1 1,7 *
79 Not ready 160 130 1 1,7
Ext./user
Enabled = NOT
79 Ext./user enabled 162 144 1 1,7
(Block:CTRL or
Block:Input)
Lockout: ARC
internally
79 Recloser Lockout 165 43 1 1,7
blocked up to
Signaling reset
too many of
ARC cycles in
Recloser Rolling Demand
79 165 44 1 1,7 settable
Alarm
monitoring
window
Manual. Trip Ext (Inp) 162 148 1 1,7 *
Trip CB Order
162 9 1 1,7 *
(Inp+HMI+RS485)
Manual. Close Ext (Inp) 162 47 1 1,7 *
Manual. Close Command
162 246 1 1,7 *
(Inp+HMI)
Close CB Order
162 239 1 1,7 *
(Inp+HMI+RS485+79)
CB Status 52A Inp 163 253 1 1,7
CB Trip Number
CBM 164 210 1 1,7
Diagnostic Alarm
CB Trip Current Diagnostic
CBM 164 212 1 1,7
Alarm
CBM: tCB FLT (faulty) Ext.
CBM 165 45 1 1,7
Alarm
TCS Trip Circuit
CBM 165 16 1 1,7
Supervision Alarm
CBM CB Time Monitoring Alarm 165 46 1 1,7 *
State of CB (not correct)
CBM 165 47 1 1,7
ALARM
FT_RC: Faulty time tag 163 74 1 1,7 *

Fault Indications in monitor direction (Type Identification 2)

ASCI Description FUN INF ASDU COT ADDR Notes
General Start / pick-up I>,
I>>, I>>>, SOTF, IN_1, 160 84 2 1,7
IN_2, IN_3
General Trip 160 68 2 1,7 *
50/51 Start / pick-up A 160 64 2 1,7
50/51 Start / pick-up B 160 65 2 1,7
50/51 Start / pick-up C 160 66 2 1,7

282 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Communication

ASCI Description FUN INF ASDU COT ADDR Notes

50/51 Start / pick-up N 160 67 2 1,7
Inrush restr. Trig 165 48 2 1,7
50/51 Start / pick-up I> 162 111 2 1,7
50/51 Blocking tI> Ext (Inp) 162 32 2 1,7
50/51 tI> elapsed 162 169 2 1,7 *
50/51 Trip tI> 160 90 2 1,7 *
50/51 Start / pick-up I>> 162 96 2 1,7
50/51 Blocking tI>> Ext (Inp) 162 33 2 1,7
50/51 tI>> elapsed 162 162 2 1,7 *
50/51 Trip tI>> 160 91 2 1,7 *
50/51 Start / pick-up I>>> 162 56 2 1,7
50/51 Blocking tI>>> Ext (Inp) 162 82 2 1,7
50/51 tI>>> elapsed 162 163 2 1,7 *
50/51 Trip tI>>> 162 141 2 1,7 *
SOTF Start / pick-up SOTF 165 32 2 1,7
SOTF tSOTF elapsed 165 33 2 1,7 *
SOTF Trip tSOTF 162 211 2 1,7 *
Start / pick-up IN_1 stage
50/51N 162 114 2 1,7
(IN>)
Blocking t N_1 stage (IN>)
50/51N 162 83 2 1,7
Ext (Inp)
50/51N tIN_1 stage (IN>) elapsed 162 164 2 1,7 *
50/51N Trip tIN_1 stage (IN>) 160 92 2 1,7 *
Start / pick-up IN_2 stage
50/51N 162 97 2 1,7
(IN>>)
Blocking tIN_2 stage
50/51N 162 84 2 1,7
(IN>>) Ext (Inp)
tIN_2 stage (IN>>)
50/51N 162 186 2 1,7 *
elapsed
50/51N Trip tIN_2 stage (IN>>) 160 93 2 1,7 *
Start / pick-up IN_3 stage
50/51N 162 57 2 1,7
(IN>>>)
Blocking tIN_3 stage
50/51N 162 85 2 1,7
(IN>>>) Ext (Inp)
tIN_3 stage (IN>>>)
50/51N 162 74 2 1,7 *
elapsed
Trip signal tIN_3 stage
50/51N 162 93 2 1,7 *
(IN>>>)
46 Start / pick-up I2> 162 41 2 1,7
46 tI2> elapsed 162 182 2 1,7 *
46 Trip signal tI2> 162 171 2 1,7 *
46BC Start / pick-up BrkCond 165 15 2 1,7
46BC tBrkCond elapsed 165 49 2 1,7 *
46BC Trip signal tBrkCond 165 17 2 1,7 *
CBF CBF running 164 240 2 1,7 *
CBF Start tBF (Inp) 165 20 2 1,7
CBF tCBF elapsed 160 85 2 1,7 *
CBF Trip signal CBF 164 241 2 1,7 *
AUX Start AUX1 163 93 2 1,7
AUX tAUX1 elapsed 163 94 2 1,7
AUX Trip tAUX1 165 22 2 1,7 *
AUX Start AUX2 163 95 2 1,7
AUX tAUX2 elapsed 163 96 2 1,7
AUX Trip tAUX2 165 23 2 1,7 *
AUX Start AUX3 163 97 2 1,7
AUX tAUX3 elapsed 163 98 2 1,7
AUX Trip tAUX3 165 24 2 1,7 *
AUX Start AUX4 163 99 2 1,7
AUX tAUX4 elapsed 163 100 2 1,7
AUX Trip tAUX4 165 25 2 1,7 *
FT_RC System disturb. Run 162 241 2 1,7

283 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Communication Protection Relay

ASCI Description FUN INF ASDU COT ADDR Notes

FT_RC Record. In progress 162 220 2 1,7
Start Distur. Recorder
FT_RC 162 172 2 1,7
INP+COM
FT_RC Trigger INP 162 22 2 1,7

Control Indications in Monitor Direction:

CB monitoring: FUN<242>; INF <1>; COT<1, 7,11>, <ADDR>

NOTE: The value of CB monitoring DPI can have 4 stages:

DPI
<0000 0000> “Undefined / Between closed and opened”

<0000 0001> “opened”

<0000 0010> “closed”

<0000 0011> “Undefined / Faulty”

List of data contained in General Interrogation

It is given in the answer to the General Interrogation (GI).

Relay state information are Class 1 data, they are systematically sent to the master
station, during a General Interrogation.

The list of processed data, following a General Interrogation, is given below: it is a

sub-assembly of the spontaneous message list, so like spontaneous messages,
these data are generated on rising and lowering edge.

Status Indications (Monitor Direction):

ASCI Description FUN INF ASDU COT ADDR Notes
Maintenance (Test) Mode
162 157 1 9
Inp
Maintenance Mode (Test
160 21 1 9
Mode)
Local Mode 160 22 1 9
Relay Blocked/faulty
160 47 1 9
(Hardware Warning)
Setting Group number 1 160 23 1 9
Setting Group number 2 160 24 1 9
Auxiliary input 1 160 27 1 9
Auxiliary input 2 160 28 1 9
Auxiliary input 3 160 29 1 9
Auxiliary input 4 160 30 1 9
Auxiliary input 5 163 81 1 9
Auxiliary input 6 163 82 1 9
Presence of the
Input 1 163 160 1 9 voltage on the
input terminals
Input 2 163 161 1 9 as above
Input 3 163 162 1 9 as above
Input 4 163 163 1 9 as above
Input 5 163 164 1 9 as above
Input 6 163 165 1 9 as above
Input 7 163 166 1 9 as above
Input 8 163 167 1 9 as above
Logical state of
the output
Relay output 1 249 1 1 9
- before
Reverse Logic.

284 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Communication

ASCI Description FUN INF ASDU COT ADDR Notes

Logical state of
the output can
differ from
Physical state –
terminals if
Reverse Logic
for this output is
set
Relay output 2 249 2 1 9 as above
Relay output 3 249 3 1 9 as above
Relay output 4 249 4 1 9 as above
Relay output 5 249 5 1 9 as above
Relay output 6 249 6 1 9 as above
Relay output 7 249 7 1 9 as above
Relay output 8 249 8 1 9 as above
49 Therm: Starting Itherm 162 194 1 9
49 Therm: Thermal Alarm 162 226 1 9
Term: Block Itherm Ext
49 162 214 1 9
(Inp)
46 Blocking tI2> Ext (Inp) 162 38 1 9
SOTF Blocking tSOTF Ext (Inp) 165 34 1 9
Blocking tBrkCond Ext
46BC 165 35 1 9
(Inp)
AUX Blocking tAUX1 Ext (Inp) 165 36 1 9
AUX Blocking tAUX2 Ext (Inp) 165 37 1 9
AUX Blocking tAUX3 Ext (Inp) 165 38 1 9
79 CB drive ready Ext (Inp) 162 150 1 9
Blocked =
Tempor.Block
or Lockout or
79 Blocked/Lockout 162 185 1 9
Block:CTRL or
Block:Input or
Disabled
Enabled = NOT
(Block:CTRL or
79 Enabled 160 16 1 9
Block:Input or
Disabled)
79 Reclaim time running 162 218 1 9
79 Blocking EXT (Inp) 162 152 1 9
79 Reclosure successful 163 73 1 9
79 Reclosure final trip 165 40 1 9
79 Running 162 233 1 9
79 Dead time run 162 236 1 9
79 Fast Trip Phase 165 41 1 9
79 Fast Trip Earth 165 42 1 9
79 Not ready 160 130 1 9
Ext./user
Enabled = NOT
79 Ext./user enabled 162 144 1 9
(Block:CTRL or
Block:Input)
Lockout: ARC
internally
79 Recloser Lockout 165 43 1 9
blocked up to
Signaling reset
too many of
ARC cycles in
Recloser Rolling Demand
79 165 44 1 9 settable
Alarm
monitoring
window
CB Status 52A Inp 163 253 1 9
CB Trip Number
CBM 164 210 1 9
Diagnostic Alarm

285 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Communication Protection Relay

ASCI Description FUN INF ASDU COT ADDR Notes

CB Trip Current Diagnostic
CBM 164 212 1 9
Alarm
CBM: tCB FLT (faulty) Ext.
CBM 165 45 1 9
Alarm
TCS Trip Circuit
CBM 165 16 1 9
Supervision Alarm
State of CB (not correct)
CBM 165 47 1 9
ALARM

Fault Indications in monitor direction

ASCI Description FUN INF ASDU COT ADDR Notes
General Start / pick-up I>,
I>>, I>>>, SOTF, IN_1, 160 84 2 9
IN_2, IN_3
50/51 Start / pick-up A 160 64 2 9
50/51 Start / pick-up B 160 65 2 9
50/51 Start / pick-up C 160 66 2 9
50/51 Start / pick-up N 160 67 2 9
Inrush restr. Trig 165 48 2 9
50/51 Start / pick-up I> 162 111 2 9
50/51 Blocking tI> Ext (Inp) 162 32 2 9
50/51 Start / pick-up I>> 162 96 2 9
50/51 Blocking tI>> Ext (Inp) 162 33 2 9
50/51 Start / pick-up I>>> 162 56 2 9
50/51 Blocking tI>>> Ext (Inp) 162 82 2 9
SOTF Start / pick-up SOTF 165 32 2 9
Start / pick-up IN_1 stage
50/51N 162 114 2 9
(IN>)
Blocking t N_1 stage (IN>)
50/51N 162 83 2 9
Ext (Inp)
Start / pick-up IN_2 stage
50/51N 162 97 2 9
(IN>>)
Blocking tIN_2 stage
50/51N 162 84 2 9
(IN>>) Ext (Inp)
Start / pick-up IN_3 stage
50/51N 162 57 2 9
(IN>>>)
Blocking tIN_3 stage
50/51N 162 85 2 9
(IN>>>) Ext (Inp)
46 Start / pick-up I2> 162 41 2 9
46BC Start / pick-up BrkCond 165 15 2 9
CBF Start tBF (Inp) 165 20 2 9
AUX Start AUX1 163 93 2 9
AUX tAUX1 elapsed 163 94 2 9
AUX Start AUX2 163 95 2 9
AUX tAUX2 elapsed 163 96 2 9
AUX Start AUX3 163 97 2 9
AUX tAUX3 elapsed 163 98 2 9
AUX Start AUX4 163 99 2 9
AUX tAUX4 elapsed 163 100 2 9
FT_RC System disturb. Run 162 241 2 9
FT_RC Record. In progress 162 220 2 9
Start Distur. Recorder
FT_RC 162 172 2 9
INP+COM
FT_RC Trigger INP 162 22 2 9

Control indications in monitor direction:

CB monitoring: FUN<242>; INF <1>; COT<9>, <ADDR>

NOTE: The value of CB monitoring DPI can have 4 stages:

286 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Communication

DPI
<0000 0000> “Undefined / Between closed and opened”

<0000 0001> “opened”

<0000 0010> “closed”

<0000 0011> “Undefined / Faulty”

Processed Commands

System Commands:

Synchronization Command (ASDU 6): FUN<255>, INF <0>; TYP <6>; COT<8>

This command can be sent to a specific relay, or global. The time sent by master is
the time of the first bit of the frame. The relay synchronizes with this time, corrected
by the frame transmission delay. After updating its time, the relay sends back an
acknowledge to the master, by giving its new current time.

This acknowledge message will be an event of ASDU 6 type.

General Interrogation Initialization command (ASDU 7):

FUN<255>; INF <0>; TYP <7>; COT<9>

This command starts the relay interrogation:

The relay then sends a list of data containing the relay state (see list described
above).

The GI command contains a scan number which will be included in the answers of
the GI cycle generated by the GI command.

If a data has just changed before extracted by the GI, the new state is sent to the
master station.

When an event is generated during the GI cycle, the event is sent in priority, and the
GI cycle is temporarily interrupted. The end of the GI consists in sending an ASDU 8
to the master station.

If, during a General Interrogation cycle, another GI Initialization command is

received, the precedent answer is stopped, and the new GI cycle started.

General Commands (ASDU 20) (Control direction): Availability

LED Reset and Sign. Reset:

This command reset LEDs, signaling:
FUN<160>; INF<19>, TYP<20>, COT <20>, <ADDR>
In LED Reset control command, the allowed value is:

DCO <0000 0010> “Reset”

Output Reset:
This command reset Latched Outputs:
FUN<162>; INF<46>, TYP<20>, COT <20>, <ADDR>

In Latched Outputs Reset control command the allowed value is:

DCO <0000 0010> “Reset”

Setting group number 1: FUN<160>; INF<23>, TYP<20>, COT <20>, <ADDR>

In Setting group number 1 control command the allowed value is:
DCO <0000 0010> “ et Group ”

287 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Communication Protection Relay

Setting group number 2: FUN<160>; INF<24>, TYP<20>, COT <20>, <ADDR>

In Setting group number 2 control command the allowed value is:

DCO <0000 0010> “ et Group ”

Order Command 1: FUN<249>; INF <129>; COT<20>, <ADDR>

In Order Command 1 control command the allowed value is:

DCO <0000 0001> “ ”

DCO <0000 0010> “ ”

Order Command 2: FUN<249>; INF <130>; COT<20>, <ADDR>

In Order Command 2 control command the allowed value is:

DCO <0000 0001> “ ”

DCO <0000 0010> “ ”

Reset Latched Signaling and Outputs: FUN<249>; INF <131>; COT<20>,

<ADDR>
Note: Reset Latched Signaling and Outputs is used for command and indication
(see: Status indications in monitor direction Type Identification).
Reset via RS485 the allowed value is:
DCO <0000 0001> “ ”

DCO <0000 0010> “ ”

CB control Open command: FUN<242>; INF <65>; TYP <20>; COT<20>,

<ADDR>
In CB control command the DCO allowed values are:

DCO <0000 0001> “ ” “Close CB”

<0000 0010> “ ” “Open CB”

CB control Close command FUN<242>; INF <66>; TYP <20>; COT<20>,

<ADDR>
In CB control command the DCO allowed values are:

DCO <0000 0001> “ ” “Open CB”

<0000 0010> “ ” “Close CB”

ARC: Enabled FUN<160>; INF<16>; COT<20>, <ADDR>
Note: ARC: Enabled is used for command and indication (see: Status indications
in monitor direction Type Identification).
In ARC: Enabled command the DCO allowed values are:

DCO <0000 0001> “OFF”

<0000 0010> “ON”

General commands are processed according to clause 7.4.4 of IEC 60870-5-103.
After executing one of these commands, the relay sends a positive or negative
acknowledge message, which contains the result of command execution.
If a state change is the consequence of the command, it must be sent in an ASDU 1
with COT 12 (remote operation).
If the relay receives another command message from the master station before
sending the acknowledge message for the previous command, it will be discarded
and a negative acknowledge message will be sent.
Commands which are not processed by the relay are rejected with a negative
acknowledge message.

288 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Communication

Relay re initialization

In case of relay re initialization, the relay send to the master station:

- a message indicating relay start/restart (FUN<160>;INF<5> ; TYP<5> COT<5> )

- or a message indicating Reset CU (FUN<160>;INF<5> ; TYP<3> COT<4> )

- or a message indicating Reset FCB (FUN<160>;INF<5> ; TYP<2> COT<3> )

Each identification message of the relay (ASDU 5) contains the manufacturer name
in 8 ASCII characters (“PowerLo “) and 4 free bytes containing:

- byte [0] (device version, decimal): 1 (0 = P1F, 1 = P1V, 2 = P1P)

- byte [1] (firmware major, char): ‘2’, ‘3’, ...

- byte [2] (firmware major, char): ‘E’, ‘F’, ...

- byte [3] (firmware version, decimal): 16, 17, ...

Cyclic Messages (ASDU9 and ASDU3)

Only measurements can be stored in these messages.

The measured values are stored in lower levels of communication, before polling by
master station.

Ia, Ib, Ic are transmitted with ASDU 9 (FUN<160>, INF<148>).

IN is transmitted with ASDU 3(FUN<160>, INF<147>).

All other measurements are unused in ASDU 3 and ASDU 9.

The values are stored with a rate of 2,4 * nominal value = 4096.

Thermal Overload value is transmitted with ASDU 3 (FUN<162>, INF<23>).

Scaling: 1% * value (range: 0-200)

289 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Characteristics Protection Relay

Characteristics
Function Characteristics
General Characteristics

In the tables below:

• In is the phase CT primary rated current.
• Ion is the earth CT primary rated current.
• A full explanation is given in the reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).

CT Transformation Ratio

Current transformer Characteristic Values

Phase CT Primary rated current (In) …

Step 1A

Secondary rated current 1 A/5 A

Earth CT Primary rated current (Ion) …

Step 1A

Secondary rated current 1 A/5 A

Phase Currents

Characteristic Values

Measuring range . … In

Accuracy ±(2% typical at In + 2 digits)

Unit A or kA

Display Format 3 significant digits

Display refresh period 0.5 s

Earth Fault Currents

Characteristic Versions Values

Measuring range Standard . … Ion

Sensitive . … Ion

Accuracy Standard ±(2% typical at Ion + 2 digits)

Sensitive ±(2% typical at Ion + 2 digits)

Unit A or kA

Display Format 3 significant digits

Display refresh period 0.5 s

290 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Characteristics

Voltage (VN) Analog VT Input

Characteristic Values

Measuring range … ac

Accuracy ±(0.5% from measuring value + 0.1 digits)

Unit V or kV

Display Format 3 significant digits

Display refresh period 0.5 s

291 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Characteristics Protection Relay

Phase Overcurrent Protection

Characteristic of the I> and I>> Set Points Values

I>? Disabled
I>>? Trip,
Alarm
Trip-Inrush Bl (A, E, E+)
Trip-Latch (A, E, E+)
Trip-Phase A (E, E+)
Trip-Phase B (E, E+)
Trip-Phase C (E, E+)
Tripping curve DMT
IEC SI
IEC VI
IEC EI
LTI
STI
RC
RI
IEEE MI
IEEE VI
IEEE EI
US CO2-P20
US CO8
RXIDG
BNP EDF
US CO2-P40
US CO5
US CO6
US CO7
US CO9
US CO11
HV_Fuse
I> Threshold DMT Setting range . … . In (step . In)
I>> Threshold Accuracy Is ±5% or ±0.01In
Drop off 0.95 Is ±5% or ±0.01In
Transient overreach <10%
IDMT Setting range . … . In (step . In)
Accuracy 1.1 Is ±5% or ±0.01In
Drop off 1.05 Is ±5% or ±0.01In
I> Time delay DMT Setting range . … s (step . s)
I>> Time delay Accuracy ±2% or ±50ms*
IDMT TMS** Setting range . … .5 s (step: 0.01 s)
Accuracy ±5% or ±50ms
IDMT TD** Setting range . … s (step: 0.01 s)
Accuracy ±5% or ±50ms
*During investigation of operation time – injection current must be 2 times greater
than setting value.
**If TMS/TD value is selected in eSetup Easergy Pro from out of defined range then
TMS/TD is set on 1.

Characteristic of the I>>> Set Points Values

I>>>? Disabled
Trip,
Alarm
Trip-Inrush Bl (A, E, E+)
Trip-Latch (A, E, E+)
Trip-Phase A (E, E+)
Trip-Phase B (E, E+)
Trip-Phase C (E, E+)
Tripping curve DMT
I>>> Threshold DMT Setting range . … . In (step: 0.01 In)
Accuracy Is ±5% or ±0.01In
Drop off 0.95 Is ±5% or ±0.01In
Transient overreach <10%
I>>> Time delay DMT Setting range . … s (step . s)
Accuracy** ±2% or ±50ms*
*During investigation of operation time – injection current must be 2 times greater
than setting value
**The min trip time will be < 40ms, if timer is set to 0s.

292 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Characteristics

In order to achieve 40ms min trip time, the submenu “LOC - H ” need to be
set to Enabled during “I>, I>>, I>>> (1 harmonic or True RMS)” set to harmonic,
and “time delay” of I>>>, IN>>>, IN>> set to 0ms.
HCDFT means that I>>>, IN>>>, IN>> protection function can use Half cycle Fourier
algorithm to detect big fault current faster.

Earth Fault Protection

Characteristic of the IN_1 Set Points Values

IN_1>? Disabled
Trip,
Alarm
Trip-Inrush Bl (A, E, E+)
Trip-Latch (A, E, E+)
Incos Trip (E+)
Incos Alarm (E+)
Insin Trip (E+)
Insin Alarm (E+)
GN Trip (E+)
GN Alarm (E+)
BN Trip (E+)
BN Alarm (E+)
YN Trip (E+)
YN Alarm (E+)
Tripping curve DMT
IEC SI
IEC VI
IEC EI
LTI
STI
RC
RI
IEEE MI
IEEE VI
IEEE EI
US CO2-P20
US CO8
RXIDG
BNP EDF
US CO2-P40
US CO5
US CO6
US CO7
US CO9
US CO11
HV_Fuse
IN_1> Threshold DMT . … Ion Setting range . … . Ion (step . Ion)
Non – directional Accuracy Ios ±5% or ±0.002 Ion
Drop off 0.95 Ios ±5% or ±0.002 Ion
Transient overreach <10%
DMT . … Ion Setting range . … . Ion (step . Ion)
Accuracy Ios ±5% or ±0.005 Ion
Drop off 0.95 Ios ±5% or ±0.005 Ion
Transient overreach <10%
IDMT . … Ion Setting range . … . Ion (step . Ion)
Accuracy 1.1 Ios ±5% or ±0.002 Ion
Drop off 1.05 Ios ±5% or ±0.002 Ion
IDMT . … Ion Setting range . … . Ion (step . Ion)
Accuracy 1.1 Ios Ios ±5% or ±0.005 Ion
Drop off 1.05 Ios ±5% or ±0.005 Ion
IN_1> Time delay DMT Setting range . … s (step . s)
Non – directional Accuracy ±2% or ±50ms*
IDMT TMS** Setting range . … .5 s (step: 0.01 s)
Accuracy ±5% or ±50ms***
IDMT TD** Setting range . … s (step . s)
Accuracy ±5% or ±50ms***
IN_1> Threshold DMT . … Ion Setting range . … . Ion (step . Ion)
Incos Accuracy Ios ±5% or ±0.002 Ion**
Insin Drop off 0.95 Ios ±5% or ±0.002 Ion
DMT . … Ion Setting range . … . Ion (step . Ion)
Accuracy Ios ±5% or ±0.005 Ion**
Drop off 0.95 Ios ±5% or ±0.002 Ion
IDMT . … Ion Setting range . … . Ion (step . Ion)
Accuracy 1.1 Ios ±5% or ±0.002 Ion**

293 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Characteristics Protection Relay

Drop off 1.05 Ios ±5% or ±0.002 Ion

IDMT . … Ion Setting range . … . Ion (step . Ion)
Accuracy 1.1 Ios ±5% or ±0.005 Ion**
Drop off 1.05 Ios ±5% or ±0.002 Ion
IN_1> Threshold DMT . … mS Setting range . … mS (step: 0.01 mS)
GN Accuracy Set value ±10% or ±0.1mS**
BN Drop off 0.95 Set value ±10% or ±0.1mS
DMT . … mS Setting range . … mS (step: 0.01 mS)
Accuracy Set value ±10% or ±0.1mS**
Drop off 0.95 Set value ±10% or ±0.1mS
IDMT . … mS Setting range . … mS (step: 0.01 mS)
Accuracy 1.1 Set value ±10% or ±0.1mS**
Drop off 1.05 Set value ±10% or ±0.1mS
IDMT . … mS Setting range . … mS (step: 0.01 mS)
Accuracy 1.1 Set value ±10% or ±0.1mS**
Drop off 1.05 Set value ±10% or ±0.1mS
IN_1> Threshold DMT . … mS Setting range . … mS (step: 0.01 mS)
YN Accuracy Set value ±10% or ±0.1mS
Drop off 0.95 Set value ±10% or ±0.1mS
DMT . … mS Setting range . … mS (step: 0.01 mS)
Accuracy Set value ±10% or ±0.1mS
Drop off 0.95 Set value ±10% or ±0.1mS
IDMT . … mS Setting range . … mS (step: 0.01 mS)
Accuracy 1.1 Set value ±10% or ±0.1mS
Drop off 1.05 Set value ±10% or ±0.1mS
IDMT . … mS Setting range . … mS (step: 0.01 mS)
Accuracy 1.1 Set value ±10% or ±0.1mS
Drop off 1.05 Set value ±10% or ±0.1mS
IN_1> Time delay DMT Setting range . … s (step . s)
Incos Accuracy ±2% or ±50ms*
Insin IDMT TMS**** Setting range . … .5 s (step: 0.01 s)
GN Accuracy ±8% or ±50ms***
BN IDMT TD**** Setting range . … s (step . s)
YN Accuracy ±8% or ±50ms***
*During investigation of operation time – injection current must be 2 times greater
than setting value
**Additional deviation should be added:
• |1/cos|% for Incos and GN
• |1/sin|% for Insin and BN
Additional deviation comes from the inaccuracy of the angle measurement between
the current 3Io and voltage 3Vo.
***According to standard IEC 60255-151. For RC characteristic: ±(12% + 50 ms).
****If TMS/TD value is selected in eSetup Easergy Pro from out of defined range
then TMS/TD is set on 1.
Characteristic of the IN_2 Set Points Values
IN_2? Disabled
Trip,
Alarm
Trip-Inrush Bl (A, E, E+)
Trip-Latch (A, E, E+)
Incos Trip (E+)
Incos Alarm (E+)
Insin Trip (E+)
Insin Alarm (E+)
GN Trip (E+)
GN Alarm (E+)
BN Trip (E+)
BN Alarm (E+)
YN Trip (E+)
YN Alarm (E+)
Tripping curve DMT
IN_2 Threshold DMT 0.05… Ion Setting range . … . Ion (step . Ion)
Non-directional Accuracy Ios ±5% or ±0.002 Ion
Drop off 0.95 Ios ±5% or ±0.002 Ion
Transient overreach <10%
DMT 0.3… Ion Setting range . … . Ion (step . Ion)
Accuracy Ios ±5% or ±0.005 Ion
Drop off 0.95 Ios ±5% or ±0.005 Ion
Transient overreach <10%
IN_2> Time delay DMT Setting range 0.00… s (step . s)
Non – directional Accuracy*** ±2% or ±50ms*
IN_2> Threshold DMT 0.05… Ion Setting range 0.05… . Ion (step . Ion)

294 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Characteristics

Incos Accuracy Ios ±5% or ±0.002 Ion**

Insin Drop off 0.95 Ios ±5% or ±0.002 Ion
DMT 0.3… Ion Setting range 0.3… . Ion (step . Ion)
Accuracy Ios ±5% or ±0.005 Ion**
Drop off 0.95 Ios ±5% or ±0.002 Ion
IN_2> Threshold DMT . … mS Setting range . … mS (step: 0.01 mS)
GN Accuracy Set value ±10% or ±0.1mS**
BN Drop off 0.95 Set value ±10% or ±0.1mS
DMT . … mS Setting range . … mS (step: 0.01 mS)
Accuracy Set value ±10% or ±0.1mS**
Drop off 0.95 Set value ±10% or ±0.1mS
IN_2> Threshold DMT . … mS Setting range . … mS (step: 0.01 mS)
YN Accuracy Set value ±10% or ±0.1mS
Drop off 0.95 Set value ±10% or ±0.1mS
DMT . … mS Setting range . … mS (step: 0.01 mS)
Accuracy Set value ±10% or ±0.1mS
Drop off 0.95 Set value ±10% or ±0.1mS
IN_2> Time delay DMT Setting range . … s (step . s)
Incos Accuracy ±2% or ±50ms*
Insin
GN
BN
YN
*During investigation of operation time – injection current must be 2 times greater
than setting value
**Additional deviation should be added:
• |1/cos|% for Incos and GN
• |1/sin|% for Insin and BN
Additional deviation comes from the inaccuracy of the angle measurement between
the current 3Io and voltage 3Vo.
***The min trip time will be < 40ms, if timer is set to 0s.
In order to achieve ms min trip time, the submenu “ - H ” need to be
set to Enabled during “I , I , I ( harmonic or rue )” set to harmonic,
and “time delay” of I ,I ,I set to ms.
HCDFT means that I>>>, IN>>>, IN>> protection function can use Half cycle Fourier
algorithm to detect big fault current faster.

Characteristic of the IN_3 (E, E+) Set Points Values

IN_3? Disabled
Trip,
Alarm
Trip-Inrush Bl
Trip-Latch
Tripping curve DMT
IN_3 Threshold DMT 0.05… Ion Setting range . … . Ion (step: 0.001 Ion)
Accuracy Ios ±5% or ±0.002 Ion
Drop off 0.95 Ios ±5% or ±0.002 Ion
Transient overreach <10%
DMT 0.3… Ion Setting range . … . Ion (step: 0.001 Ion)
Accuracy Ios ±5% or ±0.005 Ion
Drop off 0.95 Ios ±5% or ±0.005 Ion
Transient overreach <10%
IN_3> Time delay DMT Setting range . … s (step . s)
Non – directional Accuracy** ±2% or ±50ms*
*During investigation of operation time – injection current must be 2 times greater
than setting value
**The min trip time will be < 40ms, if timer is set to 0s.
In order to achieve 40ms min trip time, the submenu “ - H ” need to be
set to Enabled during “I , I , I ( harmonic or rue )” set to harmonic,
and “time delay” of I ,I ,I set to ms.
HCDFT means that I>>>, IN>>>, IN>> protection function can use Half cycle Fourier
algorithm to detect big fault current faster.

295 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Characteristics Protection Relay

Cold Load Pick -up

Characteristics Values
Cold Load PU? Disabled,
Input+Curr
Input Only
Activity Cold Load PU I>
Cold Load PU I>>
Cold Load PU I>>>
Cold Load PU IN_1 (IN>)
Cold Load PU IN_2 (IN>>)
Cold Load PU IN_3 (IN>>>) (E, E+)
Cold Load PU Brkn Cond (E, E+)
Cold Load PU Itherm (N, A, B, E, E+)
Cold Load PU I2> (E, E+)

Cold load PU Level Setting range … (step )

Set point accuracy after CLPU function action Same as accuracy on I>, I>>, I>>>, IN_1, IN_2,
IN_3, Brkn Cond, Itherm, I2>
tCL (CLPU function time Setting range . … . s (step . s)
of activity) Accuracy ±2% or ±40ms

Thermal Overload Protection

Characteristics Values
Therm OL? Disabled,
Enabled
Tripping curve DMT
Itherm Alarm Setting range … (step ) of the permissible
thermal capacity used (tripping set point)
Threshold
Accuracy ±5% or ±0.01 In
Trip Setting range . … . In (step . In)
Accuracy Itherm ±5% or ±0.01 In
Drop-off 0.95 Itherm ±5% or ±0.01 In
Time constant Setting range … min (step min)
Te (heating)
Setting range … min (step min)
Tr (cooling)

External Trip (Auxiliary Timers) Protection

Characteristics Values
AUX1? Disabled,
AUX2? Trip,
AUX3? Alarm,
AUX4? Trip-Inrush Bl (A, E, E+),
Trip-Latch (A, E, E+),
Load Shedding (E, E+),
AR after LS Hi (E, E+),
AR after LS Lo (E, E+)
Tripping curve DMT
Time delay Setting range . … . s (step: 0.01 s)
tAUX1?
tAUX2? Accuracy ±2% or ±50ms
tAUX3?
tAUX4?

Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection

Characteristic of the Is2> Set Points Values

Is2>? Disabled
Trip,
Alarm,
Trip-Inrush Bl,
Trip-Latch

296 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Characteristics

Tripping curve DMT

IEC SI
IEC VI
IEC EI
LTI
STI
RC
RI
IEEE MI
IEEE VI
IEEE EI
US CO2-P20
US CO8
RXIDG
BNP EDF
US CO2-P40
US CO5
US CO6
US CO7
US CO9
US CO11
HV_Fuse
Is2> Threshold DMT Setting range . … . In (step . In)
Accuracy ls ±5% or ±0.01 ln
Drop off 0.95 ls ±5% or ±0.01 ln
IDMT Setting range . … . In (step . In)
Accuracy 1.1 ls ±5% or ±0.01 ln
Drop off 1.05 ls ±5% or ±0.01 ln
Is2> Time delay DMT Setting range . … s (step . s)
Accuracy ±2% or ±50ms*
IDMT TMS** Setting range . … .5 s (step: 0.01 s)
Accuracy ±5% or ±50ms
IDMT TD** Setting range . … s (step . s)
Accuracy ±5% or ±50ms
*During investigation of operation time – injection current must be 2 times greater
than setting value.
**If TMS/TD value is selected in eSetup Easergy Pro from out of defined range then
TMS/TD is set on 1.

Broken Conductor

Characteristic of the Is2/Is1 Set Points Values

Broken Cond.? Disabled
Trip,
Alarm,
Trip-Inrush Bl
Trip-Latch
Tripping curve DMT
Ratio Is2/Is1 Threshold Setting range … (step )
Accuracy ls ±5% or ±0.01 In

Drop off 0.95 ls ±5% or ±0.01 ln

tBCond Time delay Setting range . … s (step 0.01 s)
Accuracy ±5% or ±50ms*
*During investigation of operation time – injection current must be 2 times greater
than setting value.

Switch on to Fault

Characteristic of the SOTF Set Points Values

SOTF.? Disabled
Trip,
Alarm,
Trip-Inrush Bl (A, E, E+),
Trip-Latch (A, E, E+)
Tripping curve DMT
SOTF Threshold Setting range . … . In (step . In)
Accuracy ls ±5% or ±0.01 In
Drop off 0.95 ls ±5% or ±0.01 In
tSOTF Time delay Setting range . … s (step . s)
Accuracy ±2% or ±50ms*

297 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Characteristics Protection Relay

*During investigation of operation time – injection current must be 2 times greater

than setting value.

Circuit Breaker Failure

Broken Conductor I

Menu Text Default Setting

Broken Cond.? Disabled*
Ratio I2/I1 20%
tBCond 100 s
*If the stage/function is disabled all settings concerning this stage/function in the
menu cells are hidden.

Thermal Overload [49] (NABE)

Menu Text Default Setting

Therm OL? Disabled*
Itherm 1.0 x In
Te (heating) 40 mn
Tr (cooling) 40 mn
Theta Trip 100%
Theta Trip/Reset Ratio 90%
Theta Alarm 100%
*If the stage/function is disabled all settings concerning this stage/function in the
menu cells are hidden.

CB Fail [50BF]

Menu Text Default Setting

CBF ? Disabled*
CB Fail Time tBF 0.1 s
I< Threshold CBF 0.1 x In
IN< Threshold CBF 0.1 x Ien
Block I>? (E, E+) No
Block IN>? (E, E+) No
*If the stage/function is disabled all settings concerning this stage/function in the
menu cells are hidden.

Auxiliary Timers (ABE)

Input Configuration

Menu Text Default Setting

Setting Group Group 1
t Change Settings G1→G2 (B, A, E,
0.00 s
E+)
Copy Settings No Operation

Menu Text Default Setting

VN Threshold 5.0 V
G1 IN_1 direct. Line
G1 IN_2 direct. Line
G2 IN_1 direct. Line
G2 IN_2 direct. Line
Incos, Insin Sector Angle 90 

[79] Advanced Settings (E, E+)

Menu Text Default Setting

CB FLT Montor.? No
Block.via Input? No
Start Dead t on CB trips
Rolling Demand? No
Max cycles No. Rol.Demand 10
Time period Rol. Demmand 10 mn
Inhibit Time tI on Close 1s
Signaling Reset No

Communication Orders (A, E, E+)

Menu Text Default Setting

Pulse Time tCOM1 1s
Pulse Time tCOM2 1s
COM2 Order Conf. RS485

311 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Characteristics Protection Relay

Communication (in Model L optional)

Menu Text Default Setting

Protocol Modbus
Relay Address 1
Baud Rate 19200 bits/s
Parity No parity
Stop bits 1 stop bit

Disturbance Recorder (A, E, E+)

Menu Text Default Setting

Pre-Time 0.1 s
Post-Time 0.1 s
Disturbance Rec.Trig. on Inst.
Max Record Time 4s

Commissioning (A, E, E+)

Menu Text Default Setting

Description of bits: L: 87654321

I/P
00000000
Status
Description of bits: RL: W54321
Relay O/P
000000
Status
Maintenance Mode No
Description of bits: RL: W54321
Test Pattern 000000
Contact Test Time 0.1 s
Test outputs no operation
Functional Test I>
Functional Test End Time
Functional Test Time 0.1 s
Functional Test CTRL no operation

SETTING CHANGE MODE

Menu Text Default Setting

Edit Settings? Enter PSWD
Setting Change Protected
Change Password

OP PARAMETERS

This column contains menu cells to show some of the P1F’s parameters (column to
read only).

312 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Characteristics

Menu Text Default Setting

Description PowerLogic P1F1x
Main Location: Substation
Sublocation: Bay
Device name: Name
Serial Nb PP-YYYY-MM-DD-nnnn
Order Code P1F1E1N0N92N1NN11N
Firmware Version 1.E
Firmware release 14
Active Set Group Group 1 or 2
Date 01/01/15
Time 00:00:00
Nominal Frequency: 50Hz or 60Hz

313 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Characteristics Protection Relay

Technical Characteristics
General Characteristics
Characteristics Values
Dimensions (W x H x D): 116,5 x 116,5 x
108 mm
Weight Approx. 0.80kg
Maximal internal clock drift +/-12 min a year

Auxiliary Power Supply

The PowerLogic P1F relays should be powered by DC or AC voltage:

Characteristics DC Values AC Values

Rated Voltage 24 – 60 V 24 – 60 V
+10 %/-20 % +10 %/-2 0%
90 – 250 V 90 – 240 V
+10 %/-20 % +10 %/-20 %
Ripple content 15% -
Frequency - 40-70 Hz
Typical consumption 24 V – 2.5 W 24 V – 4.0 VA
240 V – 2.5 W 240 V – 10.5 VA
Maximal consumption 24 V – 4.0 W 24 V – 6.0 VA
240 V – 4.0 W 240 V – 13.5 VA
Acceptable momentary outages* 24 V – 20 ms 24 V – 20 ms
240 V – 1.2 s 240 V – 2.1 s

*Half of the binary inputs and half of the output relays should be energized.
Communication modules should be activated. (EN 60255-26).

Current Analog Phase CT Input

Characteristics Values
Nominal current In 1 or 5 A (as setting)
Input impedance 0.002 
RMS measurement in range 40Hz – 1kHz
Fundamental harmonic measurement in
40Hz – 70Hz
range
Operating range 0.1 – 40 In
Nominal burden at In <0.3 VA at In = 5A
<0.1 VA at In = 1A
Continuous thermal withstand 4 x In
Overload in accordance with IEC 60255-6 100 In at 1.00s
40 In at 2.00s
30 In at 10.00s

314 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Characteristics

Current transformer requirement Detailed information and CT

requirement are given in
Installation chapter
Dimensioning the CTs section.

Current Analog Earth CT Input

Characteristics Values
Nominal current Ion 1 or 5 A (as setting)
Input impedance 0.002 
Fundamental harmonic measurement in
40Hz – 70Hz
range
Operating range 0.01 – 2Ion
(depends on hardware option) 0.05 – 12Ion
Nominal burden at Ion <0.3 VA at In = 5A
<0.1 VA at In = 1A
Continuous thermal withstand 4 x In
Overload in accordance with IEC 60255-6 100 In at 1.00s
40 In at 2.00s
30 In at 10.00s
Current transformer requirement Detailed information and CT
requirement are given in
Installation chapter
Dimensioning the CTs section.

Voltage (VN) Analog VT Input

Characteristics Values
Nominal voltage range 57 – 130 Vac
Input impedance 40 k
Operation range 5 – 130 Vac
1st harmonic measurement in range 40 – 70 Hz
Nominal burden at voltages
57 V 0.08 VA
100 V 0.25 VA
110 V 0.3025 VA

315 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Characteristics Protection Relay

Binary Inputs

Binary inputs type: optically isolated inputs

Characteristics Applicable to DC Values AC Values

hardware option
Operating Range 24 – 60 Vac/dc 19 – 66 V 19 – 66 V
90 – 240 Vac/250 Vdc 72 – 275 V 72 – 264 V
Minimum 24 – 60 Vac/dc 13 V 12 V
polarization voltage
90 – 240 Vac/250 Vdc 42 V 40 V
Maximum 24 – 60 Vac/dc 12 mA (66 V) 12 mA (66 V)
polarization current 90 – 240 Vac/250 Vdc 2.5 mA (275 V) 2.5 mA (264 V)
316pprox..
Maximum 24 – 60 Vac/dc 66 V 66 V
continuous 90 – 240 Vac/250 Vdc 300 V 264 V
withstand
Filtering Time 1) 24 – 60 Vac/dc 30 ms 30 ms
90 – 240 Vac/250 Vdc 30 ms 30 ms

Note:
2) Filtering time is declared for Nominal Voltage range. For voltage value below
this range additional filtering time delay: < 20ms must be considered.

Binary input energy consumption

Logic input burden for Vx 24 – 60 Vac/dc R imput = 316pprox.. 6 k
90 – 240 Vac/250 Vdc R imput = 316pprox.. 109
k
Logic input recognition time 24 – 60 Vac/dc As filtering time + 2 ms
90 – 240 Vac/250 Vdc As filtering time + 2 ms

316 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Characteristics

Control and Trip Relays

Below data applies following relay outputs: WD, RL1, RL2, RL3.
Characteristics DC Values AC Values
Contact relay Dry contact, Ag Ni Dry contact, Ag Ni
Rated voltage 250 V 250 V
Continuous 5A 5A
current
250 Vdc; 1250 VA resistive (cos  = unity)
Braking
50 W resistive 1250 VA inductive (cos  = 0.7)
capacity 30 W inductive (L/R = 40 ms)
Making capacity 250 V, 30 A, 200 ms 250 V, 30 A, 200 ms
2000 operations 2000 operations
Loaded contact 10000 operations minimum 10000 operations minimum
Unloaded 100000 operations minimum 100000 operations minimum
contact
Operate time Less than 10ms
Reset time Less than 5ms

Signal Relays

Below data applies following relay outputs: RL4, RL5, RL6, RL7.
Characteristics DC Values AC Values
Contact relay Dry contact, Ag Ni Dry contact, Ag Ni
Rated voltage 250 V 250 V
Continuous 5A 5A
current
250 Vdc; 1000 VA resistive (cos  = unity)
Braking
30 W resistive 1000 VA inductive (cos  = 0.7)
capacity
15 W inductive (L/R = 40 ms)
Loaded contact 10000 operations minimum 10000 operations minimum
Unloaded 100000 operations minimum 100000 operations minimum
contact
Operate time Less than 10 ms
Reset time Less than 5 ms

Communication Port

Characteristics Values
Type 2-wire RS485 differential
Line impedance 120 *
*Lack of internal terminating resistor

317 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Characteristics Protection Relay

Environmental Characteristics
Electromagnetic Compatibility

Electromagnetic Standard Level/Cl Value

Compatibility ass

Emission Radiated EN 60255-26 Frequency range:

Class A
emission CISPR 11 (30-1000 MHz)
30-230 MHz:
40 dB (V/m) – measurement
with detector QP
230-1000 MHz:
47 dB (V/m) – measurement
with detector QP
Frequency range:
(1 GHz-2 GHz)
CISPR 22 56 dB (V/m) – measurement
with detector average
76 dB (V/m) – measurement
with detector peak at 3 m
EN 60255-26 Frequency Range:
Conducted Class A
emission CISPR 22 (0,15 – 30 MHz)
0,15 MHz-0,5 MHz:
79 dB (V) – measurement
with detector QP
66 dB (V) – measurement
with detector AVG
0,5 MHz-30 MHz:
73 dB (V) – measurement
with detector QP
60 dB (V) – measurement
with detector AVG

Immunity Radiated EN 61000-4-3 Level 3 10 V/m, 900 MHz 100% AM,

tests digital radio 200 Hz/50% square wave
telephones

Radiated EN 61000-4-3 Level 3 Test field strength, frequency

electromagneti band:
c energy - 80 MHz to 1000 MHz: 10 V/m,
- 1.4 GHz to 2.7 GHz: 10 V/m
Test using AM: 1 kHz / 80% sinus
Spot frequencies:
80 MHz, 160 MHz, 380 MHz,
450 MHz, 900 MHz, 1850 MHz,
2150 MHz
80 % AM, 1 kHz, 100 % (duty
cycle)

Electrostatic EN 61000-4-2 Level 3 8 kV discharge in air to all

discharge communication ports.
6 kV point contact discharge to
any part of the front of the product.

1 MHz Burst EN 61000-4-18 Level 3 Common-mode test voltage:

High 2.5 kV,
Frequency
Disturbance Differential test voltage: 1.0 kV,
Test 1 Mhz, 75 ns, 400 Hz, 200 Ω
Test duration: 2 s

Magnetic fields EN 61000-4-8 Level 5 50 Hz, 100 A/m – 1 minute for

at power each position
frequencies

318 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Characteristics

50 Hz, 1000 A/m – 1 seconds for

each position

Pulse magnetic EN 61000-4-9 Level 5 6,4/16 µs magnetic pulse 1000

fields immunity A/m.
test
Applied to enclosure

Conducted EN 61000-4-6 Level 3 Disturbing test voltage: 10 V,

radiofrequency
disturbances 150 kHz to 80 MHz,
80% Amplitude Modulation, 1 kHz
Spot frequencies: 27 MHz,
68 MHz

Electrical fast EN 61000-4-4 Level 4 ±4 kV, 5 kHz applied directly to

transients/burst auxiliary supply, CTs, VN, opto
inputs, output relays.
±2 kV, 5 kHz applied to
communication ports.

Surges EN 61000-4-5 Level 4 Time to half-value: 1.2/50 µs,

Amplitude: 2 kV for line to line, 4
kV for line to earth
In order to suppress transient
interference peaks at the logic
signal inputs it is suggested to set
the parameter AUX timer to 20ms.
Surge immunity test not required
on communication port interfacing
cables less than 10 m.

ac and dc EN 61000-4-11 – 0% of residual voltage:

voltage dips
EN 61000-4-29 10 ms, 20 ms, 50 ms, 100 ms,
200 ms, 500 ms (ac/dc)

40 % of residual voltage:
200 ms (50 Hz), 200 ms(60 Hz)
200 ms (dc)

70 % of residual voltage:
500 ms (50 Hz), 500 ms(60 Hz)
500 ms (dc)

ac and dc EN 61000-4-11 – 0% residual voltage,

voltage
interruptions EN 61000-4-29 5 s (50 Hz), 5 s (60 Hz)
5 s (dc)

ac component EN 61000-4-17 – 15 % of rated dc value

in dc (ripple)
100 Hz and 120 Hz

Logic Inputs at EN 61000-4-18 Level 4 300 V MC, 150 V MD

power
frequency
EN 60255-26
Gradual shut- – Shut-down ramp 60 s
down/start –up
(for dc power power off 5 min
supply) start-up ramp 60 s

Mechanical Robustness

319 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Characteristics Protection Relay

Mechanical Standard Level/Class Value

Robustness
Vibration EN 60255-21-1 Class 1 Response 0,5 gn: 10 Hz – 150 Hz
Endurance 1 gn; 10 Hz – 150 Hz

Shock and bump EN 60255-21-2 Class 1 Shock response 5 gn/11 ms

Shock withstand 15 gn/11 ms
Bump 10 gn/16 ms

Seismic EN 60255-21-3 Class 2 2 gn horizontal / 1 gn vertical

Climatic Requirements

Climatic Standard Level/Class Value

Requirements

Ambient EN 60255-1 Ad, Bd Operating temperature range:

-25 °C to +60 °C
temperature range EN 60068-2-1 (-13 °F to +140 °F),
EN 60068-2-2 Short time operation temperature range
Ae, Be (<16 h)
-30 °C to +70 °C
(-22 °F to +158 °F).

Storage and transit:

Ab, Bb -30 °C to +70 °C
(-22 °F to +158 °F).

Ambient humidity EN 60068-2-78 Cab 21 days at 93 % relative humidity and

range +40 °C

10 days at 93 % relative humidity and

+60 °C

Cyclic temperature EN 60068-2-30 Db Damp heat cyclic, six (12 + 12) hour
with humidity test cycles,
93% RH, +25 °C to +55 °C

Corrosive EN 60068-2-60 Ke Industrial corrosive environments/poor

Environments (Method 4) environmental control, mixed gas flow
test.
21 days at 75 % relative humidity and
25 °C Exposure to elevated
concentrations of H2S(10 ppb),
CI2 (10 ppb), NO2 (200 ppb), SO2 (200
ppb)

Cyclic temperature EN 60068-2-14 Nb -25 °C to +60 °C

test
100 cycles

Safety Requirements

Safety Requirements Standard Value

Insulation EN 60255-27 Insulation resistance > 500 Ω at Vdc
(Using electronic/brushless insulation tester).

320 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Characteristics

Safety Requirements Standard Value

Creepage distances and EN 60255-27 Pollution degree 2,
clearances Overvoltage category III,
Impulse test voltage 5 kV,
2 kV rms AC, 1 min:
High Voltage (dielectric) EN 60255-27 between all case terminals connected together,
withstand and the case earth/ground;
2 kV RMS AC, 1 minute:
between all terminals of independent circuits.
1 kV rms AC for 1 min:
across normally open control and signaling
contacts

Impulse voltage withstand EN 60255-27 Front time: 1.2 µs, Time to half-value: 50 µs,
Peak value: 5 kV
Source Characteristics: 500 Ohm, 0.5 J.

Enclosure Protection

Enclosure protection Standard Value

Enclosure protection EN 60529 IP 20 Protection for relay housing
IP 20 Protection for terminals.
IP 54 Protection (front panel) for flush mounted
case

Certification/declaration

EN 60255-26 EMC Directive 2014/30/EU

European Commission’s
directives
EN 60255-27 LV Directive 2014/35/EU

321 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Maintenance Protection Relay

Maintenance
Preventive Maintenance
Introduction

To obtain maximum availability of the installation, it is essential to keep PowerLogic

P1F operational full time. The P1F internal self-tests (external memory (FRAM,
FLASH), analog inputs waveform, RTC check, hardware watchdog), and the
watchdog relay alert the user in the event of internal PowerLogic P1F failure.

Nonetheless, elements outside the P1F are not subject to these self-tests and it is
therefore necessary to carry out regular preventive maintenance.

Nothing inside the PowerLogic P1F requires preventive maintenance, nor can
anything be replaced by the user.

List of Interventions

The table below gives the typical frequency of interventions. The intervals between
visual inspections depends on the installation operating conditions.

Intervention Frequency
Routine check Weekly
LED test Annual
Inspection of the rear panel
Checking the complete trip chain Every 5 years

Routine Check

• Veryfi that the phase currents and the earth fault current measured by
PowerLogic P1F are appropriate for the load being powered.

• Check that the Healthy LED is on and not blinking.

LED Test

The LED test is used to check that each LED on the front panel are working
correctly.
To perform the test (if any protections are not triggered and PowerLogic P1F is
energized from the voltage), press R button from default display menu level. After
this, all LEDs on the front panel light up for 322pprox.. 1 s.

Inspection of the Rear Panel

Check that the connections are tight and free from corrosion, paying particular
attention to the earth terminal and the CT connections.
If the CT connections are not tightened properly, this generates excessive heat rise
which can lead to the destruction of terminals and the CTs.

Checking the Trip Chain

It is important to check regularly that the complete trip chain, from the CTs to the
P1F and through to the trip coil, is always operational.

322 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Maintenance

Troubleshooting Assistance
Introduction

The paragraphs below list the actions to be taking after observing abnormal
PowerLogic P1F behavior. In the event of an anomaly, do not cut off the auxiliary
power supply before making a diagnosis.

LEDs and Display Unit Off

Symptom Possible Causes Action/Remedy Refer to…

All the LEDs are Auxiliary power Connect auxiliary Identification of
off, as well as the supply is not power supply to the Connectors
display unit connected terminals A1 – A2 on the Rear
Panel, page 24

Auxiliary power Check that the Power Supply

supply absent auxiliary power Voltage, page
supply level is within 314
the permissible
range.

Internal failure Change the P1F unit. Removing P1F,

page 22

PowerLogic P1F Healthy LED flashing

Flashing of the Healthy LED indicates that PowerLogic P1F has gone into the fail
position following detection by the embedded self-tests of the failure of one of its
components.

The fail position is characterized by:

• Healthy LED flashing
• Watchdog relay, in the off-position
• Output relays in the off-position (normal position)
• Communication inoperative

In this case, PowerLogic P1F is no longer operational. Change the P1F.

No Display or Incomplete Display

Symptom Possible Action/Remedy Refer to…

Causes
The Healthy Failure of the Change the P1F Removing P1F, page
LED is on display unit unit 22
(lights up
green), but the
display does
not appear or is
incomplete

Communication Problem (L (option), N, B, A, E, E+)

During normal operation, the status of the rear communication port is signaled by
flashing rectangles in the top and bottom right corners of the display. Tx (Transmit)
is assigned to the top right corner, Rx (Receive) is assigned to the bottom right

323 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Maintenance Protection Relay

corner of the display. Flashing of the rectangles indicate the operation of the rear
communication port.

If the PowerLogic P1F relay is not communicating with the SCADA system, check:
• That the supervisor is sending frames to the relevant P1F
• All the P1F communication parameters
• The wiring of each P1F
• The tightness of the screw terminals on connector C of each P1F
• The bus polarization, at a single point, in general by the master
• The line matching at the ends of the RS 485 network

If the problem persists, connect the P1F relays one by one on the communication
network to determine which P1F relay is responsible for the problem.

Lost Password

If you lost the password, read the serial number on the PowerLogic P1F label and
contact your local Schneider Electric after-sales service.

NOTICE
Please take care of your modified new password, reseting password may cause
some inconvenience or extra cost.

324 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Maintenance

Removing PowerLogic P1F

Introduction

If the PowerLogic P1F relay cannot be repaired by following the instructions in

Troubleshooting Assistance, page 323, it must be replaced.

Removing PowerLogic P1F

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC ARC, BURNS OR EXPLOSION
• Wear insulating gloves to avoid any contact with a conductor that has
accidentally been energized.
• Short-circuit secondary current transformer winding by use test block without
disconnecting the wires from it. This connector ensures continuity of the
current transformer secondary circuits.
• If you need to disconnect the wires connected to the test block, short-circuit
the current transformer secondary circuits.

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

The procedure for removing the PowerLogic P1F relay is as follows:

Step Action
1 If the P1F allows you to, read (or extract by eSetup Easergy Pro event and
disturbance recorder) and make a note of the last trips/events that have
occurred.
2 Make a note of the symptoms observed, in particular the failure codes
displayed.
3 Switch off the unit.
4 Unscrew all wires
5 Depending on assembly method unscrew fastening elements or
disassemble spring clips
6 Remove the PowerLogic P1F.

Return for Expert Assessment

If returning the PowerLogic P1F for expert assessment, use the original packaging
or packaging offering level 1protection against vibrations (standard IEC 60255-21-1)
and against shocks (standard IEC 60255-21-2).

The PowerLogic P1F relay must be returned accompanied by its settings sheet and
the following information:
• Name and address of the initiator
• PowerLogic P1F type and serial number
• Date of the incident
• Description of the incident
• LED status and message displayed at the time of the incident
• List of stored events

325 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Maintenance Protection Relay

End of Life

If the PowerLogic P1F is not repairable:

Step Action
1 Remove the PowerLogic P1F as indicated above.
2 Dismantle the PowerLogic P1F in accordance with the End-of-Life
Instructions for PowerLogic P1. These instructions provide:
• Recyclability rates for our products.
• Guidance for mitigating personnel hazards during the dismantling of
your products and before recycling operations.
• Parts identification for recycling or for selective treatment, to mitigate
environmental hazards/incompatibility with standard recycling processes.

326 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Application Cases

Application Cases
2CTs and CBCT application
Description

Each model (L, N, B, A, E, E+) PowerLogic P1F relays can be use in following
applications.

Details:
● Phase currents are measured in A and C phase
● B phase current is obtained from A and C phase currents
● Earth fault current is measured from dedicated earth CT
● Trip Signal is assigned to relay output 1

Figure 45. 2CTs and CBCT application diagram

au iliary
voltage

+
I
oil
+

327 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Application Cases Protection Relay

3CTs and Residual Current application

Description

Each model (L, N, B, A, E, E+) PowerLogic P1F relays can be use in following
applications.

Details:
● Phase currents are measured in A, B and C phase
● Earth fault current is measured on the common point of the 3 phase CTs
● Trip Signal is assigned to relay output 1

Figure 46. 3CTs and residual application diagram

au iliary
voltage

+
I
oil
+

328 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Application Cases

3CTs and CBCT Application with CB Control

Description

Models B, A, E, E+ of PowerLogic P1F relays can be use in following applications.

Details:
● Phase currents are measured in A, B and C phase
● Earth fault current is measured by core balance CT
● Trip and Trip CB Order signals are assigned to relay output 1
● Close CB Order signal is assigned to relay output 2
● CB status is assigned to binary inputs 1 (close) and 2 (open)
● Communication port RS 485 is connected to SCADA system (CB control is
possible from SCADA also – depending on selected control mode)

Figure 47. 3CTs and CBCT application diagram

au iliary
voltage

B status a
B status b

I lose

329 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Application Cases Protection Relay

Single Phase Application

Description

Each model (L, N, B, A, E, E+) PowerLogic P1F relays can be use in following
applications.

Details:
● Earth fault current is measured from dedicated earth CT (a) or measured on the
common point of the 3 phase CTs (b)
● Trip Signal is assigned to relay output 1
Figure 48. Examples of single-phase application diagrams
Variant no. 1 Variant no. 2
Earth fault measured by dedicated CT Earth fault measured on the common point of 3 phase
CTs
a) b)

B B

I I

IB IB

I I

Io Io

au iliary au iliary
voltage voltage

+ +
I I
oil oil
+ +

330 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Application Cases

Logic Discrimination
Description

This type of protection (B, A, E, E+) can be applied to radial feeder circuits where
there is little or no back feed. For parallel feeders, ring circuits or where there can be
a back feed from generators, directional relays should be considered.

The blocking logic function allows the upstream IDMT relay to be blocked by the
start output of a downstream relay that has detected the presence of a fault current
above its threshold. Thus, both upstream and downstream relays can have the
same current and time settings, and the blocking feature will automatically provide
grading. If the CB failure protection is active, the blocking command on the upstream
relay will be removed if the down-stream circuit breaker fails to trip.

Thus, for a fault downstream from relay C, the start output from relay C aim to
prevent relay B from operating and the start output of relay B aim to prevent relay A
from operating. Therefore all 3 relays could have the same timer and current
settings and grading would be obtained by the blocking signal received from a relay
closer to the fault. This gives a constant, close time grading, but there will be no
back-up protection in the event of pilot wires being short-circuited.

In practice it is recommended to set the upstream relay to a value that is 10% higher
than the downstream relay setting. This helps to ensure that the downstream relay
successfully blocks the upstream relay when required.

Figure 49. Logic discrimination application diagram

The “Blocking Logic” functions are assigned in the SETTING GROUP x/ INPUT
CONFIGURATION Gx/ menu. Every protection element can be assigned a blocking
function: Block.tI>, Block.tI>>, Block.tI>>>, Block.tSOTF, Block.tIN_1, Block.tIN_2,
Block.tIN_3 (E, E+), Block.tIs2>(E, E+), Block.tBrkn Cond (E, E+), Block.Itherm,
Block.AUX1, Block.AUX2, Block.AUX3, Block.CB Fail, Block.[79] (E, E+).

PowerLogic P1F relays have separate blocking functions, which can be used to
block every protection element, for example: Earth fault and phase overcurrent
stages.

331 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Version History Protection Relay

Version History
Firmware Date of Manual
Description
version issue Version
2.E.16 First version. V1.0
1. Fix wrong pictogram in cell “Functional Test, setting 0:CB Trips”;
2. Add the .pro files in the release folder;
3. Correct the CB open and close keys;
2.E.17 4. 485 protocol default setting correct, need update the SET file; Nov 25, 2020 V1.1
5. E_U0.epro file update
6. Fix missing event and fault recorder when Vx goes down and return after several seconds;
7. Fix external protection generate maltrip signal for scenario with reverse BI and loss of Vx and return;
2.E.18 1. Fix connection issue to ePro in Chinese module; Jan 07, 2021 V1.2
1. P1F Chinese module been found a connect issue to ePro;
2. Change USB deactivation time from 10mins to 60mins;
3. FCT side change default setting from MODBUS to GETSET;
4. Bug fix: AUX1 trip enabled with delay of 1s, input 1 reversed and assigned to AUX1. In this case AUX is
activated when no signal. With USB connected (AUX logic functions), when Vx power up, the AUX delay
2.E.19 timer is reset and the trip is retook after the timer 1s; Sept 01, 2021 V1.2
5. P1F Chinese issues fix (almost translation error);
6. Bug fix: cannot read anything from 0X3E00H, request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge fault record;
7. Bug fix: modify USBport issue;
8. Bug fix: ADDR 3800H, reading 34 bytes will get nothing;
9. Bug fix: Latched RLs are not off when automatically exit maintenance mode;
2.E.20 fix GetSet/IEC103, disable USBPORT and then recycle power, the relay not work Nov 26, 2021 V1.2
1. Easergy -> PowerLogic in OP Parameters in Menu (LCD display);
2. MENU version update frome M_09 to M_0A (this version can't be compatible with version before 2.E.21);
3. Easergy -> PowerLogic in Device Information when using Easergy Pro to connect relay;
4. Fixed operate valid time enlarge from 13s to 90s in keyboard self-test;
5. Change answer ”Easergy” to “PowerLo” when IEC103 protocol asks device info;
2.E.21 6. Bug fix: P1F DR Current info is lost when In(Ien) CTsec=5A and CTprim=1A; Nov 22, 2023 V1.2.0
7. Bug fix: P1F1&P116 DR 2200h need to read 16 words when only 7 is needed
8. Bug fix: P1F Easergy Studio could not poll DR
9. Bug fix: P1F TCS function RL and LED is somehow latched
10. Bug fix: P1 timestamp swapped when read the oldest fault and event
11. Bug fix: P1F1E error trip without origin
1. Add HalfDFT, PO Modbus new feature;
2. Fix CB diagnostic function issue;
2.E.22 3. After password correctly input, menu navigated back to where PASSWORD menu insert; Jan 05, 2024 V1.2.1
4. Add enable soft-switch of the keys O/I on front-panel in menu;
5. Change RI curve TMS setting range to 0.02…10 from 0.1…10, with STEP 0.01;
1. Add control setting to enable or disable half cycle DFT algorithm
2. Bug fix: P1F IN measurement display not accurate when there is 2nd Harmonic wave
2.E.23 Mar 06, 2024 V1.2.1
3. Bug fix: P1F will be locked eternally when wrong password
4. Bug fix: P1F chinese menu display issue on output/password editing

332 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Protection Relay Version History

Notes:

333 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Version History Protection Relay

Customer Care Center

http://www.se.com/ccc

Schneider Electric
35 rue Joseph Monier
92506 Rueil-Malmaison FRANCE
Phone: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00
Fax: +33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00
www.se.com

334 P1F/EN M/1.2.1

Easergy P5 User Manual P5 en M 11A
No ratings yet
Easergy P5 User Manual P5 en M 11A
434 pages
O&m Manual Electrical
100% (2)
O&m Manual Electrical
254 pages
User Manual PowerLogic P5 Protection Relay - P5 - EN - M - 44E
No ratings yet
User Manual PowerLogic P5 Protection Relay - P5 - EN - M - 44E
594 pages
PTCC Manual 2010
100% (5)
PTCC Manual 2010
227 pages
Multilin 350 Series
100% (1)
Multilin 350 Series
280 pages
PCS-978 X Instruction Manual en Overseas General X R2.13
No ratings yet
PCS-978 X Instruction Manual en Overseas General X R2.13
524 pages
Easergy P3Ux0 - User Manual - P3U - EN - M - B001 - 26-10-2017 PDF
100% (1)
Easergy P3Ux0 - User Manual - P3U - EN - M - B001 - 26-10-2017 PDF
316 pages
P3T32 Manual
No ratings yet
P3T32 Manual
350 pages
DTP - Digital Transformer Protection
100% (1)
DTP - Digital Transformer Protection
13 pages
Manual GE 745
No ratings yet
Manual GE 745
114 pages
Easergy P3F30 PDF
No ratings yet
Easergy P3F30 PDF
356 pages
Nrjcat18818en Web
No ratings yet
Nrjcat18818en Web
66 pages
1MRK511453-UEN E en Cyber Security Guideline REB500 8
No ratings yet
1MRK511453-UEN E en Cyber Security Guideline REB500 8
63 pages
Easergy P3T32 User Manual P3T en M B001!10!2017
No ratings yet
Easergy P3T32 User Manual P3T en M B001!10!2017
298 pages
Micom P40 Agile: Ge Grid Solutions
No ratings yet
Micom P40 Agile: Ge Grid Solutions
956 pages
Micom P122
0% (1)
Micom P122
626 pages
PRS-778 X Instruction Manual en Overseas General X 2.04 20200814
No ratings yet
PRS-778 X Instruction Manual en Overseas General X 2.04 20200814
275 pages
Micom P120/P121/P122/P123: P12x/EN T/Eb6
No ratings yet
Micom P120/P121/P122/P123: P12x/EN T/Eb6
628 pages
NR Test Block MD1701S Catalog
No ratings yet
NR Test Block MD1701S Catalog
3 pages
P3U en M G006 IEC Web PDF
No ratings yet
P3U en M G006 IEC Web PDF
426 pages
Guia de Instalação - Easergy P5x30 - 20211015
No ratings yet
Guia de Instalação - Easergy P5x30 - 20211015
5 pages
Easergy P1V en M 1.1
No ratings yet
Easergy P1V en M 1.1
252 pages
Relay Protection Schneider
No ratings yet
Relay Protection Schneider
424 pages
Laboratory Work No. 6 - Series and Parallel Circuit
100% (1)
Laboratory Work No. 6 - Series and Parallel Circuit
2 pages
P3U en M C004 Web PDF
No ratings yet
P3U en M C004 Web PDF
358 pages
Bus Bar System
No ratings yet
Bus Bar System
21 pages
Radhd-User Manual PDF
No ratings yet
Radhd-User Manual PDF
20 pages
UR FirmwareUpgrade 060531
No ratings yet
UR FirmwareUpgrade 060531
23 pages
MCGG Manual Relaypdf
No ratings yet
MCGG Manual Relaypdf
20 pages
BE1-CDS240 Differential Protection
No ratings yet
BE1-CDS240 Differential Protection
57 pages
7SR5 Hardware Manual V2.31
No ratings yet
7SR5 Hardware Manual V2.31
54 pages
6F2T0172 r4.2 GRE110 Manual
No ratings yet
6F2T0172 r4.2 GRE110 Manual
296 pages
Gre110 PDF
No ratings yet
Gre110 PDF
349 pages
DS Isolator CATALOG
No ratings yet
DS Isolator CATALOG
12 pages
7SR23 DAD Complete Technical Manual
100% (1)
7SR23 DAD Complete Technical Manual
222 pages
Micom P111 Universal With Communication Overcurrent Protection Relay
No ratings yet
Micom P111 Universal With Communication Overcurrent Protection Relay
14 pages
7SL86 P1C185365
No ratings yet
7SL86 P1C185365
8 pages
7SR11 and 7SR12 - Argus Complete Technical Manual
No ratings yet
7SR11 and 7SR12 - Argus Complete Technical Manual
398 pages
PCS-9705S - X - Technical Manual Supplement - EN - UK General - X - R1.00
No ratings yet
PCS-9705S - X - Technical Manual Supplement - EN - UK General - X - R1.00
15 pages
NR-660 Series Protection Device Technical Manual
No ratings yet
NR-660 Series Protection Device Technical Manual
50 pages
Ume Ingepac Ef MD Eng PDF
100% (1)
Ume Ingepac Ef MD Eng PDF
351 pages
Scope of Work For EOT CRANE Repairing and Servicing
No ratings yet
Scope of Work For EOT CRANE Repairing and Servicing
24 pages
RELT Module Presentation
No ratings yet
RELT Module Presentation
11 pages
Siprotec 4: Distance Protection 7SA522 and 7SA6
No ratings yet
Siprotec 4: Distance Protection 7SA522 and 7SA6
40 pages
Psy5 Sincro PDF
100% (3)
Psy5 Sincro PDF
52 pages
EMDG-C10065-01-7600 Relay Selection Guide Edition 6 en
No ratings yet
EMDG-C10065-01-7600 Relay Selection Guide Edition 6 en
48 pages
REL 531 - Application Manual - 1MRK 506 107-UEN
No ratings yet
REL 531 - Application Manual - 1MRK 506 107-UEN
635 pages
MODBUS Standard ACR - MODBUS Mapping Report
No ratings yet
MODBUS Standard ACR - MODBUS Mapping Report
12 pages
Protection Features: Relay Design Features:: Local Keys As Well As Remote Setting by Communication Port
No ratings yet
Protection Features: Relay Design Features:: Local Keys As Well As Remote Setting by Communication Port
17 pages
15ee302 PDF
No ratings yet
15ee302 PDF
185 pages
7XG3120 - ReyArc Catalogue Sheet
100% (1)
7XG3120 - ReyArc Catalogue Sheet
16 pages
Easergy P1F en M 1.1
No ratings yet
Easergy P1F en M 1.1
325 pages
Manual Modbus ME3011b - E - r02 PDF
No ratings yet
Manual Modbus ME3011b - E - r02 PDF
52 pages
Types KCGG 122, 142 and KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Overcurrent Protection
0% (1)
Types KCGG 122, 142 and KCEG 112, 142, 152, 242 Overcurrent Protection
22 pages
Smartpack2 Basic Industrial: User's Guide
No ratings yet
Smartpack2 Basic Industrial: User's Guide
32 pages
Controller RWK
No ratings yet
Controller RWK
42 pages
R8017G MBCH
100% (1)
R8017G MBCH
52 pages
Calculation of Electrical Energy With Solar
100% (1)
Calculation of Electrical Energy With Solar
4 pages
Rel 511
No ratings yet
Rel 511
101 pages
Siprotec 7Rw600 Numerical Voltage, Frequency and Overexcitation Protection Relay
No ratings yet
Siprotec 7Rw600 Numerical Voltage, Frequency and Overexcitation Protection Relay
12 pages
REL650
No ratings yet
REL650
79 pages
STS365T
No ratings yet
STS365T
8 pages
Surge Protection Made As Simple As A Circuit Breaker
No ratings yet
Surge Protection Made As Simple As A Circuit Breaker
8 pages
EE8703-RENEWABLE ENERGYSYSTEMS-646114533-EE8712 RENEWABLE ENERGY SYSTEMS LAB Manual
No ratings yet
EE8703-RENEWABLE ENERGYSYSTEMS-646114533-EE8712 RENEWABLE ENERGY SYSTEMS LAB Manual
46 pages
Commissioning Service Department Commissioning Standard Test Formats Description: SPAU 341 C3 AVR RELAY
No ratings yet
Commissioning Service Department Commissioning Standard Test Formats Description: SPAU 341 C3 AVR RELAY
2 pages
Micom S1 Studio: Micom Ied Support Software
No ratings yet
Micom S1 Studio: Micom Ied Support Software
2 pages
Soft-Starter: Programming Manual
No ratings yet
Soft-Starter: Programming Manual
162 pages
BA300
No ratings yet
BA300
7 pages
SENTRON WL VL Circuit Breakers With Communication Capability MODBUS en en-US
No ratings yet
SENTRON WL VL Circuit Breakers With Communication Capability MODBUS en en-US
300 pages
Stator Fault
No ratings yet
Stator Fault
26 pages
The Failue of Success - The Singapore Story
No ratings yet
The Failue of Success - The Singapore Story
62 pages
UCI274G 14 TD EN - Rev - B
No ratings yet
UCI274G 14 TD EN - Rev - B
8 pages
Product Data Sheet: C120H - Circuit Breaker - 4P - 100A - C Curve
No ratings yet
Product Data Sheet: C120H - Circuit Breaker - 4P - 100A - C Curve
2 pages
Multi-Phase, Multi-Voltage Surge Protective Devices SPD - Leviton - PK-93699-10-02-0B PDF
No ratings yet
Multi-Phase, Multi-Voltage Surge Protective Devices SPD - Leviton - PK-93699-10-02-0B PDF
2 pages
SIPROTEC 5 Compact Catalog - 7SX800
No ratings yet
SIPROTEC 5 Compact Catalog - 7SX800
96 pages
Electric Machine Project
No ratings yet
Electric Machine Project
5 pages
Non Dissipative Snubber
No ratings yet
Non Dissipative Snubber
5 pages
ELK421E Chap 1.0 Power Gen
No ratings yet
ELK421E Chap 1.0 Power Gen
69 pages
Preventing and Identifying Potential Failures of Dead Break Elbows in Wind Farm Application - Brian - Peyres PDF
No ratings yet
Preventing and Identifying Potential Failures of Dead Break Elbows in Wind Farm Application - Brian - Peyres PDF
6 pages
WEG Electronic Relays
No ratings yet
WEG Electronic Relays
28 pages
Impact of Nonlinear Loads On Motor Generator Sets
No ratings yet
Impact of Nonlinear Loads On Motor Generator Sets
86 pages
Ixfn 80N50
No ratings yet
Ixfn 80N50
4 pages
Relay Calculation
No ratings yet
Relay Calculation
60 pages
Year-6-Science-Electricity-Extra Worksheet 2
No ratings yet
Year-6-Science-Electricity-Extra Worksheet 2
5 pages
IET Power Electronics - 2020 - Kumar - Review On Fault Diagnosis and Fault Tolerance For DC DC Converters
No ratings yet
IET Power Electronics - 2020 - Kumar - Review On Fault Diagnosis and Fault Tolerance For DC DC Converters
13 pages
16235-Solar Generation System
No ratings yet
16235-Solar Generation System
5 pages
Thesis On Solar Panels
100% (3)
Thesis On Solar Panels
4 pages
LV430505 - DATASHEET - WW - en-GB - MIC 6.2 - 160A
No ratings yet
LV430505 - DATASHEET - WW - en-GB - MIC 6.2 - 160A
2 pages
ABB - Technical Note 127 - LVD-EOTKN127U-EN - BackupGeneratorsAndHarmonics - RevB
No ratings yet
ABB - Technical Note 127 - LVD-EOTKN127U-EN - BackupGeneratorsAndHarmonics - RevB
4 pages
Fault Location Systems The Positive Apparent: Unbalanced Using Sequence Impedance
No ratings yet
Fault Location Systems The Positive Apparent: Unbalanced Using Sequence Impedance
6 pages
SMDB
No ratings yet
SMDB
7 pages
Generator Docking Station Engineering Package
No ratings yet
Generator Docking Station Engineering Package
16 pages
Ohm Metrics™: Instruction Manual
No ratings yet
Ohm Metrics™: Instruction Manual
5 pages
GRUNFOS SP 5A-25.3x220V.2,2kW.50Hz: Description Value General Information
No ratings yet
GRUNFOS SP 5A-25.3x220V.2,2kW.50Hz: Description Value General Information
1 page
LV Panel Installation
No ratings yet
LV Panel Installation
3 pages
5B3 3pole 2V 8320W00003 PDF
No ratings yet
5B3 3pole 2V 8320W00003 PDF
1 page